Nokia MOBILE PHONE N86 User Manual
Nokia N86 8MP User Guide Issue 2
Contents Safety 7 About your device 7 Network services 8 Shared memory 9 ActiveSync 9 Magnets and magnetic fields 9 Get start ed 10 Keys and parts (front and top) 10 Keys and parts (back and sides) 10 Short slide keys 11 Kickstand 11 Insert SIM card and battery 11 Memory card 12 Switch the device on and off 13 Charge the battery 13 Headset 14 Attach wrist s trap 15 Antenna locations 15 Find help 17 In-device help 17 Support 17 Additional applications 17 Update device software 17 Settings 18 Access codes 19 Prolong battery life 19 Free memory 20 Your dev ice 21 Phone setup 21 Nokia Switch 21 Display indicators 22 Shortcuts 23 Mobile Search 24 Volume and loudspeaker control 24 Offline profile 24 Fast downloading 25 Ovi 26 About Ovi Store 26 Ovi Contacts 26 Ovi Files 27 Camera 28 About the camera 28 Activate the camera 28 Image captu re 28 Video recording 34 Camera settings 35 Photos 37 About Photos 37 View images and videos 37 View and edit file details 38 Organise images a nd videos 38 Active toolbar 38 Albums 39 Tags 39 Slide show 39 TV-out mode 40 Edit images 41 2 Contents
Edit videos 41 Gallery 43 About Gallery 43 Main view 43 Sound clips 43 Streaming links 43 Presentations 43 Connectivity 45 Wireless LAN 45 Connection manager 46 Bluetooth 47 Data cable 50 PC connections 50 Sync 50 Browser 52 About Browser 52 Browse t he web 52 Browser toolbar 52 Navigate pages 53 Web fee ds and b logs 53 Widget s 54 Content search 54 Download and purchase items 54 Bookma rks 54 Empty the cache 55 End the connection 55 Connection security 55 Web settin gs 56 Music 57 FM radio 57 Nokia Music Store 58 Nokia Internet Radio 58 Nokia Podcasting 60 Music player 63 FM transmitter 66 Position ing (GPS) 68 About GPS 68 Assisted GPS (A -GPS) 68 Hold your device correctly 69 Tips on creating a GPS connection 69 Position requests 70 Landmarks 70 GPS data 70 Nokia Maps 72 About Maps 72 Network positioning 72 Compass 72 Move on a map 73 Display indicators 73 Find locations 74 Plan rout es 74 Save and send locations 75 View your saved items 75 Navigate to the destinat ion 75 Walk to your destination 76 Drive to your destination 76 Traffic and safety 77 Maps settings 78 Internet settin gs 78 Navigation settings 78 3 Contents
Route se ttings 79 Map setti ngs 7 9 Update maps 79 Nokia Map Loader 8 0 Home network 81 About home network 81 Settings for home network 81 Activate sh aring and define cont ent 82 View and share media files 8 2 Copy media files 83 Important security information 83 Nokia Video Cen tre 85 View and download video clips 85 Video feeds 86 My videos 86 Transfer videos from your PC 86 Video centre settings 87 N-Gage 88 About N-Gage 88 N-Gage views 88 Get starte d 88 Play and manage games 89 Edit profile details 90 Connect with other players 90 N-Gage settings 91 Messaging 93 Messaging main view 93 Write text 93 Write and send message s 95 Messaging inbox 96 Message reader 96 E-mail 97 View messages on a SIM card 99 Messaging settings 100 Make calls 104 Voice calls 104 Options during a call 104 Voice mail 105 Answer or decline a call 105 Make a conference call 105 Speed dial a phone number 106 Call waiting 106 Voice dialling 106 Make a video call 107 During a video call 108 Answer or decline a video call 108 Video sharing 108 Log 111 Internet calls 113 About internet calls 113 Activate inter net calls 113 Make internet calls 113 Blocked contacts 113 Manage internet call services 113 Internet call sett ings 114 Contact s (phonebo ok) 115 Save and edit names and numbers 115 Manage names and numbers 115 Default num bers and address es 115 4 Contents
Ringing tones, images, and call text for contacts 115 Copy contacts 116 SIM services 116 Manage contact group s 117 Personalise your de vice 118 Change the look of your device 118 Audio themes 118 Set tones 119 3-D tones 119 Modify the standby mode 120 Modify the main menu 120 Time management 121 Clock 121 Calendar 121 Office 123 File manager 123 About Quickoffice 124 Currency converter 124 Calculator 124 Zip manager 125 Notes 125 Adobe Reader 125 Applications 126 RealPlayer 126 Application manager 127 Recorder 129 Speech 129 Licences 130 Settings 131 General settings 131 Phone settings 135 Connection settings 137 Application settings 141 Remote configuration 141 Troubleshoot ing 144 Green tips 147 Save energy 147 Recycle 147 Save paper 147 Learn more 147 Accessories 14 8 Battery 148 Battery and charger information 148 Nokia battery authenticati on guidelines 148 Taking care of your device 149 Recycle 149 Additional safet y information 150 Small children 150 Operating environment 150 Medical devices 150 Vehicles 150 Potentially explosive environments 150 Emergency calls 151 Certification information (SAR) 151 5 Contents
Index 152 6 Contents
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAF ELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COM ES FIRST Obey all local laws. Alwa ys keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, which coul d affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN RESTRICTED ARE AS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical equipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting areas. GLASS PARTS The front cover of the de vice is made of glass. This glass can break if the device is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If the glass breaks, do not touch the glass parts of the device or attempt to remove the broken glass from the device. Stop using the device until the glass is replaced by qualified service personnel. QUALIFIE D SERVIC E Only qualified personne l may install or repair this product. ACCESSORIES AN D BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible produ cts. WATER-RESI STANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. Note: The surface of this device does not contain nickel in the platings. The surface of this device contains stain less steel. About your de vice The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800,1900, and UMTS 900, 7 Safety
1900, 2100 networks. Contact your service p rovider for more information about networks. When using the features in this devi ce, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights . Copyright protection may pr event some images, music, and other content from being copied, modified, or transferred. Your device supports sev eral methods of con nectivity. Like computers, your device may be exposed to viruses and other harmful content. Exercise caution with messages, connectivity requests, browsing, and downloa ds. Only install and use services and other software from trustworthy sources that offer ade quate security and protection against harmful so ftware, such as applications that are Sy mbian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Consider insta lling antivirus an d other security software on your device and any connected com puter. Importa nt: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the devi ce to stop function ing. Your device may have preins talled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites. You may also access other third- party sites through your device. Third-pa rty sites are not affiliated with Nokia, an d Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you choose to access such sites, you should take precau tions for security or con tent. Warning: To use any features in this dev ice, other than the ala rm clock, the device must be sw itched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be v iewed or modified. Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety inst ructions. Do not connect incompatible products. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Network servi ces To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Some features are not available on all networks; other features ma y require that you ma ke specific arrangements with your service provider to use them. Network services invo lve transmission of data. Check with your service provid er for details about fees in your home network and when roaming on other networks. Your service provider can explain what charges will apply. Some networks ma y have limitations that affect how you can use some features of this devi ce requiring network support such as support for specific technologies like WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols and language-d ependent characters. 8 Safety
Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on you r device menu. Your device may also have cus tomized items such as menu names, menu order, and icons. Shared me mory The following features in th is device may share memory: multimedia messag ing (MMS), e-mail applic ation, instant messaging. Use of one or mo re of these features may reduce the memory available for the remaining features. If your device displays a message that the memory is full, delete some of the information stored in the shared memory. During extended operation su ch as an active video call and high speed data connection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect t he device is not working proper ly, take it to th e nearest authorised service facility. ActiveSync Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM info rmation between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. Magnets and magnetic fields Keep your device away from magnets or magnetic fields. 9 Safety
Get started Keys and parts (front and top) 1 Light sensor 2 Selection keys 3 Call key 4 Menu key 5 Numeric key pad 6 Microphone 7 Scroll and selection key 8 Clear key C 9 End key 10 Earpiece 11 Secondary camera 1 Power key 2 Nokia AV Connect or (3.5 mm) 3 Micro USB connector Keys and parts (back and sides) 1 Stereo speaker 10 Get started
2 Volume/Zoom key 3 Capture key 4 Stereo speaker 5 Flash and video light 6 Lens cover 7 Main camera 8 Key lock switch Short slide keys Short slide keys act as media, zoom, or gaming keys depending on the application. Short slide keys also enable multitasking, for example, if you are browsing the internet with the Music player application in the background, you can control the player with the Play/ Pause key. 1 Forward/Zoom in key 2 Play/Pause key and gaming key 3 Stop key and gaming key 4 Rewind/Zoom out key Kickstand You can use th e kickstand, for example, when you view images or video clips. Open the kickstand at the back of the device, and place the device on a level surface. When you open the kickstand, the Photos application is opened automatically . To modify the kickstand set tings, select Menu > Tools > Settings and Gene ral > Personalisation > Kickstand . Insert SIM card and battery Safe removal. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. 1 With the back of the device facing you, remove the back cover by lifting it from the bottom end of the device. 11 Get started
2 Insert the SIM card into the card holder. Ensure that the bevelled corner on the card is facing right, and that the contact area on the card is fa cing down. 3 Insert the battery. 4 To replace the cover, press the cover down u ntil the cover locks into place. Memory card Use only compatible microSD cards approved by Nokia for use with this device. Nokia uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with this de vice. Incompatible cards may damage the card and the devi ce and corrupt data stored on the card. Insert the me mory card A memory card may be alread y inserted in the device. If not, do the following: 1 With the back of the device fa cing you, lift up t he cover. 2 Insert a compatible memory card in th e slot. E nsure that the contact area on the ca rd is facing down and towards the slot. 3 Push the car d in. You ca n hear a click when the card locks into place. 12 Get started
4 Close the back cover. Ensure that the cover is properly closed. Remove t he memory card Important: Do not remove the memory card during an operation when the card is being accessed. Doin g so may damage the memory card and th e device, and corrupt data stored on the card. 1 Before you remove the card , press the power key, and select Remove memory card . All applications are closed. 2W h e n Removing memory card will close all open applications. Remove anyway? is displayed, select Yes . 3W h e n Remove memory card and press 'OK' is displayed, remove the back cover of the device. 4 Press the memory card to release it from the slot. 5 Pull out the memory card. If the de vice is sw itche d on, select OK . 6 Replace the back cover. Ensure that the cover is properly closed. Switch the device on and off To switch on the device: 1 Press and hold the power key. 2 If the device asks for a PIN code or lock code, enter it, and select OK . The preset lock code is 12345 . If you forget the code and your de vice is locked, your device will require service and additional charges may apply. For more information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. To switch off the device, press the power key briefly, and select Switch off! . Charge the ba ttery Your battery has been partia lly charged at the factory. There may not be a need to charge the battery in advance. If the device indicates a low ch arge, do the following: 13 Get started
Regular charging 1 Connect the charger to a wall outlet. 2 Connect the charger to the device . The charging indicator light next to the U SB connector is lit w hen the battery is being charged. 3 When the device indi cates a full charge, disconnect the charger from the device, then from the wa ll outlet. You do not need to charge the battery for a specif ic length of time, and you ca n use the de vice while it is charging. If the battery is completely disc harged, it may take several minutes before the charging indicat or appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Tip: Disconnect the charger from the wall outlet when the charger is not in use. A charger that is connected t o the outlet consumes power even when it is not connected to the device. USB char ging You can use USB charging when a wall outlet is not available. With USB charging , you can als o transfer dat a while charging the device. 1 Connect a compatible USB device to your device using a compatible USB cable. The efficiency of USB chargi ng varies significantly. In some cases, it ma y take a very long time for charging to start and the device to start functioning. 2 If your device is switched on, you can selec t from the available USB mode option s on the display of the device. During extended operation such as an active video call and high speed data connection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition i s normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorised service facility. Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphones to your device. You may need t o select the cable mode. Some headsets come in two parts, a remote control unit and headphones. A remote cont rol unit has a microphone and keys to answer or en d a phone call, adjust the volume, and play music or video files. T o use the headphones with a remote control unit, connect the unit to the Nokia AV Connector in the device, then connect the headphones to the unit. 14 Get started
Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Do not connect products that crea te an output sig nal as this may cause damage to the device. Do not conn ect any voltage source to the Nokia AV Conn ector. When connecting any extern al device or any headset, other than those approved by Nokia for use with this device, to the Nokia AV Connector, pay special attention to volume levels. Attach wris t strap 1 Open the back cover. 2 Thread a wrist strap, and tight en it. 3 Close the back cover. Antenna locations Your device may have internal and external antennas. Avoid touching the antenna a rea unnecessarily while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Contact with antennas affects t he communicatio n quality and may cause a higher power lev el during operation and may reduce the battery life. 1 Bluetooth and wireless LAN (WLAN), and GPS antennas 2 FM transmitter ante nna 3 Cellular antenna The FM transmitter antenna is locat ed in the back cover of your device. If you change the back cover, check that the new cover includes this antenna, otherwise this 15 Get started
connection stops working. Bluetooth, WLAN, and GPS antennas are located a t the back of your device. 16 Get started
Find help In-device help Your device contains instru ctions to help to use the applications in your device. To open help texts from the main menu, select Menu > Applications > Help and the application for which you want to read inst ructions. When an applic ation is open, t o access the h elp text for the current view, select Options > Help . When you are reading the inst ructions, to change the size of the help text, select Options > Decrease font size or Increase font size . You may find links to related topics at the end of the help text. If you select an underlined word, a short exp lanation is displayed. Help texts use the fo llowing indicators: Link to a related help topic. Link to the application being discussed. When you are reading the inst ructions, to switch between help texts and the appl ication that is open in the background, select Options > Show open apps. and the desired application. Support When you want to learn more a bout how to use your product or you are un sure how your device should function, see the support page s at www.nokia.com/ support or your local Nokia website, w ww.nokia.mobi/ support (with a mobile device), the Help appli cation in the device, or the user guide. If this does not resolve your issue, do the following: ⢠Restart the device: switch off the device, an d remove the battery. After about a minute, replace the battery, and switch on the device. ⢠Restore the original factor y settings as explained in the user guide. Your documents and files are not deleted in the reset. If the issue remain s unsolv ed, contact Nokia for repair options. See www.nokia.com/repair. Before sending your device for repair, always back up the data in your device. Additional applications There are various application s provided by Nokia and different third-party software developers that help you do more with your device. Thes e applicat ions are expla ined in the guides that are avai lable on the product support pages at www.nokia.com/ support or your local Nokia website. Update device software Software updates using your P C Software updates may include new features and enhanced functions that were not available at the time of p urchase of your device. Updati ng th e software may also improve the device performance. 17 Find help
Nokia Software Updat er is a PC application that enables you to update your device so ftware. To update your device software, you need a compatible PC, broadband int ernet access, and a compatible USB data cable to connect your device to the PC. To get more information, to check th e release notes for the latest software versions, and to download the Nokia Software Updater application, see www.nokia.com/ softwareupdate or your local Nokia website. To update the device software, do the following: 1 Download and install the Nokia Software Up dater application to your PC. 2 Connect your device to the PC using a USB data cable, and open the Nokia S oftware Update r application . The Nokia Software Updater applicat ion guides you to back up your files, update the software, and restore your files. Software updates over the air Select Menu > A pplications > SW update . With Software update (netwo rk service), you can check if there are updates available for your device software or applications, and download them to you r device. Downloading software updates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device battery has enough power, or connect the charger before st arting the update. Warning: If you install a software update , you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls , until the installation is completed and the device is re started. Be sure to back up data before acce pting installation of an update. After updating your device so ftware or applications using Software update, the instruction s related to the updated applications in the user guide or the helps may no longer be up to date. Select Options and from the following: Start update â Download the available updates. T o unmark specific upda tes that you do not want to download, select the up dates from the list. Update via PC â Update your device using a PC. This option replaces the S tart update option when updates are only available using the Nokia Software Updater PC application. View details â View information on an update. View update history â View the status of previous updates. Settings â Change the settings, such as the default a ccess point used for downloading updates. Disclaimer â View the Nokia licence agreement. Settings Your device normally has MMS, GPRS, stre aming, and mobile internet settings automatica lly configured, based on your network service provider information. You may have settings from your serv ice providers already installed 18 Find help
in your device, or you may re ceive or request the settings from the network service prov iders as a special message. You can change t he general settings in your device, s uch as language, standby mode, display, and keypad lock settings. Access codes If you forget any of the access codes, contact your service provider. Personal identification numb er (PIN) code â This code protects your SIM card again st unauthorised use. T he PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorre ct PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. UPIN code â This code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an en ha nced version of t he SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. P I N 2 c o d e â T h i s c o d e ( 4 t o 8 d i g i t s ) i s s u p p l i e d w i t h s o m e SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in yo ur device. Lock code (also known as se curity code) â Th e lock code helps you to protect your device against una uthorised use. The preset code is 12345. Yo u can create and change the code, and set the device to request the code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your device. If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service and additional charges may apply. For more information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. Personal Unblocking Key (PUK) code and PUK2 code â These codes (8 digits) ar e required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code , respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your device. UPUK code â This code (8 digi ts) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the co de is not supplied with th e USIM card, contact the operator whose USIM card is in your device. Prolong battery li fe Many features in your device increase the demand on battery power and reduce th e battery lifetime. To save battery power, note the following: ⢠Features that use Bluetoot h technology, or allowing such features to run in the ba ckground while usi ng other features, increase the demand on battery power. Deac tivate Blu etooth tech nology when you do not need it. ⢠Features that use wireless LAN (WL AN), or allowing such features to run in the ba ckground while usi ng other features, increase the demand on battery power. WLAN on your Nokia device deactivates when you are not trying to connect, not connected to an access point, or not scanning for available networks. To further reduce batt ery consumption, you can specify that your device do es not scan, or scans le ss often, for available networks in the background. ⢠If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connection settings, and there is no packet data coverage (GPR S), the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. To prolong the operating time of your device, select Packet data connection > When needed . 19 Find help
⢠The Maps application downloads new map information when you scroll to new areas on t he map, which increases the demand on battery power. You can prevent the automatic downloa d of new maps. ⢠If the signal strength of the cellular network varie s much in your area, your device must scan for the available network repeated ly. This increases the demand on battery power. If the network mode is set to dual mode in the n etwork settings, the devi ce searches for the UMTS ne twork. You can set the device to use only the GSM network. To use only the GS M network, select Menu > Tools > Settings and Phone > Ne twork > Netw ork mode > GSM . ⢠The backlight of the displa y increase s the demand on battery power. In the display settings, you can chan ge the length of the time-out period after which the backlight is switched off, and adjust the light sens or that observes lighting conditions and adjusts the display brightness. Select Menu > Tools > Settings and General > Personalisation > Display and Light time-out or Brightness . ⢠Leaving applications runn ing in the background increases the demand on ba ttery power. To close the applications you are not using, press and hold the menu key, scroll to the appl ication, and press C . ⢠To save power, activate the power save mode. Press the power key, and select Activate powe r saving . To deactivate it, press the power key , and select Deactivate power sa ving . You may not be able to change the settin gs of certain application s when the power save mode is turned on. Free memor y To view how much memory is available for different data types, select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies you if available memory is low. To free memory, transfer data to an alt ernative memory (if available) or compatible computer. To remove data you no longer need, use File manager or the respective application. Yo u can rem ove the following: ⢠Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e- mail messages from the mailbox ⢠Saved web pages ⢠Contact information ⢠Calendar notes ⢠Applications shown in Appl ication ma nager that you do not need ⢠Installation files (with .sis or .sisx file extensions) of installed applications. Back up the installation files to a compatible computer. ⢠Images and v ideo clips in Photos. 20 Find help
Your device Phone setup When you switch on your de vice for the first time, the Phone setup application opens. To access the Phone setu p application later, select Menu > To ols > Phone setup . To set up the device con nections, select Sett ings wizard . To transfer data to your de vice from a compatible Nokia device, select Phone swi tch . The available options may vary. Nokia Switch Transfer content You can use th e Switch applic ation to copy content such as phone numbers, addresses, calendar items, and images from your previous Nokia device to your device. The type of content that can be transferred depen ds on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content. If that device supports synchronisati on, you can also synchronise data between the devi ces. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. If the other device cannot be switched on without a SIM card, you can insert your SIM card in it. When your device is switched on without a SIM card, the Offline profile is automatically activated, and t ransfer can be don e. Transfer content for the first time 1 To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, sele ct Phone switc h in the Welcome application, or select Menu > Tools > Switch . 2 Select the connection type you want to use to transfer the data. Both devices must support the selected connection type. 3 If you select Bl uetooth connectivity as the con nection type, connect the two devices. To have you r device search for devices with Bl uetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the device f rom which you wa nt to transfer content. You are as ked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices are now paired. Some earlier Nokia device s may not have the Sw itch application. In this case, the Switch application is sent to the other device as a message. To ins tall the Switch application on the other device, open the message, and follow the instruct ions on the display. 4 On your device, select the content you want to transfer from the other device. When the transfer has starte d, you can cancel it and continue later. Content is transferred from the memory of th e other device to the corresponding lo cation in your device. The transfer time depends on the am ount of data to be transferred. Synchronise, retrieve, or send content Select Menu > Tools > Switch . 21 Your device
After the first transfer, se lect from the following to start a new transfer, depending on the model: to synchronise content between your dev ice and the other device, if the other device supports synchronisation. T he sync hronisation is two-way. If an item is deleted in one device, it is deleted in both. You cannot rest ore deleted items with synchronisation. to retrieve content from the other device to your device. With retrieva l, content is transferred from the other device to your device. You may be asked to keep or delete the original content in t he other device, depending on the device model. to send content from your devi ce to your other device If you cannot send an item, de pending on the type of the other device, you can add the item to the Nokia folder, to C:\Nokia or E:\Nok ia in your device. When you select the folder to transfer, the items are synchronised in the corresponding folder in the other device, and vice versa. Use shortcuts to repeat a transfer After a data t ransfer, you can save a shor tcut with the transfer settings to the main view to repeat the same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, select Option s > Shortcut settings . For example, you can cr eate or change the name of the short cut. A transfer log is shown after every transfer. To view the log of the last transfer, select a s hortcut in the main view and Options > View log . Handle tra nsfer co nflicts If an item to be transfer red has been edited in both devices, the device attempts to merge th e changes automatically. If this is not pos sible, there is a transfer conflict. Select Check one by one , Priority to this phone , or Priority to other phon e to solve the conflict. Display indicators The device is being used in a GSM network (network service). The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waitin g to be sent in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. The ringing type is set to Silent, a nd the message and e-mail alert tones are turned off. A timed profile is active. The device keypad is locked. A clock alarm is active. The second phone line is being used (network service). 22 Your device
All calls to the device are diverted to another number (network service) . If you have two phone lines, a number in dicates the active line. Your device is connec ted to a network via wireless LAN or UMTS (network service) and ready for an internet call. A compatible headset is connected to th e device. The FM transmitter is a ctive but not tra nsmitting. The FM transmitter is active an d transmitting. A compatible TV out cable is connected to the device. A compatible text phone is connected to the device. A data call is active (network service). A GPRS packet data connection is active (network service). indicates that the connection is on hold and that a conn ection is available. A packet data connection is active in a part of the network that supports EGPRS (network service). indicates that the connection is on h old and that a connection is available. The icons indicate that EGPRS is available in the n etwork, but your device is not necessarily using an EGPRS connection to transfer data. A UMTS packet data conne ction is active (network service). indicates that the connection is on hold and that a conn ection is available. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and active (network service). indicates that the connec tion is on hold and that a connection is available. You have set the device to scan for wireless LANs, and a wireless LAN is available (network service). A wireless LAN connection is acti ve in a network that uses encryption. A wireless LAN connection is acti ve in a network that does not use encrypti on. Bluetooth connectivity is on . Data is being transmitted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the in dicator is blinking, your device is trying to connect with another device. A USB connection is active. Synchronisation is in progress. GPS is active. Shortcuts When in the menus, instead of using the scroll key, you can use the number keys, # , and * to quickly access the applications. For example, in the main menu, press 5 to open Messaging or # to open the application or folder in the corresponding location in the menu. To switch between open applications, p ress and hold the menu key. Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. To start a web connection (network service), in the standby mode, press and hold 0 . In many applications, to view the most common option items ( ), press the scroll key. To change the profile, press th e power key, and select a profile. 23 Your device
To switch between the General and Silent pro files, in the standby mode, press and hold # . If you have two phone lines (network service), this action switches between the two lines. To call your voice mailbox (network service), in the standby mode, press and hold 1 . To open a list of last dialle d numbers, in the standby mode, press the call key. To use voice commands, in the standby mode, press and hold the right selection key . To remove an application fr om the menu, select it, and press C . Some application s may not be removed. Mobile Search Select Menu > Search . You can also access Mobile Search directly from the active standby mode, if that has been activated in the sett ings. Use Mobile Search to access inter net search engines and to find and connect to local se rvices, websites, images, and mobile content. You can also se arch content in your dev ice, such as calendar entries, e-mail, and other messages. Web search (network servi ce) 1 In the Search main view, select Search the In ternet . 2 Select a search engine. 3 Enter your text to search. 4 Press the scroll key to start th e search. My content search To search content in your de vice, in the main view, enter your text to the search field. The search results are displayed on the sc reen as you write. Volume and loudspeaker cont rol To increase or decrease th e volume level when you have an active call or are listening to a s ound, use the volume key. The built-in loudspeaker allo ws you to speak and listen from a short distan ce without having to hold the device to your ear. To use the loudspeaker during a call, press Loudsp. . To turn off the loudspeaker, press Handset . Offline prof ile To activate the offline pro file, press the power key briefly, and select Offl ine . 24 Your device
The offline profile lets you use the device without connecting to the wireless cellular network. When you activate the offline profile, the connection to the cellular network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indica tor area. All radio freque ncy (RF) signals to and from the device to the cellular network are prevented. If you try to send messages using the cellular network, they are placed in the Outbox folder to be sent later. When the offline profile is active, you can use your device without a SIM card. If the SIM card is not properly in place, the device starts in the offline profile. Important: In the Offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may sti ll be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must firs t activate the phone function by changing profiles. If the devi ce has been locked, enter the lock code. When you have activated the offline profile, you can still use the wireless LAN, for example, to read your e-mail or browse on the internet. You can also use Bluetooth connectivity while in the offline profile. Remember to comply with any applicable safet y requirements when establishing and using a wi reless LAN or Bluetooth connections. To switch to another profile, press the power key briefly, and select another profile. Th e device re-enables wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficient signal strength). Fast downloading High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA, also called 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-s peed data downloads. When HSDPA support in the device is activa ted and the device is connected to a UMTS network that supports HSDPA, downloading data such as me ssages , e-mail, and browse r pages through the cellular network may be faster. An active HSDPA connection is indicated by . You can activate or deactivate support for HSDPA in packet data settings. For availability and subscription to da ta connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the download sp eed; sending data to the network, such as messages and e-mail, is not affected. 25 Your device
Ovi For more information on Ovi services, go to www.ovi.com. About Ovi Store In Ovi Store, you can download mobile games, applications, videos, images , and ringing tones to your device. Some of the items are free of charge; others you need to purchase using your credit card or through your phone bill. Ovi Store offers yo u conten t that is com patible with your mobile device and relevant to your tastes and location. You can share recommendations with your friends, see what they are do wnloading, and let them see the items you are interested in. The content in Ovi Store is sorted into the following categorie s: ⢠Recommended ⢠Games ⢠Personalise ⢠Applications ⢠Audio & video Ovi Contac ts About Contacts on O vi With Contacts on Ovi, you can stay connected to the people who matter most. Search for contacts, an d discover friends in the Ovi community. Keep in touc h with your friends - chat, share your location an d presence, and easily follow what your friends are up to and where they are. You can even chat with friends who use Google Talkâ¢. Sync your contacts , calendar, and other con tent between your Nok ia device and Ovi.com. Your important information is stored and kept up-to-date both in your device and on the web. With Contacts on Ovi, you can make your contacts list dynamic and be confident that your contacts a re stored on Ovi.com. You must have a Nokia Account to use the service. Create an account on your mobile device, or go to www.ovi.com on your PC. Chat with your friends To connect to Contacts on Ovi, open the Contacts application and the Ovi tab. Select Go online and the connection method. Use a wireless LAN (WLAN) conn ection where available. A packet data connection may generate additiona l data transmission charges. For pricing details, contact your network service provider. To start a chat with a friend, select Options > Chat . To send a chat message, enter the text in the message field, and select Send . In the chat view, select Options and from the following: Send â Send the message. Add smiley â Insert a smiley. Send my locatio n â Send your location deta ils to your chat partner (if supported by both devices). Profile â View the details of a friend. 26 Ovi
My profile â Select your presence status or avatar, personalise your message, or change your details. Edit tex t â Copy text from or paste text into your message. End chat â End the active chat. Exit â End all a ctive chats, and clos e the application. The available options may vary. To receive location information from your friend, you must have the Maps application. To send and receive location information, both the Maps and Positioning applications are needed. To view the location of your friend, select Show on map . To return t o the Contac ts on Ov i main view without en ding the chat, select Back . If you receive a phone numbe r in a chat, to add it to your contacts, call, send message to, or copy the number, select Options . To open or copy a web link received in a chat, select Options . If you receive an e-mail addr ess in a chat, to copy the e- mail address or send e-mail to it, select Options . Ovi Files With Ovi Files, you can use you r Nokia N86 8MP to access content on your computer if it is switched on and connected to the internet. You will need to install the Ovi Files application on every co mputer you want to access with Ovi Files. You can try out Ovi Files for a limited trial period. With Ovi Files, y ou can: ⢠Browse, search, and view your images. You do not need to upload the images to the websit e but you can access your computer content wi th your mobile device. ⢠Browse, search, and view your files and documents. ⢠Transfer song s from your computer to your device. ⢠Send files and folders from your computer without moving them to and from your device first. ⢠Access files on your computer even when your computer is switched off. Just choose which folders and files you want to be available, and Ovi Files automatically keeps an up-t o-date copy stored in a protected, online storage for access even when your computer is switched off. For support, see files. ovi.com/suppo rt. 27 Ovi
Camera About the camera Your Nokia N86 8MP has two cameras. The ma in, high- resolution camera, is on th e back of the device. The secondary, lower resolution ca mera is on the front. You can use both cameras to capture images and record videos. Your device supports an im age capture resolution of 3264x2448 pixels (8 megapix els ). The image resolution in this guide may appear different. The images and video clip s are saved in Photos. The produced images ar e in the JPEG format. Video clips are recorded in the MPEG-4 file format with the .mp4 file extension, or in the 3GPP file format with the .3gp file extension (sharing qu ality). See "Video settings" , p. 36 . To free memory for new images and video clips, transfer files to a compatible PC u sing a compatible US B data cable, for example, and remove the files from your device. The device informs you when the memory is full. You can then free up memory in the curr ent storage or change the memory in use. You can send images and video clips in a multimedia message, as an e-mail atta ch ment, or by usin g other connection methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity or a wireless LAN connection. You can a lso upload them to a compatible online album. Activate the camera To activate t he main camera , open the lens cover. To activate the main camera when the lens cover is already open and the camera is active in the background, press and hold the ca pture key. To close the main camera, close the lens cover. Image ca pture Still image camera indicators The still image camera viewfi nder displays the following: 1 Capture mode indicator 2 Active toolbar (not displa yed during image capture). 3 Battery charge level indi cator 4 Image resolution indicator 5 Image counter (the estimate d number of images you can capture using the curr ent image quality setting and memory) 6 The device memory ( ), mass memor y , and memory card ( ) indicators, which show where images are saved 28 Camera
7 GPS signal indicator Active toolbar The active toolbar provides you with shortcuts to different items and settings before and after capturing an ima ge or recording a video clip. To select a toolbar item, scroll to the item, and press the scroll ke y. You can also define when the active toolbar is displayed. The settings in the active to olbar return to the default settings after you close th e camera. To view the active toolbar before and after ca pturing an image or recording a video clip, select Options > Show toolbar . To view the active t oolbar only when you need it, select Options > Hide toolbar . To display th e toolbar when it is hidden, press th e scroll key. The toolbar is displayed for 5 seconds. By default, not all shortcuts are avai lable. To add or remove shortcuts from the toolbar, select Option s > Customise t oolbar . From the active toolbar, select from the following: Switch to video mode. Switch to ima ge mode. Select the scene. Turn the video light off (video mode only). Turn the video light on (video mode only). Select the flash mode (images only). Activate the self-timer (images only). Activate sequence mode (images only). Select a colour effect. Adjust the white balance. Adjust the exposure comp ensation (images only). Adjust sharpn ess (images only) . Adjust contras t (images only) . Adjust light sensitivity (images only). Activate panorama mode. The icons change to refle ct the current setting. Saving the captured image ma y take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. Capture images When capturing an i mage, note the following: ⢠Use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠The quality of a digitally zoomed image is lower than that of a nonz oomed image. ⢠The camera goes into the battery saving mode if there are no keypresses for a moment. To continue capturing images, press the capture key. To capture an image, do the following: 1 If the camera is in the video mode, select the image mode from the active toolbar. 2 To lock the focus on an ob ject, press the capture key halfway down (main camera only, not av ailable in landscape or sport scene.). A green locked focus indicator appears on the display. If the focu s was not locked, a red focus indica tor appears. Release the capture key, and press it ha lfway down again. You can also capture an imag e without locking the focu s. 29 Camera
3 To capture an image, press the capture key. Do not move the device before the image is saved and the final image appears on the screen. To zoom in or out when capt uring an image, use the zoom key in your de vice . To activate t he front camera, s elect Options > Use secondary camera . To capture an image, press the s croll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. To leave the camera open in the background and use other applications, press the menu key. To return to t he camera, press and hold the capture key. Locatio n informatio n You can automatically add capture location information to the file details of the captured material. For example, in the Photos application, you can then view the location where an image was captured. Select Menu > A pplications > Camera . To add location information to all captured material, select Options > Settings > Record lo cation > On . The location information is availa ble only for images captured with the main camera. It may take several minutes to obtain the coordinates of your location. The availabilit y and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your lo cation, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditio ns. If you share a file that includes location inform ation, also the location information is shared, and your location may be visible to third parties viewing the file. The device requires network services to acquire location information. Location information indicators: â Location information unavailable. GPS stays on in the background for severa l minutes. If a satellite connection is found and the indi cator changes to within that time, all the images capt ured and video clips recorded during that time are tagg ed based on the received GPS positioning information. â Location information is available. Location information is added to the file details. Files with location inform ation are indica ted with in the Photos application. Panorama mode Select Menu > A pplications > Camera . Select panorama mode from the toolbar. 30 Camera
1 To capture the first image in the pano rama, press the capture key. 2 Slowly turn the device left or right as shown by the arrows. A panorama preview is displayed and the camera captures the image as yo u turn. The green arrow indicates that you can slowly proceed to turn. The red pause mark indicates that you should stop moving until the green arrow is displayed aga in. You can predict when the next key fr ame is captured when the red rectangle moves to the centre of the preview area. 3 To complete the capture, se lect Stop . The panoram ic capture sto ps auto matically when the maximum image width has been reached. Note that it may take some time for the device to process the captured image. After capturing an image After you capture an ima ge, select from the following options in the active tool bar (available only if Show captured image is enabled in th e still image camera settings): ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete ( ). ⢠To send the image using a multimedia message, e- mail, or other connection me thods, such as Bluetooth connectivity, press the call key, or select Send ( ). If you are in a call, select Send to caller ( ). ⢠To add the image to an album, select Add to album . ⢠To view information ab out the image, select Details . ⢠To send the image to a compatible online album, select (available only if you have set up an accoun t for an album). ⢠To zoom in an image after capturing it, select to open the image, and use the zoom keys of your device. To use the image as wallpaper in the active standby mode , select Options > Set as wallpaper . To set the image as a call image for a contact, select Options > Assign t o contact . To return to the viewfinder to capture a new image, press the capture key. Flash The flash is available on ly in the main camera. Keep a safe distance wh en us ing the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera of your device has a dual LED flash for low light conditions. Select the desired flash mode from the active toolbar: Automatic ( ), Red-eye ( ), On ( ), and Of f ( ). 31 Camera
Video light To increase light levels when recording video in low light, select . Scenes Scenes are only available in the main camera. A scene helps you to find the righ t colour and lightin g settings for the current enviro nment. The settings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environment. The default scene in the image mode is Auto , and in the video mode Automatic (both indicated with ). To change the scene, in th e active toolbar , select Scene modes and a scene. To make your own scene sui table for a certain environment, scroll to User def ined , and select Options > Change . In the us er defined scene you can adjust different lighting and colour settings. To copy the settings of anothe r scene, select Base d on scene mode and the desired scene. To sa ve the chan ges and retu rn to the scenes list, press Back . To activate your own scene, scroll to User defined , press the scroll key, and select Select . Capture images in a sequence The sequence mode is availabl e only in the main camera. To set the ca mera to captur e images in sequence (if enough memory is available), in the activ e toolbar, select Sequence mo de . To start capturing imag es in a quick sequence, select Burst , and press and hold the capture key. The device captures images until you release the key or until the memory runs out. If you press the capture key briefly, the device captures six image in a sequence. To capture two or more images in defined intervals, select the desired time in terval. To capture the imag es, press the capture key. To stop capturing i mages, select Cancel . The number of images taken depends on the available memory. The captured images are show n in a grid on the display. To view an image, press the scroll key. I f you used a time interval, only the last capt ured image is shown on the display. You can view t he other images in the Photos application. You can also use the sequence mode with the se lf-timer. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture k ey. To switch off the sequence mode, in the active toolbar, select Sequence mode > Si ngle shot . 32 Camera
You in the pictureâÂÂself -timer The self-timer is available only in the main camera. Use the self-timer to delay the capture so th at you can inclu de yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, in the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 se conds , 10 seconds , or 20 seconds . To activate the self-timer, select Activate . The device beeps when the timer is running and the quadrangle blinks just before the image capture. The camera takes the picture after the selected delay elapses. To switch off the self-timer, in the ac tive toolbar, select Self timer > Off . Tip: In the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when taking a picture. Tips on takin g good photographs Picture quality Use the appropriate picture quality. The camera has several picture qualit y modes. Use the highest setting to make sure tha t the camera produces the best picture quality available. Note howev er, that better picture qualit y requires more storage spac e. For multimedia message (MMS) and e-mail attachm ents it may be necessary to use the smallest picture qualit y mode optimised for MMS sending. You ca n define the quality in the camera setti ngs. See "Still image camera settings" , p. 35 . Background Use a simple background. For portraits and other pictures with people, avoid having your subject in front of a cluttered, complex backgr ound that may distract attention from the subject. Move the camera, or the subject, when these condition s cannot be met. Move the camera closer to the object to take clearer portraits. Depth When shooting landscapes an d sceneries, add depth to your pictures by placing obje cts in the foreground. If the foreground object is too cl ose to the camera, it may be blurred. Lighting conditio ns Changing the source, amount, and direction of light can change photographs dramatically. Here are some typical lighting conditions: ⢠Light source behind the subject. Av oid placing your subject in front of a strong light source. If the light source is behind the subject or visible in the display, the resulting picture may have weak contrast, may be too dark, and may contain un wanted light effects. ⢠Sidelit subject. Strong side light gives a dramatic effect but may be too ha rsh, result ing in too much contrast. ⢠Light source in front of the subject. Hars h sunlight may cause the subjects to squi nt their eyes. The contrast may also be too high. 33 Camera
⢠Optimal lighting is found in situations where there is plenty of diffused, soft ligh t available, for example, on a bright, partially cloudy da y or on a sunny day in the shadow of trees. Video recording Video capture indicators The video vi ewfinder di splays the following: 1 Capture mode indicator 2 Video stabilisation on indicator 3 Audio mute on indicator 4 Active toolbar (not displayed during recording) 5 Battery charge level indica tor 6 Video quality indicator. To change this setting, se lect Options > Sett ings > Video quality . 7 Video clip file type 8 Available recording time. Wh en you are recording, the current video lengt h indicator also shows the elap sed and remaining time. 9 The location to which the video clip is saved. 10 GPS signal indicator Record videos 1 If the camera is in the image mode, select the video mode from the active toolbar. 2 To start recording, press the capture key. The red record icon ( ) is displayed and a tone sounds. 3 To pause recording at any time, press Pause . Select Continue to resume. If you pause recording and do not press any key within one min ute, the recording stops. To zoom in or out of the subject, use the zoom key in your device. 4 To stop recording, press the capture key. The video clip is automatically saved in Photos. The maximum lengt h of a video clip is approximately 30 seconds with sharing quality and 90 minutes with other quality settings. To activate t he front camera, s elect Options > Use secondary camera . To start recording a video, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. After recording a video After you record a video clip, select from the following options in the active toolbar (available only if Show captured video is set to On in the video settings): ⢠To immediately play the vide o clip you just recorded, select Play ( ). ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, select Delete ( ). ⢠To send the video clip using a multimedia message, e- mail, or other connection methods, such as Bluetooth 34 Camera
connectivity, press the call key, or select Send ( ). This option is not availabl e during a call. You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG -4 file format in a multimedia message. You can also send the video clip to a person you are talking to. Select Send to caller ( ) (only availa ble during a call). ⢠To add the video clip to an album, s elect Add to album ⢠To upload the video clip to a compatible online album, select (only available if you have set up an account for a compatible online album). ⢠To return to the vi ewfinder to record a new video clip, press the capture key. Camera settin gs There are two kinds of sett ings fo r the camera: setup settings and main s ettings. The setup s ettings return to the default setti ngs after you close the camera, b ut the main settings rem ain the same until you change them again. To adjust the setup se ttings, use the options in the active toolbar. See "Colour and li ghting settings" , p. 35 . To change the main settings, in the image or video mode, select Options > Settings . Still image camera settings To change the main set tings, in the image mode, select Options > Sett ings and from the following: Image quality â Set the resolution (main camera only). The better the image quality, the more memory the image consumes. Add to album â Save the image t o an album in Photos . Record location â To add GPS location coordinates to each image file, select On . Receiving a GPS signal may take time or the signal may not be avai lable. Show captured image â Select whether to view the captured image after it is taken or t o continue image capturing immediately. Default image name â Define the default name for the captured images. Extended di gital zoom â The setting is only available in the main camera. On (continuous) allows the zoom increments to be smooth an d continuous between digital and extended digital zoom, On (paused) allows the zoom increments to pause at the digital and extended digital step point, and Off allows a limited am ount of zoom while retaining the image resolut ion. Use the extended zoom on l y w h e n g e t t i ng c l o s e r t o the subject is more important than the final image quality. The overall quality of a digitally zoomed image is al ways lower than that of an unzoomed image. Capture tone â Set the tone that sounds when you capture an image. Memory in use â Select where to store your images. Restore camera se ttings â Restore the camera settings to default values. Colour and lighting settings In the active toolbar, se lect from the following: Flash mode ( ) (image only) â Select the desired flash mode. Colour tone ( ) â Select a colour effect. Switch video li ght on or Swit ch video light off â Switch the video light on or off (video mode only). 35 Camera
White balance ( ) â Select the current lighting condition. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately. Exposure compensation ( ) (image only) â I f you are shooting a dark subject against a very light background, such as snow, adjust the exposure to 1 or 2 to compensate for the backgrou nd brightn ess. For light subjects against a dark background, use -1 or -2. Sharpness ( ) (image only) â Adju st the sharpne ss of the image. Contrast ( ) (image only) â Adjust the difference between the lightest and da rkest parts of the image. Light sensitiv ity ( ) (image only) â Increase the light sensitivity in low light co nditions to avoid too dark images. The screen display changes to match the se ttings you make. The available setti ngs vary depending on the selected camera. The setup settings are shootin g-mode specific. Switching between the modes does not reset the defined settings. The setup settings return to the defa ult settings when you close the camera. If you select a new scene, th e colour and li ghting s ettings are replaced by the selected scene. You can change the setup settings after sele cting a scene if needed. Video settings To change the main settings , in t he video mode, select Options > Settings and from the following: Video quality â Set the quality of the video clip. Select Sharing , if you want to send the video clip using a multimedia message. The clip is recorded with QCIF resolution, in 3GPP format, and the size is limited to 300 kB (approximately 30 seco nds). You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG-4 format in a multimedia message. Record location â To add GPS location coordinates to each file, select On . Receiving the GPS signal may take time or the signal may not be available. Video stabil isation â R educe the effects of the camera shaking when recording a video. Audio recording â Select whether to record sound. Add to album â Add the recorded video clip to an album in Photos. Show captured video â Select to view the first frame of the recorded video clip after the recording stops. To view the entire video clip, select Play from the active toolbar (main camera) or Options > Play (secondary camera). Default video name â Enter the default name for captured video clips. Memory in use â Select where you want to store your video clips. Restore camera settings â Restore the camera settings to default values. 36 Camera
Photos About Photos Select Menu > Phot os and from the fo llowing: Captured â View all the images and videos you have captured. Months â View images and videos categorised by the month they where captured. Albums â View the default al bums and the ones you have created. Tags â View the tags you hav e created for each item. Downloads â View items and videos downloaded from the web or received as a multimedia or e-mail message. All â View all items. Share onlin e â Post your images or videos to the web. View images and video s Select Menu > Phot os and from the fo llowing: All â View all images and videos. Captured â View images captured and video clips recorded with the camera of your device. Downloads â View downloaded video clips. Images and video clips c an also be sent to you from a compatible device. To be able to view a received image or video clip in Photos, you must first save i t. The images and video clip files are in a loop and ordered by date and time. The number of files is displayed. To browse the files one by o ne, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, sc roll up or down. To open a file, select the fi le. When an image opens, to zoom in the image, use the zoom keys. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently . To edit an image or a video clip, select Opt ions > Edit . To see where an image marked with was captured, select Options > Show on map . To print your images on a compatible printer, select Options > Print . 37 Photos
To move images to an album for later printing, select Options > Add to album > Prin t later . View and edit fil e details Select Menu > P hotos . Go to an item. To view and edit image or video properties, select Options > Details > View and edit and from the following: Tags â View the currently us ed tags. To add more tags to the current file, select Add . Descript ion â View a free-form de scription of the file. To add a description, select the field. Locat ion â View GPS location information, if available. Title â View the thumbnail im age of the file and the current file name. To edit th e file name, select the file name field. Albums â View in which albums the current file is located. Resolution â View the size of the image in pixels. Durati on â View the length of the video. Usage righ ts â T o v i e w t h e D R M r i g h t s o f t h e c u r r e n t f i l e , select View . Organise images and videos Select Menu > P hotos . You can organise files as follows: To view items in the Tags view, add tags to the items. To view items by months, select Months . To create an album to store items, select Albums > Options > New album . To add an image or a video clip to an album, select the item and Add to album from the active toolbar. To delete an image or vide o clip, select the item and Delete from the active toolbar. Active to olbar The active toolbar is available only when you have selected an image or a video clip in a view. In the active toolbar, go to different items, and select the desired option. The availabl e options vary depending on the view you are in and wh ether you have s elected an image or a video clip. To hide the toolbar, select Optio ns > Hide icons . To activate the active toolbar when it is hidden, press the scroll key. Select an image or a video clip and from the following: Play the video clip. Send the image or video clip. Upload the image or video clip to a comp atible online album (only av ailable if you hav e set up an account for a compatible online albu m). Add the item to an album. Manage tags and other properties of the item. 38 Photos
Albums Select Menu > Phot os and Albums . With albums, you ca n conveniently manage your images and video clips. To create a new album , select Options > Ne w album . To add an image or a video clip to an album, select the item and Options > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the image or video clip. The item you added to the album is still visible in Photos. To remove an image or a video clip from an album, select the album and the item, and Options > Remove from album . Tags Select Menu > Phot os . Use tags to categorise media items in Photos. You can create and delete tags in Tag manager. Tag manager shows the currently used tags a nd the number of ite ms associated with each tag. To open Tag mana ger, select an image or video clip and Options > Detail s > Tag manager . To create a tag, select Options > New tag . To assign a tag to an im age, select the image and Options > Add tags . To see the tags you have created, select Tags . The size of the tag name corresponds to the number of items the tag is assigned to. To view all the images asso ciated with a tag, select the t ag from the list. To view the list in alph abetical order, select Optio ns > Alphabetical . To view the list in most fr equently used order, select Options > Most used . To remove an image from a tag, select the ta g and the image, and select Options > Remove from tag . Slide show Select Menu > Photos . To v ie w y ou r i ma ge s a s a sl ide show, select an image and Options > Slide sh ow > Pl ay forwards or Play backwards . The slide show starts from the se lected file. To view only the selected images as a slide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark images. To start the s lide show, selec t Options > Sl ide show > Play forwards or Play b ackwards . To resume a pause d slide show, select Continue . To end the slide show, select End . To browse the images, scroll left or right. 39 Photos
Before starting the slide sh ow, to adjust the slide show settings, select Options > Slide show > S ettings and from the following: Music â Add sound to the slide sh ow. Song â Select a music file from the list. Delay betw een slides â Adjust the tempo of the slide show. To adjust the volume during the slide show, use the volume keys. TV-out mode To view the captured images and video clips on a compatible TV, use a Nokia Video Connectivity Cable. Before viewing the images and video clips on TV, you may need to configure the TV-out settings for the applicable TV system and TV aspect ratio. See "Accessories settings" , p. 132 . You cannot use the TV as the camera viewfinder i n TV-out mode. To watch images and video cl ips on TV, do the following: 1 Connect a Nokia Video C onnectivity Cable to the video input of a compatible TV. 2 Connect the other end of the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to the Nokia AV Connector of your dev ice. 3 You may need to select the cable mo de. 4P r e s s , select Gallery and browse for the file you want to view. The images are shown in the image viewer, and the video clips are played in Video centre. All audio, including the acti ve calls, stereo video clip sound, key tone, and ringing tone is routed to the TV when the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable is connected to the device. You can us e the device microphone no rmally. For all applications other than the folders in Photos , t he TV screen displays what is displaye d on the screen of your devic e. The opened image is displaye d in full-screen on the TV. When you open an image in the thumbnail view while it is viewed on the TV, zoom ing in is not available. When you open a highlighted video clip, Video centre starts p laying the video c lip on the device display and the TV screen. See "RealPlayer" , p. 126 . You can view images as a slid e show on TV. All items in an album or marked images are displayed on the TV in full- screen while the selected music plays. See "Slide show" , p. 39 . 40 Photos
The quality of the TV image may vary due to different resolution of the devices. Wireless radio signals, such as incoming calls, may cause interference in the TV image. Edit image s Image editor To edit an image, in Photos, scroll to the image, and select Options > Edi t . To add effects to your images, select Op tions > Add effect . You can crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, colour, contra st , and resolution; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the image. Crop image To crop an image, select Optio ns > Add effect and ( Crop ). To crop the image manually, select Manual . A cross appears in the upper left co rner of the image. Scroll to adjust the crop borders, select Set , an d adjust the crop borders from the lower right corner. To readjust the cr op borders from the upper left corner, select Back . When you are satisfied with the crop area , select Crop . If you select a predefined aspe ct ratio, the selected aspect ratio is locked when you adjust the crop borders. Reduce red-e ye To reduce red-eye in an image, select Options > Add effect and ( Red-eye reduction ). Scroll the cross o nto the eye, and pr ess the scroll key. S croll to resize the loop to fit t he si ze of the eye. To reduce the redness, press the scroll key. W hen you have finished editing the image, select Done . To save the change s and return to the previous view, select Back . Useful shortcuts You can use the followi ng shor tcuts when editing images: ⢠To view a full-screen image, press * . To return to the normal view, press * again. ⢠To rotate an image clockw ise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1 . ⢠To zoom in or out, press 5 or 0 . ⢠To move on a zoomed image, scroll up, down, left, or right. Edit vide os The video editor supports .3gp and .mp4 video file formats, and .aac, .amr , .mp3, and .wav audio file formats. It does not necessarily supp ort all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. To edit video clips in Photos, scroll to a video clip, select Options > Edi t , and from the following: 41 Photos
Merge â to add an image or a video clip to the beginning or the end of the selected video clip Change sound â to add a new sound clip, and to replace the original sound in the video clip. Add text â to add text to the beginning or the end of the video clip Cut â to trim the video and mark the sections you want to keep in the video clip To take a snapshot of a video clip, in th e cut video view, select Options > Take snapshot . In the thumbnail preview view, press the scroll key, and select Take snapshot . 42 Photos
Gallery About Gallery Select Menu > Applications > Gall ery . Gallery is a storage place for your images, video and sound clips, songs, and streami ng links. Main view Select Menu > Applications > Gall ery . Select from the following: Images â View images and video clips in Photos. Video clips â View video clips in Video centre. Songs â Open Music player. Sound clips â Listen to sound clips. Streaming links â View and open streaming links. Present ations â View presentations. You can browse and open fold er s and copy and mo ve items to folders. You can also create albums and copy and add items to albums. To open a file, select the file from the list. Video clips and streaming links open and p lay in Video centre, and music and sound clips in Music player. Sound clips Select Menu > Applications > Gall ery and Sound clips . This folder contains all the sound clips you have downloaded from the web. The sound clips created with the Recorder application with MMS optimised or normal quality settings are al so saved in this folder, but the sound clips created with high quali ty settings are stored in the Music player application. To listen to a sound file, select the file from the list. To rewind or fast-forward, scroll left or right. Tip: You can use the media keys to stop, pause, resume, rewind, and fast-forward. Streaming links Select Menu > Applications > Gallery and Streaming links . To open a streaming link, sele ct the link from th e list. To add a new s treaming link, select Options > New link . Present ations Select Menu > Applications > Gallery . With presentations, you can view scalable vector graphics (SVG) and flash files (SWF), su ch as cartoons and maps. SVG images maintain their a ppearance when printed or viewed with different screen sizes and resolutions. 43 Gallery
To view files, select Presentation s . Go to an image, a nd select Options > Play . To pause playing, select Options > Pause . To zoom in, press 5 . To zoom out, press 0 . To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or anticlockwise, press 1 or 3 , respectively. To rotate the image 45 degrees, press 7 or 9 . To switch between full and normal screen mode, press * . 44 Gallery
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet or to another compatible device or PC. Wireless LAN About WLA N To use a wireless LAN (WLA N) connection, it must be available in the location, and your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some WLANs are protected, and you need an access key from the service provider to connect to them. Note: In France, you are only allowed to use WLAN indoors. Features that use WLAN, or that are allowed to run in th e background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power an d reduce the battery life. Your device supp orts the following WLAN features: ⢠IEEE 802.11b/g st andard ⢠Operation at 2.4 GHz ⢠Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) with keys up to 128 bits, Wi-Fi protected access (WPA), and 802.1x authentication me thods. These functions can be u sed only if they are supported by the network. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encrypt ion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. WLAN connections To use a WLAN, you must create an internet access point in a WLAN. Use the access p oint for applications that need to connect to the intern et. A W LAN connection is established when you create a data connection using a WLAN access point. The active WLAN connecti on is ended when you end the data conne ction. You can also end the connection manually. You can use a WLAN durin g a voice call or when packet data connection is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point dev ice at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access poin t. When the device is in the Offli ne profile, you can still use a WLAN, if available. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using a WLAN connection. If you move the device to another loca tion within the WLAN and out of range of a WLAN access point, the roaming functionality can automatically connect your device to anoth er access point t hat belongs to the same WLAN. As long as you remain within range of access points that belong to the same netw ork, your device can stay connected to the network. Tip: To check the unique media access control (M AC) address that identifies your device, for ex ample to configure the MAC address of your device to a WLAN router, enter *#62209526# in the home screen. The MAC address is displayed. 45 Connectivity
See WLAN availability To set your device to show wireless LAN (WLAN) availability, select Menu > Tools > Settings and Connection > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability . If a WLAN is available, is displayed. WLAN wizard Select Menu > T ools > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. . The WLAN wizard helps you find and connect to a wireles s LAN (WLAN). When you open t he application, your device starts to scan for available WLAN s and lists them. Select Optio ns and from the following: Refresh â Update the list of available WLANs. Filter WLAN networks â Filter out WLAN s in the list of found networks . The selected ne tworks are filtered out the next time the application searches for WLA Ns. Start web br owsing â S tart browsing th e web using the access point of the WLAN. Cont.web br owsing â Continue web browsing using the currently active WLAN connection. Disconnect WLAN â Disconnect the active connection to the WLAN. Details â View the details of the WLAN. Importa nt: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase t he secu rity of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryption reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data . Connection manager Active data connections Select Menu > T ools > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. . Select Active data connections . In the active data connect ions view, you can see the open data connections: data calls packet data connections wireless LA N (WLAN) c onnections Note: The actual inv oice for ca lls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for bi lling, taxes, and so forth. To end a connection, select Options > Disconnect . To close all open connections, select Options > Disconnect all . To view the details of a connection, select Options > Details . Available WLANs Select Menu > T ools > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. and Available WLAN networ ks . The available WL AN view shows a l ist of wireless LANs (WLAN) within rang e, their network mo de (infrastructure 46 Connectivity
or ad hoc), and sig nal strength indicator. is dis playe d for networks with encrypti on, and i f yo u r de vi c e h a s a n active connection in the network. To view the details of a network, select Options > Details . To create an internet access poi nt in a network, select Options > Define access po int . Bluetooth Select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > Bluetooth . About Bluet ooth Bluetooth technology in your device enables wireless connections between electronic devices within a rang e of 10 metres (33 feet). A B luetooth connection can be used to send images, videos, text , business cards, calendar notes, or to connect wirelessly to devices that use Bluetooth tech nology. Since devices using B luetooth technology communicate using radio waves, your devi ce and the other devices do n o t n e e d t o b e i n d i r e c t l i n e - o f - s i g h t. T h e t w o d e v i c e s o n l y need to be within a maximum of 10 metres of each other, although the connection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or other elec tronic devices. Several Bluetooth connecti ons ca n be active at a time. For example, if your device is connected to a headset, you can also transfer files to anot her compatible device at the same time. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specificati on 2.0 EDR supporting the following profiles: Dial-Up Networking (DUN), Object Push Profile (OPP), File Transfer Profile (FTP), Hands Free Profile (HFP), Headset Profile (HSP), Basic Imaging Profile (BIP), Remote SIM Access Profile (SimAP), Device Id entification Profile (DI), Phonebook Access Profile (PBAP), Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile (GAVDP), Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP), Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP). To ensure interopera bility between other devices supporting Bluetooth tech nology, use Nokia ap proved accessories for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. Features using Bluetooth technology i ncrease the demand on battery power and redu ce the battery life. Send and receive d ata with Bluetoo th Select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > Bluetooth . 1 When you activa te Bluetooth connect ivity for the first time, you are asked to name your device. Give y our device a unique name to ma ke it easy to recognise if there are several Bluetooth devi ces nearby. 2 Select Bluetooth > On . 3 Select My phone's vi sibility > Shown to a ll or Define period . If you select Define period , you need to define the time during which your device is visible to others. Your device and the name you entered can now be seen by ot her users with devices us ing Bluetooth technology . 4 Open the application where the item you want to send is stored. 47 Connectivity
5 Select the item and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . The device searches for o ther devices using Bluetooth technology within range and lists them. Tip: If you have sent data using Bluetooth connectivity before, a list of the previous se arch results is displayed. To search for mo re Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 6 Select the device with which you want to connect. If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmit ted, you are ask ed to enter a pass code. When the connection ha s been established, Sending data is displayed. The Sent folder in the Messaging application does not store messages sent using Bluetooth connectiv ity. To receive data us ing Bluetoo th connectivi ty, select Blueto oth > On and My phone's visibility > Shown to all to receive data from a non-paired device or Hidden to receive data from a paired de vice only. When you receive data through Bluetooth connectivity, depending on the settings of an active p rofile, a tone sounds, and you a re asked if you want to accept the message in which the data is included. If you accept, th e message is placed in the Inbox folder in the Messaging application. Tip: You can ac cess the files in the device or on the memory card using a compatible access ory that supports the File Transfer Profile Client service (for example, a laptop computer). A Bluetooth connection is disconn ected automatically after sending or receiving da ta. Only Nokia Ovi Suite and some accessories such as headsets may ma intain a connection even if not actively used. Pair devic es Select Menu > T ools > Connectivity > Bluetooth . Open the paired devices tab. Before pairing, decide on yo ur own passcode (1- 16 digits), and agree with the user of the other device to use the s ame code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a fixed passcode. You need the pass code only when you connect the devices for the first time. After pairing, it is possible to authorise the connection. Pa iring and auth orising the connection ma kes connecting quicker and easier, as you do not have to accept th e connection between paired devices every time you establish a connection. The passcode for remote SIM access must have 16 digits. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible co nne cted accessory, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device, while in this mode. To make calls, you must first leave the remote SIM mode. If the device has b een locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first. 1 Select Option s > New paired device . The device starts to search for Bluet ooth devices within range. If 48 Connectivity
you have sen t data using Bluet ooth connectivity before, a list of the previous sea rch results is displayed. To search for more Bluet ooth devices, select More devices . 2 Select the device with which you wa nt to pair, and enter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered to the other device as well. 3 Select Yes to make the connection between your device and the other device automatic, or No to confirm the connection manually every time a connection attempt is ma de . After pairing, the device is saved to th e paired devices pag e. To give a nickname to the paired device, select Options > Assign short name . The nickname is disp layed in your device. To delete a pairing, select the device whose pairing you want to delete and Opt ions > Delete . To delete all pairings, select Opt ions > Delete all . If you are currently connected to a device and cancel the p airing with that device, pairing is remo ved immediately , and the connection is ended. To allow a paired device to connect au tomatically to your device, select Set as authorised . Connections between your device and the other device can be made without your knowledge. No separate a cceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status only for your own devices, such as your compatible heads et or computer, or devices tha t belong to someone you trust. If you want to accept connection requests from the other device separately every time, select Set as unauthorised . To use a Bluetooth audio acce ssory such as a Bluetooth handsfree or headset, you need to pair your device with the accessory. For the passco de and further instructions, see the accessory user guide. To connect to the audio accessory, switch on t he accessory. Some a udio accessories connect automa tically to your device. Otherwise, open the paired devices tab, select the accessory and Options > Connect to audio devi ce . Block devices Select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > Bluetooth . To block a devic e from esta blishing a Bluet ooth connection to your device, open the paired devices tab. Select a device you want to block and Options > Block . To unblock a device, open the blocked devices tab, and select Options > Delete . To unblock all blocked devices, select Options > Delete all . If you reject a pairing request from another device, you are asked if you want to block a ll future connection requests from this device. If you accept the query, the remote device is added to the list of blocked devices. Security tips When you are not using B luetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . 49 Connectivity
Do not pair with an un known device. Data ca ble To avoid corrupting data, do no t disconnect the USB data cable during data transfer. Transfer data between your devi ce and a PC 1 Insert a memory card in yo ur device, and connect the device to a compatible PC with the data cable. 2 When the device asks which m ode to use, select Mass storage . In this mode, you can see your device as a removable hard drive in your computer. 3 End the connection from the computer (from the Unplug or Eject Hardware wizard in Microsoft Windows, for example) to avoid damaging the memory card. To use Nokia Ovi Suite with your device, install Nokia Ovi Suite on your PC, connect th e data cable, and select PC Suite . To synchronise the music in your device with Nokia Music Player, install the Nokia Music Playe r software on your PC, connect the data cable, and s elect Media transfer . To change the USB mode you normally use with the data cable , select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > USB an d USB conne ction mode , and the desired option. To set the device to ask for the mode each time you connect the data cable to the device, select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > USB and Ask on conn ection > Yes . PC connec tions You can use your device with a variety of comp atible PC connectivity and data com munications applications . With Nokia Ovi Suite or Nokia Nseries PC Suite, you can, for example, transfer images between your device and a compatib le PC. For information on Apple Macintosh support and connecting y our device to an Apple Ma cintosh device, see www.nseries.com/mac . Sync Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings > Connectivity > Sync . Sync enables you to synchronise your notes, calendar entries, text and multi media messages, browser bookmarks, or contacts with various compatible applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronisat ion settings in a special message from your service provider. A synchronisation profile cont ains the necessary sett ings for synchronisation. When you open the Sync application, the default or previously used sync profile is displayed. To modify the profile, scroll to a sync item, and select Mark to include it in the profile or Unmark to leave it out. To manage sync profiles, select Options and the desired option. 50 Connectivity
To synchronise data, select Options > Synchronise . To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, select Cancel . 51 Connectivity
Browser About Browser Select Menu > Web . With the Browser application, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML) we b pages on the internet as originally designed. You can also browse web pages that are designed specifically for mobile devices, and use extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), or the wireless markup language (WML). To browse the web, you need to have an internet access point configured in your device. The browser requires network service. Browse t he web Select Menu > Web . Shortcut: To start the browser, press and hold 0 in the home screen. To browse the web, in th e bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or start to enter a web address (the field opens automa tically ), and select Go to . Some web pages ma y contain material, such as graphics and sounds, that requires a larg e amount of memory to view. If yo ur device r uns out o f memory wh ile loading such a web page, the graphics on t he page are not shown. To browse web pages with graphics disabled, to save memory and increase the page loading speed, select Options > Settings > Pa ge > Load cont ent > Text only . To enter a web ad dress, select Options > Go to > New web page . To refresh the content of the web page, select Option s > Web page options > Reload . To save the current web page as a bookmark, select Options > Web page options > Save as bookmark . To view snapshots of the we b pages you have visited during the current browsi ng session, select Back (available if History list is ac tivated in the browser settings and the current web page is not the first web page you visit). To prevent or allow the automatic opening of multiple windows, select Options > Web page opt ions > Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups . To view the shortcut key map, select Optio ns > Keypad shortcuts . To edit the shortcut keys, select Edit . Tip: To minimise the browser without e xiting the application or connection, press the end key once. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar helps you select frequently used functions of the browser. 52 Browser
To open the toolbar, press and hold the scroll key on a blank spot on a web page. To move within the toolbar, scroll left or right. To select a feature, press the scroll key. From the toolbar, sele ct from the following: Recently visit ed pages â View a list of the web addresses you visi t frequently. Overview â View an overview of the current web page. Search by keyword â S earch on the current w eb page. Reload â Refresh the web page. Subscribe to w eb fee ds (if available) â View a list of available web feeds on th e current web page, and subscribe to a web feed. Navigate pages Mini Map and Page overvi ew help you navigate web p ages that contain a large amount of information. To activate Mini Map, select Options > Sett ings > General > Mi ni map > On . When you scroll through a large web page, Mini Map opens and shows an overvi ew of the page. To move in Mini Map, scroll left, right, up, or down. When you find the desired location , stop scrolling. Mini Map disappears and leaves you at the selected location. When you are browsing a web pa ge that contains a la rge amount of information, you ca n also use Page overview to view what kind of informat ion the web page conta ins. To see an overview of the current web page, press 8 . To find the desired spot on the web page, scroll up, down, left, or right. Press 8 again to zoom in and view the desired section of the web page. Web feeds and blog s Select Menu > Web . Web feeds are XML files on web pages that are used to share, for example, the latest news headlines or blogs. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages. The browser application auto matically detects if a web page contains web feeds. If web feeds are available, to subscribe to a web feed, select Options > Subscribe to web fee ds . To update a web feed, in the Web feeds view, select a feed and Options > Web feed op tions > Refresh . To define whether the web feeds are updated automatic ally, in the We b feeds view, select Options > Edit > Edit . This option is not av ailable if one or more feeds are marked. 53 Browser
Widgets Your device supports widg ets. Widgets are small, downloadable web application s that deliver multimedia, news feeds, and other information , such as weather reports, to your device. Installed wi dgets appear as separate applications in the Applications folder. The default access point for widge ts is the same as in the web browser. When active in the background, some widgets may update information automatically to your devic e. Using widgets may involve th e transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For information about data transmission charges, contact your service provider. Content search Select Menu > Web . To search for text, phone numbers, or e-mail address es within the current web page, select Options > Find keyword and the appropriate option. To go to the next match, scroll down. To go to the previous match , scroll up. Tip: To search for text within the current web page, press 2 . Download and purch ase items You can download items such as ringing ton es, images, operator logos, themes, an d vi deo clips. These items can be provided free of charge, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applications in your device, for example, a downloaded photo can be sa ved in Gallery. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted s ources, such as app lications that are Symbian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified⢠testing. To download an item : 1 Select the link. 2 Select the appropriate option to purchase the item (for example, Buy ). 3 Carefully read all th e information provided. 4 To continue or cancel the download, select the appropriate option (for example, Accept or Cancel ). When you start a download, a li st of ongoing an d completed downloads from the current browsin g session is displayed. To modify the list, select Options > Downloads . In the list, select an item a nd Options to cancel ongoing downloads, or open, save, or delete completed downloads . Bookmarks Select Menu > Web . 54 Browser
Select Options > Go to > Bookmarks . You can select web addresses from a list or from a collection of bookmarks in the Recently visited pages folder. If you start to enter a web address, the field opens automatic ally. indicates th e homepage defin ed for the default ac cess point. To go to a new web p age, select Options > Go to > New web page . To send and add bookmarks, or to set a bookmark as the homepage, select Optio ns > Bookm ark options . To edit, move, or delete bookmarks, select Options > Bookmark manager . Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory location tha t is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information re quiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Cache . End the co nnection To end the connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . To delete the information the ne twork server collects about your visits to various web pages, select Option s > Clear privacy data > Cookies . Connection security If the security indica tor ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indi cate that the data transmission between the ga teway and the cont ent server (where the data is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmi ssion between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You ar e notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connecti ons and software instal lation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased se curity. The existence of a certif icate d oes not offer an y protection by itself; the certificate manager must co ntain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increa sed security to be available. Certificates have a restri cted lifetime. If "Expired 55 Browser
certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check th at the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certific ate settin gs, you mu st make sure that you really trust the owner of t he certificate and that the certificate really belong s to the listed owner. Web setting s Select Menu > Web and Option s > Settings . Select from the following: General settings Access point â Change the default access point. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider; you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Homepage â Define the homepage. Mini map â Turn Mini Map on or off. History list â While browsing, to select Back to see a list of the pages you hav e visite d during the current browsing session, turn History list on. Security warnings â Hide or show security notificati ons. Java/ECMA s cript â Enable or disable the use of scripts. Page setting s Load con tent â S e l e c t w h e t h e r y o u w a n t t o l o a d i m a g e s and other objects while browsing. Screen size â S e l e c t b e t w e en f u ll screen and the no rmal view with the options list. Default encoding â If text char acters are not shown correctly, you can select an other encoding according to the language of the current page. Block pop-ups â Allow or block automatic opening of pop-ups while browsing. Automatic reload â If you wa nt the web pages to be refreshed automatically while browsing, select On . Font size â Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy sett ings Recently visited pages â Enable or disable automatic bookmark collectin g. If you want to continue saving th e addresses of the visited web pa ges in the Recen tly visited pages folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . Form data saving â If you do not want the data you enter in forms on a web page to be saved and used the next time you open the page, select Of f . Cookies â Enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. Web feed settings Automatic updates â Defi ne whether you want web feeds to be updated automatically and how often you want to update them. S etting the application to retrieve web feeds automatically may involve the tr ansmission of large amounts of data thro ugh your service provider' s network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmiss ion charges. Acc. point for au to-update â Select the desired acc ess point for updating. This opt ion is only available when Automatic updates is activated. 56 Browser
Music Warning: Continuous exposure to high volume m ay damage your hearing. Listen to music a t a moderate level, and do not hold the device near your ea r when the loudspeaker is in use. FM radio The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenn a. A compatible heads et or accessory needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly. To open the radio, select Menu > Mu sic > FM radio . When you open the radio for th e first time , a wizard helps you to save local radio station s (network service). To check availability and costs of the visu al service and station directory services, contact your service provider. Listen to the radio Select Menu > Music > FM radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. You can make a c all or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The ra dio is muted when there is an active call. To start a station search, select or . If you have saved radio stations in your devi ce, to go to the next or previous saved station, select or . Select Options and from the following: Activate loudsp eaker â Listen to the radio using th e loudspeaker. Manual tuning â Change the frequency manually. Station dire ctory â View available stations based on location (network service). Save station â Save the station to which you are currently tuned to your st ation list. Stations â Open the list of your saved stations. Play in background â Return to the standby mode while listening to the FM radio in the background. Saved stations Select Menu > Music > FM radio . To open the list of your sa ved stations, select Op tions > Stations . To listen to a saved station, select Option s > Station > Listen . To change station deta ils, select Opti ons > St ation > Edit . FM radio settings Select Menu > Music > FM radio . 57 Music
To automatically search for a lternative frequencies if the reception is weak, select Options > Settings > Alternative f requencies > Auto scan on . To set the default access point for the radio, select Options > Settings > Access point . To select the region wher e you currently are, select Options > Settings > Current region . This sett ing is displayed only if there is no network coverage when you start the application. Nokia Music Store Select Menu > Music > Music store . In the Nokia Music Store (netwo rk service) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your device. To purchase music, you firs t need to register for the service. To access the Nokia Music Store, you must have a valid internet access point defined in the device. Nokia Music Store is not available for all countries or regions. To find more music in the different categories, select Options > Find in M usic store . To select the access point to use with th e Nokia Music Store, select Default access point . Nokia Inte rnet Radio Select Menu > Music > Internet radio . With the Nokia Internet Radio app lication (network service), you can listen to av ailable rad io st ations on the internet. To listen to rad io stations, you must have a wireless LAN (WLAN) or packet data access point defi ned in your device. Listening to the stations may involve the transmission of large amou nts of data through your service provider's network. The recommended connection method is WLAN. Check with your service provider for terms and data service fees before using other connections. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow large data transfers for a set monthly fee. Listen to inte rnet radio stations Select Menu > Music > Internet radio . To listen to a radio station on the internet, do the following: 1 Select a station from your favourites or the station directory, or search for stations by name from the Nokia Internet Radio service. To add a station manually, select Optio ns > Add station manually . You can also browse for station links with the Web browse rapplication. Compatible links are automatically open ed in the Internet Radio application . 2 Select Listen . The Now playing view opens, displaying information about the currently playing station and song. 58 Music
To pause the playback, press the scroll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To view station information, select Options > Station informati on (not available if you have saved the station manually). If you are list ening to a stat ion saved in your favourites, scroll left or right to listen to the previous or next saved station. Favourite stations Select Menu > Music > Internet radio . To view and listen to your favourit e stations, select Favourites . To add a st ation manually to favour ites, select Options > Add station manually . Enter the we b address of the station and a name that you want to appear i n the favourites list. To add the currently playing stat ion to favourites, select Options > Add to Favourites . To view station information, to m ove a station up or down in the list, or to delete a station from favourites, select Options > Station and the desired option. To view only stations beginning with p articular letters or numbers, start entering the characters. Matching stations are displayed. Search for stations Select Menu > Music > Internet radio . To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio service by name, do the following: 1 Select Search . 2 Enter a station name or the first letters of the name in the search field, and select Search . Matching stations are displayed. To listen to a station, select th e station and List en . To save a station to your favourites, select the sta tion and Options > Add to Favourites . To make another search, select Options > Search again . Station dire ctory Select Menu > Music > Internet radio and Statio n directory . The station directory is maintained by Nokia. If you w ant to listen to internet radio stations outside the directory, add station information manu ally or browse for station links on the intern et with the Web browser application. Select from the following: Browse by genre â View the available r adio station genres. Browse by language â View the languages in which there are stations broadcasting. 59 Music
Browse by country/region â View the countries in which there are stations broadcasting. Top stations â View the most popular stations in the direct ory. Internet radio settings Select Menu > Music > Internet radio and Option s > Settings . To select the default access point to con nect to the network, select Default access point and from the available options. If you wa nt the device to ask you to select the access point every time you open the application, select Always ask . To change the connection sp eeds for different connection types, select from the following: GPRS connection bitrate â GPRS pack et data connections 3G connection bitrate â 3G packet data connections Wi-Fi connection bitrate â WLAN connections The quality of the radio broa dcast depends on the selected connection speed. The higher the speed, the better the quality. To avoid bu ffering, use the highes t quality only with high speed connections. Nokia Podc asting With the Nokia Podcasting application (network service), you can search, discover, subscribe to, and download podcasts ov er the air, and pl ay, manage, an d share audio and video podcasts with your device. Podcasti ng settings To open Nokia Podcasting, select Menu > Music > Podcasti ng . Before using Nokia Podcasting, define your connection and download setti ngs. The recommended connection method is WLAN . Check with your service provider for terms and data service fees before using different connec tion methods. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow large da ta transfers for one monthly fee. Connecti on settings To edit the connection settings, select Options > Settings > Connection and from the following: Default access poin t â Select the access point to define your connection to the internet. Search service URL â Define the podcast search service URL to be used in searches. Download settin gs To edit the download set tings, select Options > Settings > Download and from the following: Save to â Define the location where you want to save your podcasts. Update inte rval â Define how often podcasts are updated. Next update date â Defin e the date of the next automatic update. Next update time â Define the t ime of the nex t automatic update. 60 Music
Automatic updates only occu r if a specific default access point is selected and Nokia Podc asting is running. If N okia Podcasting is not running, the automatic update s are not activated. Download limit (%) â Define the percentage of memory that is reserved for podcast downloads. If limit ex ceeds â Defi ne what to do if the downloads exceed the download limit. Setting the application to retrieve podcasts automa tically may involve the tran smission of large amo unts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. To restore the default sett ings, select Opti ons > Restore default in the settings view. Search podcasts The search service h elps you to find podcasts by keyword or title. The search service uses the po dcast search service URL that you defined in Podcasti ng > Options > Se ttings > Connection > Search service URL . To search for podcasts, select Menu > Music > Podcasting and Search , and enter the desired keywords. Tip: The search service looks for podcast tit les and keywords in descriptions, not specific episodes. General topics, such as football or hip-hop, usually give better results than a specific team or artist. To subscribe to marked channe ls and add them to your list of subscribed podcasts, select Subscribe . You can also add a podcast by selecting its title. To start a new sea rch, select Op tions > New sear ch . To go the website of a podcast, tap the podcast, and select Options > Open web page (network service). To see the details of a podcast, tap the podcast, and select Options > Description . To send a podcast to anothe r compatible device, tap the podcast, and select Options > Send . Directories To open directories, select Menu > Music > Podcasti ng and Directories . Directories help you find new podcast episodes to which to subscribe. The contents of the directories change. Select th e desired directory to update it (network service). The colour of the directory changes, when the update is complete. Directories can include podcas ts listed by popularity or themed folders. 61 Music
To open a themed folder, select the fol der. A list of podcasts is displayed. To subscribe to a podcast, select the title and Subscribe . After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, an d play them in the podcasts menu. To add a new web directory or folder, select Options > New > Web directory or Fol der . Enter the title and URL of the outline processor markup language (OPML) file, and select Done . To edit the selected folder, web link, or web directory, select Options > Edit . To import an OPML file stored on your device, select Options > Import OPML fi le . Select the location of the file, and import it. To send a directory folder as a multimedia message or using Bluetooth connectivity, select the folder and Options > Send . When you receive a message with an OPML file using Bluetooth co nnectivity, open the file to save the file int o the Received folder in Dire ctories. Open the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add to you r podcasts. Downloads After you have subscribed to a podcast, from directories, search, or by entering a we b address, you can manage, download, and play episodes in Podcasts. To see the podcasts you have subscribed to, select Podcasti ng > Podcasts . To see individual episode titl es (an episode is a particular media file of a podcast), select the podcast title. To start a download, select the epis ode title. To download or to continue to download select ed or marked episodes, select Options > Download . You can download multiple episodes at the same time. To play a portion of a podcast during download or after partial downloading, se lect the podcas t and Options > Play previe w . Fully downloaded podcasts ca n be found in the Podcasts folder, but are not shown until the library is refreshed. Play and manage podcasts To display the available ep isodes from the selected podcast, in Podcasts , select Open . Under each episode, you see the file format, the size of the file, and time of the upload. When the podcast is fully do wnloaded, to play the full episode, select it and Play . 62 Music
To update the selected podcas t or marked podcasts, for a new episode, select Option s > Update . To stop the updating, select Options > Stop update . To add a new podcast by entering th e URL of the podcast, select Options > New podcast . If you do not have an access point defined or if during packet data connection you are asked to enter a user name and password, contact your service provider. To edit the URL of the selected podcast, select Optio ns > Edit . To delete a downloaded podc ast or marked podcasts from your device, select Opt ions > Delete . To send the selected podcast or marked podcasts to another compatible device as .opml files as a multimedia message or by Bluetooth connectivity, select Options > Send . To update, delete, and send a group of selected podcasts at once, select Options > Mark/U nmark , mark the desire d podcasts, a nd select Options to choose the desired action. To open the website of the podcas t (network servic e), select Options > Open web pa ge . Some podcasts provide the op p ortunity to interact with the creators by commenting and voting. To connect to the internet to do this, select Options > View comments . Music player Music player supports files fo rmats such a s AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. You can also use Music player to listen to podcast episodes. Podcasting is the method for delivering audio or video content over the internet using either RSS or Atom technologies for playback on mobile devices and PCs. Play a song or a podcast episode To open Music player, select Menu > Music > Music player . You may have to refresh the musi c and podcast libraries after you have updated the song or podcast selection in your device. To add a ll available items to the library, in the Music player main view, select Options > Refresh library . To play a song or a podcast episode, do the following: 63 Music
1 Select categories to navigate to the song or podcast episode you want to hear. 2 To play the selected files, press . To pause playback, pres s ; to resume, press again. To st op playback, p ress . To fast forward or rewind, press and hold or . To go to the next item, press . To return to the beginning of the item, press . To skip to the previous item, press again within 2 seconds af ter a song or podcast h as started . To switch random play ( ) on or off, select Options > Shuffle play . To repeat the current i tem ( ), all items ( ) , o r t o s w i t c h repeat off, select Options > Repeat . If you play podcasts, shuffle and repeat are automatically switched off. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and st ereo image or to enhance bass, select Options > Settings . To view a visualisation du ring playback, select Opti ons > Show visualisation . To return to the standby mode and leave the p layer playing in the background, press the end key, or to switch to another open applicat ion, press and hold the menu key. To close the player, select Options > Exit . Playlist s Select Menu > Music > Music player . To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlist s . 64 Music
To view details of the playlist, select Optio ns > Playlist details . Create a playlist 1 Select Options > New playlist . 2 Enter a name for the playlist, and select OK . 3 To add songs now, select Yes ; or to a dd the songs later, select No . 4 If you select Yes , select artists to find th e songs you want to include in the playli st. Press the scroll key to add items. To show the song list under an artist titl e, scroll right. To hide the song list, scroll left. 5 When you have made your selections , select Done . The playlist is saved to the mass memory of your device. To add more songs later, when viewing the p laylist, select Options > Add songs . To add songs, album s, artists, genres , and composers to a playlist from the different vi ews of the music menu, select an item and Options > Add to playlist > Saved playlist or New playli st . To remove a song from a playlist, select Options > Remove . This does not delete the song from the device; it only removes it from the playlist. To grab so ngs and drop t hem to a new posit ion, use the scroll key. Podcasts Select Menu > Music > Podcasting . The podcast menu di splays the podcasts available in the device. Podcast episodes have three states : never played, partially played, and completely p layed. If an episode is partially played, it plays from the last playback position the next time it is played. If an episode is never played or completely played, it plays from the beginning. Home network with music player You can play content stored in your Nokia device remotely on compatible devices in a home network. You can also copy files from your Nokia de vice to other devices th at are connected to the home network. Home ne twork must be configured first. See "About home network" , p. 81 . Play a song or a podcast remotely 1 Select Menu > Mu sic > Music player 2 Select categories to navigate to the song or podcast episode you want to hear. 3 Select the desired song or podcast and Options > Play > Via external player . 4 Select the device in which the file is played. 65 Music
Copy songs or p odcasts wirelessly T o c o p y o r t r a n s f e r m e d i a f i l e s from your device to another compatible device in a home network, select a file and Options > Copy to home network . Content s haring does not have to be switched on in the h ome network settings. See "Activate sharing and define content" , p. 82 . Transfer music from PC You can use the following methods to transfer music: ⢠To v i ew y ou r d ev i ce o n a P C as a m as s m em or y d ev i ce where you can transfer any data files, ma ke the connection with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using a USB ca ble, select Mass storage as the connection mode. ⢠To synchronise music with Windows Media Player, connect a compatible USB da ta cable and select Media transfer as the connection mode. To change the def ault US B connection mode, select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > USB and USB connection mode . FM transmitter About the FM tr ansmitter The availability of the FM transmit ter may vary by count ry. At the time of writing, the FM transmitter may be used in the following European countries : Austria, Belgium , Bulgaria, Czech Rep ublic, Denmark, E stonia, Finland, Germany, Iceland, Ireland, Lithuania, Liechtenstein, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlan ds, Norway, Portuga l, Spain, Switzerland, Sweden , Turkey , and United Kingdom. For the latest information, an d the list of non-European countries, see www.nokia.com/fmtransmitter. With the FM transmitter, you can play songs in your device through any compatible FM rece iver, such as a car radio or a home stereo system. The operating distance of t he FM transmitter is up to a maximum of 2 metres (6.5 feet). The transmission ma y be subject to interference due to obstructions, such as walls, other electronic devices, or from public radio stations. The FM transmitter may cause interference to nearby FM receivers operating on the same frequency. To avoid interference, always search fo r a free FM frequenc y on the receiver before using the FM transmitter. The FM transmitter cannot be used at the same ti me as the FM radio of your device. The operating frequency range of the transmitter is from 88.1 to 107.9 MHz. When the transmitter is on and transmitting s ound, is displayed in the standby mode. If the transmitter is on , but not transm itting anything , is displayed and a periodic tone sounds. If the t ransmitter is not transmitting anything for several minutes, it sw itches off automatically. Play a song using FM transmitt er Select Menu > Music > Music player . T o p la y a s o ng s t o r ed in yo ur de vi ce th ro ug h a c om pa ti bl e FM receiver, do the following: 1 Select a song or a p laylist to be play ed. 66 Music
2I n t h e N o w p l a y i n g v i e w , s e l e c t Options > FM transmitter . 3 To activate the FM t ransmitter, select FM transmitter > On , and enter a frequency th at is free from other transmissions. For example, if the frequency 107.8 MHz is free in your area and you tune your FM receiver to it, you must also tune the FM transmitter to 107.8 MHz . 4 Tune the receiving device to the same frequency, and select Options > Exit . To adjust the volume, use the volume fu nction in the receiving device. Warning: Continuous exposure to high volume m ay damage your hearing. Listen to music a t a moderate level, and do not hold the device near your ea r when the loudspeaker is in use. If music is not played for se veral minutes, the transmitter is automatically deactivated. FM transmitter settings Select Menu > Music player > FM transmitter . To activate the FM transmitter, select FM transmitt er > On . To set a frequency manually, select Frequency and enter the desired value. To list the previously used frequencies, select Options > Last frequencies . 67 Music
Positioning (GPS) You can use applications such a s GPS data to determine your location, or measure dista nces and coordinates. These applications require a GPS connection. About GPS The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in the degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The availability of the coordinates may vary by region. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and main tenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United Sta tes government and is subject to change with th e United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan . Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Avai lability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditi ons. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete and metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited ac curacy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. Different positioning methods can be enabled or disabled in positioning settings. Assisted GPS (A- GPS) Your device also supports as sisted GPS (A-GPS). A-GPS is requires network support. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to retrieve assistance data over a packet data connection , which assists in calculating the coordinates of your current location when your device is receiving signals from satellites. When you activate A-GPS, your device receives useful satellite informati on from an assista nce data serv er over the cellular network. With the help of assisted data, your device can obtain the GPS position faster. Your device is preconfigured to use the Nokia A-GPS service, if no service provider-specific A-GPS settings are available. The assist ance data is retrieved from the Nokia A-GPS service server only when needed. To disable the A-GPS service, select Menu > Applications > GPS data and Opti ons > Positioni ng settings > Po sitioning methods > Assisted GPS > Disable . You must have an internet access point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data from the Nokia A-GPS service over a packet data connection. The access point for A-GPS can be defined in posi tioning settings. A wireless LAN (WLAN) access point cannot be used for this service. Only a packet data internet access point can be used. Your device asks you to select the internet access point when GPS is used for the first time. 68 Positioning (GPS)
Hold your device correctly The GPS receiver is located in the bottom of the device. When using the receiver, make sure that you do not cover the antenna w ith your hand. Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Es tablishing a GPS connecti on in a vehicle may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using the GPS receiver may drain the battery faster. Tips on creating a GPS connection If your device ca nnot find the sate llite signal, con sider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. ⢠If the weather conditions ar e bad, the signal strength may be affected. ⢠Some vehicles have tinted ( athermic) windows, whi ch may block the s atellite signals. Check satellite signal status To check how many sate llites your device has found, and whether your device is receiving satellite signals, select Menu > Appli cations > GPS data and Options > Satellite stat us . If your device has found satelli tes, a bar for each satellite is displayed in the satellite information view. The longer the bar, the strong er the satellite signal is. W hen your device has received enough da ta from the satellite signal to calculate the coordinates of your location, the bar colour changes. Initially, your device must rece ive signals from at leas t four satellites to be able to ca lculate the coordinates of your location. When the initial ca lculati on has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating the coordinates of your location with th ree satellites. However, t he accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. 69 Positioning (GPS)
Position req uests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position information. Service providers may offer information about local topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, based on the location of your dev ice. When you receive a position request, the service that is making the request is displayed. Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Reje ct to deny the reques t. Landma rks With Landmarks, you can sa ve the position information of specific locations in your de vice. You can sort the saved locations into different catego ries, such as business , and add other information to them, such as addresses. You ca n use your saved lan dmarks in compatible applications, such as GPS data. Select Menu > A pplications > Landmarks . The coordinates in the GPS are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. Select Optio ns and from the following: New landmark â Crea te a new landmark. To make a positioning request for your current location, select Current positio n . To select the location from th e map, select Select from map . To enter the position information manually, select Enter manually . Edit â Edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address). Add to category â Add a landmark to a category in Landmarks. Select each catego ry to which you want to add the landmark. Send â Send one or several landmarks to a compatible device. Your received landmarks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. T o edit and create new landmark categories, ope n the categories tab, and select Options > Edit categories . GPS data Select Menu > A pplications > GPS data . GPS data is designed to provide route guidance information to a select ed destination, position information about your curre nt location, and travelling information, such as the approximate distance to the destination and the approxim ate duration of travel. The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the intern ational WGS-84 coordinate system. To use GPS data, the GPS rece ive r of your device must initially receive position in formation from at least four satellites to calculate the coordinates of your location. When the initial calculatio n has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating the coordinates of your location with three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. 70 Positioning (GPS)
Route guidance Select Menu > Applications > GP S data and Navigation . Start the route guidance outdoor s. If started indoors, the GPS receiver may not receive the necessary information from the satellites. Route guidance uses a rota ting compass on the device display. A red ball shows the direction to the destination, and the approximate distance t o it is shown inside the compass ring. Route guidance is designed to show the straightest route and the shortest distance to the destination, measured in a straight line. A ny obstacles on the route , such as buildings and natura l obstacles, are ignored. Differences in altitude are not taken into a ccount when calculating the distance. Route guidance is active only when you move. To set your trip destinati on, select Op tions > Se t destinati on and a landmark as the destination, or enter the latitude and longitude coordinates. To clear the destination set for your trip, select Stop navigation . Retrieve posi tion information Select Menu > Applications > GP S data and Position . In the position view, you can view the position information of your current lo cation. An estimate of the accuracy of the location is displayed. To save your current loca tion as a landmark, select Options > Save po sition . La ndmarks are saved locations with more information, and th ey can be used in other compatible applications a nd transferred between compatible devices. Trip meter Select Menu > Applications > GPS data and Trip distance . The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GP S signals. To turn trip distance calculation on or off, select Options > Start or Stop . The calculated values remain on the display. Use this featur e outdoors to receive a better GPS signal. To set the trip distance and time and av erage and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calculation , select Options > Reset . To set the trip me ter and total time to zero, select Restart . 71 Positioning (GPS)
Nokia Maps About Maps With Maps, you can see your current location on the map , browse maps of different cities and countries, search for places, plan routes from on e location to another, save locations, and send the m to compatible devices. You can also purchase licences fo r traffic information and navigation services, if availabl e for your country or region. When you use Maps for the first time, you may need to select an internet access point for downloading maps. If you browse to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded in your device, a map for the area is automatically downloaded through t he internet. Some maps may be available in your device or on a memory card. You can also use the Nokia Map Loader PC software to download maps. To install Nokia Map Loader to a compatible PC, see www.noki a.com/maps. Tip: To avoi d data transfer costs, you can also use Ma ps without an internet connection, and browse the maps tha t are saved in your device or memory card. Note: Do wnloading conten t such as maps, s atellite images, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of la rge amounts of data (network service). Almost all digital cartog raphy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you download for use in this device. Network positio ning You can use the mobile network to find your current location. This is faster but less accurat e than with GPS, and you cannot use the location as a starting point for navigation. Select Menu > Maps . Use the mobi le network for posi tioning Select the network-based positioning method from the device se ttings. When you start the Maps applica tion and your GPS connection is ready, GPS replaces mobile network as the positioning method. Compass Select Menu > Maps . Your device has an internal compass. When the compass is enabled, the circle around the compass is green, and the map view rotates automatically according to the direction to which the top of the device is pointing. The compass has limited accura cy. Electrom agnetic fields, metal objects, or other exte rnal circumstances may also affect the accuracy of the compass. The compass should always be properly calibrated. The compass is ac tive by default. To turn off the compass, in the Maps main view, select Options > Tools > Turn compass off . When the compass is not turned on, the circle around the compass is white, and the map view does not rotate automatically. Turni ng off the compass is only 72 Nokia Maps
valid for the current session. When you open Maps the next time, it will be turned on automa tically. Before you can calibrate the compass yo u should check the following: ⢠GPS connection is active. ⢠The device sensors are on. S elect Menu > Settings > Phone > Sensor se ttings > Sensors > On . ⢠The map is zoomed to your GPS position. Otherwise the compass icon is not shown. To calibrate the compass : Rotate the device around all axes in a continuous movement until the calibrati on indicator changes its colour to green . If the indica tor is yellow , the accuracy of the compass i s low. If the indicat or is red, the compa ss is not calibrated. Move on a map Select Menu > Maps . When the GPS connection is active, shows your current location on the map. View your current or last known locati on Select Options > My position . Move on the map Use the scroll key. By default, the map is oriented nor th. When you have an active data connect ion and browse the map on the display, a new map is automatically downloaded, if you browse to an area not cover ed by the maps that have already been downloaded. The maps are automatic ally saved in the devi ce memory or on a compatible memory card, if available in your device. Zoom in and out on the map Press * and # . Change the map ty pe Select Options > Map mode . Display indicators Select Menu > Maps . The GPS indicator shows the availability of the satellite signals. On e bar is one satellite. When the device tries to find sa tellite signals, the bar is yellow. When the device receives enough data from the satellites for GPS 73 Nokia Maps
to calculate your location, the bar turns green. The more green bars, the more reliable the location calculation. Initially, your device must receive signals from at least four satellites to calculate your location. After the initial calculation, signa ls from three satellit es may be enough . The data transfer indicator shows the internet connection used, and the amount of data transferred since the application starte d. Find locations To search for locations, pr ess the scroll key and select Explore . Start entering th e loca tion name in the search field. The device suggests matching nearby loca tions. Select the location from the li st, or enter the location name in the search field, and select Search . 1 To find a specific address, select Options > Address search . 2 Start entering the requir ed information. The fields marked with an asterisk (* ) are mandatory. 3 Select the address from the list of s uggested matches. 4 Select Options > Search . To find an address saved in the contacts list, select Options > Address search > Optio ns > Select from Contacts . To search for locations by their coordinates, select Options > Address search > Optio ns > Search by coordinates . To select the coordinate format, scroll up or down. To search for locations in specific categories, such as restaurants or shoppi ng, press the scroll key, and select Explore . Select a category, an d enter the search terms in the search field. Plan routes You can create routes an d view them on the map. Select Menu > Maps . Create a route 1 Go to your starting point on the map. 2 Press the scroll key, and select Add to route . 3 Select Add new route point , and add the destination and more locations to the route. Change th e order of th e locations in the route 1 Go to a location. 2 Press the scroll key, and select Move . 3 Go to the place where you want to move the location, and select Select . Edit the route Press the scroll key, and select Edit route . Show the route on the map Select Show route . 74 Nokia Maps
Navigate to the destination Select Show route > Options > Start driving or Star t walking . To be able to navigate, you need to purchase a licence. Save the route Select Show route > Options > Save route . Save and send locations You can save your favourite locations to your device and send them to compatible devices. Select Menu > Maps . Save a location to your device Press the scroll key, and se lect Save . View your saved locati ons In the main view, select Optio ns > Favourites . Send a location to a compatible device Press the scroll key, and se lect Send . View your saved ite ms You can sort t he locations and routes you have saved to your device, and view them on the map. Y ou can also create collections of your favourite places, such as restaurants and museums. Select Menu > Maps . View the saved location s and routes Select Options > Favourites . Sort the save d locations Select Places > Optio ns > Sort . View the lo cation on the map Press the scroll key , and select Show on m ap . Add the location to a route Press the scroll key , and select Add to route . Create a collection Select Options > New co llectio n . Navigate to the destination To navigate to your desti nation, you must purch ase a licence for the navigation service. To purchase a licence for pedestrian and car navigation, select Options > Shop & licences > Drive & Walk . To purchase a lice nce for pedest rian navigation only, select Walk . The licence is region-spe cific and can be used only in the selected area . You can pay for the licence th rough a credit card or in your phone bill, if supported by your service provider. You can tran sfer the licence from your device to another compatible device, but the licence can only be used in one device at a time. When you use car navigation for the first time, you are asked to select the language of the voice guidance and download the related voice g uidance files. To change the language later, in th e main view, select Options > 75 Nokia Maps
Tools > Settings > Navigati on > Voice guidance . Voice guidance is not available for pedestrian navigation. To start navigating, scroll to a location, press the scroll key, and select Drive to or Walk to . To stop navigating, select Stop . Walk to yo ur destinatio n When you purchase a licence for pedestrian navigation, you can create routes that include pedes trian zones and parks, prioritise walkways and smaller roads, and omit motorways. With the licence, you also ge t the enhanced search service to your device, if available for your country or region. The enhanced search service enables you to find local events and travelling-related info rmation when you perform searches. Select Menu > Maps . Purchase a licence for pedestrian navigation Select Options > Shop & licences > Options > Shops for other regions > All regions > City explorer . You can pay for the licence through a credit card or in your phone bill, if supported by your service provider. Start navigating Go to a location, press the scroll key, and select Walk to . The distance between the start and end points of a walking route is limited t o a maximum of 50 ki lometres (31 miles) and the travelling sp eed to a maximum of 30 kph (18 mph). If the speed li mit is exceeded, navigation stops and is resumed once the speed is back within limits. If the destination is on off-road terrain, the route is displayed as a straight lin e to indicate the walking direction. There is no voice guidance available for pedestrian navigation, but the device guides you with a tone or vibration approximately 20 metres (22 yards) before you need to turn or make anot her manoeuvre. The guiding method depends on t he settin gs of the profile currently active in your device. See an overvi ew of the ro ute Select Options > Rout e overview . Stop navigating Select Stop . Drive to yo ur destination You can purch ase a licence for naviga ting on foot or by car. The licen ce is region-speci fic and can be used only in the selected area. To help navig ating and dr iving, you als o have lane assistance and speed limit warning services in your device, if available for your country or region. Select Menu > Maps . Purchase a lic ence Select Options > Shop & licences > Shop > Drive %s . 76 Nokia Maps
Start navigating by car Go to a location, press the scroll key, and select Drive to . When you use car navigation for the first time, you are asked to select the language of the voice guidance and download the related voice guidance files. Note: Downloading c ontent su ch as maps, satellite images, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of larg e amounts of data (network service). Switch vi ews during the navi gation Press the scroll key, and se lect 2D view , 3D view , Arrow view , or Route ove rview . Find an alternative route Select Options > Diff. ro ute . Repeat the voice gu idance Select Options > Repeat . Adjust the volume of the voice guidance Select Options > Volume . View the trip dis tance and duration Select Options > Dash board . Stop na vigati ng Select Stop . Your first consideration whi l e using Maps should be road safety. The service should not be used by the driver of a motor vehicle while driving. Traffic and safety The real-time traffic info rmation service provides information about traffic events tha t may affect your travel. You can purchas e and download the traffic information service to your device, if available in your country or region. When you purchase the lice nce, the location of speed cameras is shown on your route during navigati on and tracking, if this featu re is enabled and available for y our country or region. Some jurisd ictions prohib it or regulate the use of speed camera lo cation data. Nokia is n ot responsible for the accuracy, or the consequences of use of speed camera location data. Select Menu > Maps . Note: Downloading content such as maps, satellite images, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of larg e amounts of data (network service). Content such as satellite images, guides, weather and traffic information and relate d services are generated by third parties independent of Nokia. The content may be inaccurate and incomp lete to some extent and is subject to availability. Never rely solely on the aforementioned content and related services. Purchase a licence for the traffic information service Select Options > Shop & licences > Shop > Traffic & safety %s . 77 Nokia Maps
View informati on about traffic events Select Optio ns > Traffic info . The events are shown on the map as triangles and lines. View the d etails and possible re routing optio ns Select Optio ns > Open . Update the traffic inf ormation Select Update traffic info . Set your device to avoid traf fic events In the main view, select Options > Tools > Settin gs > Naviga tion > Reroute due to traffi c . Maps settings Select Menu > Maps . Select Optio ns > Tools > Settings and from the following: Internet â Define the internet settings. Naviga tion â Define the navig ation settings. Route â Define the routing settings. Map â Define the map settings . Synchronisation â Define the setting s for synchronising saved items with the Ovi Maps web service. Internet sett ings Select Menu > Maps . Select Optio ns > Tools > Settings > Intern et and from the following: Go online at start-up â Set the device to open an internet connection when you open Maps. Default access point or Network de stination â Select the access point to be used when connectin g to the internet. Roaming w arning â Set the device to notify you when registerin g to a netw ork other than yo ur home networ k. Navigat ion sett ings Select Menu > Maps . Select Options > Tool s > Se ttings > Navigation an d from the following: Voice guidance â Select the language of the voice guidance for car navigation. If you select a language with the text "with street names" , also the street names are said aloud. You may need to download the voice files before you can select the language. Backli ght â Define the backlight setting. Automati c zoom â Use automatic zooming. Traffic info update â Update the information about traffic events. Reroute due to traffi c â Plan a new route to avoid traffic events. Time indicator â Disp lay the travel time or estimated time of arrival. Speed limi t warner â Set the device to notify you when you exceed the speed limit, if speed limit information is available for your route. Safety spot w arner â Set the device to notify you when you approach a speed camera , if such information is available for your route. 78 Nokia Maps
Maps improv ement â Let Nokia use information from your device to improve the Maps application. The information is collected periodically while you are travelling with typical car speeds, and it is anonymous and encrypted. The information contains your direction, speed, location, satellite ti me, and accuracy of the positioning. The information is sent only when you use Maps over a fixed or wireless local area network connection. The information is deleted from your device once sent. The available options may vary. Route settings You can select the mode of transportation used when you create routes and what charact eristics you want the route to prefer. Select Menu > Maps . Edit the route settings Select Options > Tools > Sett ings > Route . Select the mode o f transportati on Select Transport mode > Walk or Drive . If you select Walk , one-way streets are regard ed as normal streets and walkways can be used. Use the fas test route Select Route selection > Faster route . This option is available only if you have selected Drive as the mode of transportation. Use the shortest route Select Route selection > Shorter ro ute . To plan routes that combine the advan tages of both the shortest and the fastest route, select Route selection > Optimised . You can also choose to allow o r avoid using motorways, tunnels, ferries, and toll roads. Map settings Select Menu > Maps . Select Options > Tools > Sett ings > Map and from th e following: Categories â Select what type of points of interest you want to see o n the map. Colours â Optimise the colour scheme for day or night usage. Memory to be used â Select where the map files are saved in your device. Maximum memory use â Select how much memory can be used to store maps. When the memory limit is reached, the oldest maps are removed. System of measurement â Select the metric or imperial system. Update maps To update the maps and v oice guidance files in your compatible device, download Nokia Maps Updater to your computer from www.nokia.com/maps. Connect your device to the computer, open Nokia Maps Updater, and do the following: 79 Nokia Maps
1 Select your language from the list. 2 If more than one device is connected to the comput er, select your device from the list. 3 When Nokia Maps Updater h as found updates, download them to your device. 4 Accept the download in yo ur device when prompted on the device display. Nokia Map Load er With the Nokia Ma p Loader applica tion, you can download maps and voice guidance file s from the internet to the device memory or a compat ible memory card. You must use the Maps applicat ion and browse maps at lea st once before using Nokia Map Loader, as Nokia Map Load er uses the Maps information to chec k which version of the maps to download. To install Nokia M ap Loader to a compatible computer, go to www.nokia.com /maps, and follow the i nstructions on the display. 80 Nokia Maps
Home network About home network Your device is compatible with Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) and certified by the Di gital Living Network Alliance (DLNA). You can u se a wireless LAN (WLA N) access point device or router to create a home network. Then you can connect compatible WLAN-ena bled UPnP devices to the network. Compatible devices may be your mobile device, a compatible PC, a sound system, a television, or a compatible wireless multimedia receiver connected to a sound system or televi sion. You can share and synchronise media files in your mobile device with other compatible UPnP and DLNA certified devices using the home ne twork. To activate the home network functionality and ma nage the settings, select Menu > Appli cations > Home media . You ca n also us e the Home media application to view and p lay media files from home network devices on your device or on other compatible devi ces such as a PC, sou nd system, or television. To view your media files on another home n etwork device, in Photos, for example, select a file, Options > Show vi a home network , and the device. To use the WLAN function of your device in a home network, you must have a working WLAN home connection and have other U PnP enabled home devices connected to the same home network. After setting up your home network, you can share you r photos and video clips with your friends and family at home. You are also able to store your medi a to a media server or retrieve media files from a compatible home server. You can play music stored in your device using a DLNA certified home stereo system, controlling the playlists and volume levels di rectly from your device. You can also view images captur ed with the camera of your device o n a compat ible TV sc reen, all controlled with your device over WLAN. The home network uses the security settings of the WLAN connection. Use the home network feature in a WLAN infrastructure network with a WLA N access point device and encryption enabled. Your device is connected to the home network only if you accept a connection reques t from another compatible device, or select the option to view, play, or copy media files on your device or search for other devices. Settings for home network To share media file s saved in Photos with ot her UPnP compatible and DLN A certified devices through a wireless LAN (WLAN), you must create and configure your WLAN home internet access point, then configure the settings for home network in the Home media application. The options related to home network are not available in applications before the s ettings in the Home media application have been configured. Select Menu > Applications > Home media . When you access the Home media application for the first time, the setup wizard opens, help ing you define th e home network settings for your device. To use the setup 81 Home network
wizard later, select Optio ns > Run wizard , and follow the instructions. To connect a compatible PC to th e home network, on the PC, you must install the rela ted software. The software is on the CD-ROM or DVD- ROM supplied with your device, or you can download it from the device support pages on the Nokia website. Configure set tings To configure the settings for home network, select Options > Settings and from the following: Home access point â To set the device to ask for the home access point every time you connect to the home network, select Always ask . To define a new access point that is used automatically when you use the home network, select Create new . If yo ur home network does not have WLAN secu rity settings activated, a s ecurity warning is displayed. You ca n continue and activate WLAN security later; or cancel defi ning the access poi nt and first activate WLAN securi ty. Device n ame â Enter a name for your device that is displayed to other comp atible devices in t he home network. Copy to â Select where to save copied media files. Activate sharing and define content Select Menu > A pplications > Home media . Select from the following: Content sharing â Allow or deny sharing media files with compatible devices. D o not activate cont ent sharing before you have configured all the other settings. If you activate content sharing, othe r UPnP compatible devices in the home network can view a nd copy the files you have selected for sharing in Images & video, and use playlists you have selected in Music. If you do not want other devices to access your files, deactiva te content sharin g. Images & v ideo â Select media files to share with other devices, or view the sharing stat us of images and videos. To update the content of the folder, select Options > Refresh conten t . Music â Select pla ylists to share with ot her devices, or view the sharing status and content of pla ylists. To update the content of the folder, select Options > Refresh content . View and share media files To share your media files wi th other UPnP compatible devices in the home network, activate content sharing. If content sharing is deactivated in your device, you can still view and copy the media files stored in another home network device if it is allowed by the other device. Show media files st ored in your device To show your images, videos , and soun d clips on anoth er home network device, such as a compatible TV, do the following: 1 In Photos, select an image or a video clip; or in Gallery, select a sound clip an d Optio ns > Show via home network . 2 Select a compatible device on which the media file is shown. Images are shown both on the other home network device and your de vice, and video and sound are played only on the other device. 82 Home network
3 To stop sharing a media file, select Option s > Stop showing . Show media files stored on another device To show media files that are stored on another home network device on your device (or on a compatible TV, for example), do the following: 1 Select Menu > Ap plications > Home media and Browse home . Your device searches for compatible devices. Device names are displayed. 2 Select a device. 3 Select the type of media you want to view from the other device. The availa ble file types depend on the features of the other device. To search for files using certain criteria, select Options > Find . To sort the found files, select Options > Sort by . 4 Select the media file or folder you want to view. 5 Select Play or Show , and On device or Vi a home network . 6 Select the device on which you want to show the file. To stop sharing the media file, select Back or Stop (available when playin g videos and music). Tip: You can print images saved in Photos through a home network with a UPnP compatible printer. Content sharing does not have to be activated. Copy media files To copy or transfer m edia files from your dev ice to another compatible device, such as a UP nP compatible PC, select a file in Photos and Options > Move and copy > Copy to home network or Move to home net. . Conten t sharing does not have to be switched on. To copy or transfer files from the other device to your device, select a file in the other device and the desired copying option from the opt ions list. Content sharing does not have to be switched on. Important security information When you configure your WLAN ho me network, enable an encryption method on your access point device, then on the other devices you intend to connect t o your home network. Refer to the documentation of the devices. Keep any passcodes secret a nd in a safe pla ce separate from the devices. You can view or change the settings of th e WLAN internet access point in your device. If you use the ad hoc operating mode to create a home network with a compatible devi ce, enable one of the encryption methods in WLAN s ecurity mode when you configure the internet access point. This step reduces the risk of an unwanted party joining the ad hoc network. Your device notifies you if another device at tempts to connect to it and the home network. Do not accept connection requests fr om an unknown device. 83 Home network
If you use WLAN in a network that does not have encryption, turn off sharing yo ur files with other devices, or do not sh are any private m edia files. 84 Home network
Nokia Video Centr e With Nokia Video Cent re (n etwork service), you can download and stream video clips over the air from compatible internet video services using a packet data or WLAN connection. You can also transfer video clips from a compatible PC to your device and view them in Video centre. Using packet data access poin ts to down load videos may involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data th rough your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transm is sion charges. Your device may have predefined services. Service providers may provide free content or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service provider. View and download video clips Connect to video services 1 Select Menu > Ap plications > Video centre . 2 To connect to a service to install video services, select Add new servi ces and the desired video service from the service catalogue. View a video clip To browse the content of in stalled video services, select Video feeds . The content of some video services is divided into categories. To browse video clips, select a category. To search for a video clip in the service, select Video search . Search may not be available in all services. Some video clips can be streamed over the air, but others must be first downloaded to your device. To download a video clip, select Options > Download . Downloads continue in the background if you exit the application. The downloaded video clips are saved in My videos. To stream a video clip or view a downloaded one, select Options > Play . When the video clip is playin g, use the selection keys and the scroll key, or the media keys to control the player. To adjust the volume, use the volu me key. Warning: Continuous exposure to high v olume may damage your hearing. Listen to music a t a moderate level, and do not hold the device near you r ea r when the loudspeaker is in use. Select Options and from the following: Resume download â Resume a paused or failed download. Cancel download â Cancel a download. Preview â Preview a video clip. This option is available if supported by the service. Feed details â View information about a video clip. Refresh list â Refresh the list of video clips. Open link in br owser â O pe n a l i n k i n t he we b br ow se r. 85 Nokia Video Centre
Schedule downloads To schedule an automatic download for video clips in a service, select Option s > Schedule downloads . Video centre automatically downloads ne w video clips daily at the time you define. To cancel scheduled downloads, select Manual download as the download method. Video feeds Select Menu > A pplications > Video centre . The content of the installed vi deo services is distributed using RSS feeds. To view and manage your feeds, select Video feeds . Select Optio ns and from the following: Feed subscrip tions â Check your current feed subscriptions. Feed details â Vi ew information about a video. Add feed â Subscribe to new feeds. Select Via Video directory to select a feed from the services in the video direct ory. Refresh feeds â Refresh the content of all feeds. Manage account â Manage your account options for a particular feed, if available. Move â Move video clips to a desired location. To view the videos available in a feed, select a feed from the list. My videos My videos is a stor age place for all video clips in the Video centre application. You can list downloaded video clips and video clips recorded wi th the device camera in separate view s. 1 To open a folder and view video clips, use the scroll key. To control the video pl ayer when the video clip is playing, use the media keys. 2 To adjust the volume, press the volum e key. Select Options and from the following: Resume download â Resume a p aused or failed download. Cancel download â Can cel a download. Video details â View information about a video clip. Find â Find a video clip. Ent er a search term tha t matches the file name. Show via home network â Play a downloaded video clip in a compatible home network. The home network must be configured first. Memory status â View the amount of free and used memory. Sort by â Sort video clips. Select the desired category. Move and copy â Mo ve or copy video clips. Select Copy or Move and the desired location. Transfer videos from your PC Transfer your own video clips to Video centre from compatible devices using a compatible USB data cable. Video centre displays only th e video clips which are in a format supported by your device. 86 Nokia Video Centre
1 To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, ma ke the connection with a USB data cable. 2 Select Mass storage as the connection mode. 3 Select the video clips you wan t to copy from your PC. 4 Transfer the video clips to E:\My Videos in the mass memory of your device, or to F:\My Videos in a compatible memory card, if available. The transferred video clips appear in the My videos folder in Video centre. Video files in other folders of your device are not displayed. Video centre settings In the Video centre main view, select Options > Settings and from the following: Video service selection â Select the video services that you want to appear in Vi deo centre. You can also add, remove, edit, and view the details of a video service. You cannot edit preinstalled video services. Connection settings â To define the network destination used for the network connection, select Network connection . To select the co nnection manu ally each time Video centre open s a network connection, select Always ask . To set GPRS connection on or off, select Confirm GPRS usage . To set roaming on or off, select Confirm roami ng . Parental control â Set an age limit to videos. The required password is the sa me as the device lock code. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . In video-on- demand services, videos which have the same or a hig her age limit than you have set , are hidden. Preferred memory â Select whether downloaded videos are saved in the mass memory or on a compatible memory card. If th e selected memory bec omes full, the device saves the content in the other memory. Thumbnails â Select whether to download and view thumbnail images in video feeds. 87 Nokia Video Centre
N-Gage About N-Gage N-Gage is a mobile gaming pl atform available for a range of compatible Nokia mobile devices. You can access N- Gage games, players, an d content through the N-Gage application on your device. You can also download games and access some features on your computer a t www.n- gage.com. With N-Gage, you can downlo ad and buy games, and play them by yourself or with friends. You can down load game trials to try out new games, a nd buy the ones you like. N- Gage also provides a way to keep in touch with other players, and to track and shar e your scores and oth er gaming achievements. To use N-Gage, you need a GPRS or 3G connection. You can also use WLAN if available. You also need the connection to access online features such as downloading ga mes, game licenses, multiplayer gami ng, or chat. You al so need the connection to participat e in onli ne or multiplayer games, or to send messages to other players. All N-Gage services, where conn ection to N-Gage servers is required, such as game file downloading, game purchase, online games, multiplayer gamin g, creating a player name, chat, and messa ging, involve tra nsmission of large amounts of data . Your service provider will charge for data transfer. For more information about data transf er plans, contact your mobile service provider. N-Gage v iews The N-Gage application consis ts of five different parts. Home opens when you start the N-Gage application. You ca n start playing or resume the game you played last, check your current N-Gage points, find more games, read your messages, or connect with an N-Gage friend who is available to play. In My games, you can play and mana ge games you have downloaded to your device. You can i nstall and delete games, rate and review games you have played, and recommend them to your N - Gage friends. In My profile, you can manage your profile information and details, and keep a record of your N-Gage gaming history. In My friends, y ou can invite other N- Gage players to your friends list, and see if they are online and available to play. You can als o send messages to your N-Gage friends. In Showroom, you can find information about N- Gage games, including screenshot s and player reviews. You ca n also tr y out new game s by downloading game tria ls, or enha nce your gaming experience with game extras for games already on your device. Get start ed Create a player name You can download, purchase, and pl ay games without a player name, but c reating on e is r ecommended. A player name enables you to participate in the N-Gage community, connect with other players, and sh are your gaming achievements, recommendations, and reviews. You also 88 N-Gage
need a player name to transf er your profile details and N- Gage points to another device. When you start the N-Gage application an d connect to the N-Gage service for the firs t time, you are prompted to create an N-Gage player name. You can connect to the network, for example, by setting your av ailability by selecting Options > Set Online Status > Available to Play . If you already have an N-Gage play er name, select I have an account, and enter your user name and password to log in. To create a new player name: 1 Select Register New Account. 2 Enter your date of birth, desired player name, and password. If the player name is already in use, N-Gage suggests a list of ava ilable similar names. 3 To register your player name, enter your details, read and accept the terms an d conditions, and select Register . You can also create your player name on the N-Gage website at www.n-gage.com. When you hav e created a play er name, edit your settings and personal information in the p rivate tab in My profile. Data transfer charges may a pply for player name creati on on your device. Start a game To start playing the game you last played, go to Home, and select Start Game . To resume a paused game, select Options > Resume Game . Track your progress To view your current N-Gage points, go to Home, a nd select Track My Progress . Play with friends To connect with N-Gage players on your friends list and to invite them to a game, select Play With Frie nds . N-Gage suggests a friend to play with based on your previous gaming history and t he availabi l i t y o f y o u r N - G a g e f r i e n d s . To find a different friend to play with, select Optio ns > View My Friends . This item is not displayed if your friends list is empty. See "Connect with other players " , p. 90 . Play and manage games To play and manag e the game s do wnloaded and installed on your device, select My Games . The games are sorted by the last-playe d date with the most recent fir st. There are five possible types of games in My games: 89 N-Gage
Full games â These are games you have purchased with a full licence. There may be several licence types available, depending on the game and your region. Trial games â These are full game files to which you have access only for a limited time or which have limited content. When the trial expi res, you must purchase a licence to unlock the full ga me and continue. These games are marked with a trail ba nner. Demo games â These are smaller sections of the game with only a very limited set of featu res and levels. These games are marked with a demo banner. Full expired â These are games that you have purchased with a limited licence, wh ich is now expired. These games are marked with a clock and an arrow. Not available â These are full games which you have removed, or which you have downloaded but the installation was not comple ted. These g ames are shown as unavailable in the games li st. Also, games inst alled on the memory card are shown as unavailable w hen the memory card has been removed. If a game extra has been downloaded but not fully installed, the respe ctive game graphic is also una vailable and the game cannot be play ed until the game extra has been installed. Edit profile details To edit your public profile details, select Optio ns > Edit Profile , open the public tab, and select from the following: Icon â Add an imag e to repr esent you. When you change the icon, N-Gage shows a list of all the images in your device Gallery that can be us ed as the icon. Select the image you want from the list, or use the search to find it. Motto â Add a short person al message. To edit the text, select Change . Favorite Gam e(s) â Enter the nam es of your favo urite games. Device Model â The model number of your device. This is defined automatically and cannot be edited. Show Location â S e l e c t w h e t h e r t o d i s p l a y y o u r c i t y a n d country in your public profile. You can change your location in the private tab. After you update your profile, log in to the service with your player name to ensure that the chan ges you made to your profile are synchronised with the N-Gage server. Connect with other players To connect with other N-Gage players and to man age your Friends list, go to My friends. You ca n search for a particu lar N-Gage player, invite them to your Friends li st, and then see which of yo ur friends are online and available to play. You can also send and receive private messages and game recommendations. Find and add friends To invite an N-Gage player to your friends list, enter the player's player name to the Add a Friend field in the friends list. Add a message to the invi tation, if needed. To send the invitation, select Send . If the player accepts the invitation, the player appears on your friends list. 90 N-Gage
If you do not have any N-Gage friends and wan t to meet other players, go to N-Gage Arena at www.n-gag e.com, and visit the chatrooms and forums. View friend informatio n To view information about a friend, such a s the friend's current N-Gage points or the most recently played ga mes, scroll to the player on your fr iends list . You must be on line and connected to the N-Gage service to see the current online status of your friends. The indicator next to the pl aye r name shows the frien dâÂÂs availability. You can send p rivate mess ages to your N- Gage friends even if you are unavailable or offline. Sort the frie nds list To sort your friends by availability, play er name, or N-Gage points, select Options > Sort F riends By . Rate a player To rate a player, scroll to the pla yer on your friends list, and select Option s > Rate Player . You can give a player a rating from one to five s tars. The ratin g you give affects the playerâÂÂs repu tat ion in the community. Send messages In My friends, you ca n send private mess ages to players in your friends list. If your friend is currently logged in to the N-Gage service, the friend can respond to your message, and you can chat one-on-one. To view new messages receiv ed from an N-Gage friend, scroll to the friend on yo ur friends list, and select Options > View Message . Read messages are deleted automatic ally when you exi t N-Gage. To view game recommendations, select Options > View Recommendat ion . Game recommendations are deleted automatic ally a week after yo u receive them. To send a message to an N-Gage friend, scroll to the friend on your friends list, and se lect Options > Send Message . The maximum size of a p rivate message is 115 characters. To send the message , select Submit . You need a GPRS, 3G, or wireless LAN connection to be able to use the messaging feature. Da ta transfer charges may apply. For more information, contact your mobile se rvice provider. N-Gage settings To change your N-Gage sett ings, select Op tions > Edit Profile , open the private tab, and select Op tions > N- Gage Settings . Select from the following: Player Name â Edit you player name. You can only edit the name if you have not logg ed in to th e N-Gage service yet. Personal Settings â D e f i n e yo ur pe rs on al de t ai ls , w hi ch are not shown in your public profi le, and subscribe to the N-Gage newsletter. Define also whether you wa nt to 91 N-Gage
receive notifications from your N-Gage friends while you are playing games. Connection Setti ngs â Select whether to allow the N- Gage application to connect to the network automatica lly when needed, and define your preferred access point and the data transfer limit that trigg ers an alert. Account Details â Select your purchase preferences. When you purchase a game, you a re asked if you want to save your billing details, includin g your credit card number, for faster purchasing in the future. 92 N-Gage
Messag ing Only devices that have comp atible features can receive and display mult imedia messages . The appearan ce of a message may vary dependin g on the receiving device. Messaging main view Select Menu > Messaging (network service). To create a new message, select New message . Tip: To avoid rewri ting messages that y ou send often, use texts in the Templates folder in My folders. You can also create and save your own temp lates. Messaging contains the following folders: Inbox â Received messages, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. My folders â Organise your mess ages into folders. New mailbox â Connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages, or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. Drafts â Draft messages th at have not been s ent are stored here. Sent â The last messages that have been s ent, excluding me ssages sent using Bluetooth connectivity , are stored here. You can change the number of mess ages to save in this folder. Outb ox â Messages waiting to be sent are t emporarily stored in the outbox, for ex ample, when your device is outside network coverage. Reports â You can request the network to sen d you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you ha ve sent (network se rvice). Write text Your device supports traditional text input and predictive text input. Wit h predictive t ext, you c an enter any letter with a single keypress. Predicti ve text input is based on a built-in dictionary to which you can add new words. When you write text, is displayed when you write text using traditional text input and when using predic tive t ext inp ut. Traditional text inpu t Press a number key ( 1 âÂÂ9 ) repeatedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters av ailable for a number key than are printed on the key . If the next letter is loca ted on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor ap pears (or scroll right to end the time-out period), and enter the letter. To insert a space, press 0 . To move the cursor to the next line, press 0 three ti mes. Predictive te xt input 1 To activate or deactivat e pr edictive text input, press # twice quickly. This activates or deactivates 93 Messaging
predictive text input for all editors in the device. indicates that predictive text input is acti vated. 2 To write the desired word, press the keys 2-9 . Press each key once for each letter. 3 When you have finished writing the word, a nd it is correct, scroll right to confirm it, or press 0 to add a space. If the word is not correct, press * repeatedly to view the matching words in the dictionary. If the ? character is displayed after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary, select Spell , enter the word (up to 32 letters) using trad itional text input, an d select OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary is full, the new word replaces the oldest added word. Write the first part of a compound word; to confirm it, scroll right. Write the second part of the compound word. To complete the compound word, press 0 to add a space. Tips on text input To insert a number in the letter mode, press an d hold the desired number ke y. To switch between the different character mode s, press # . To delete a character, press C . To delete more than one character, press and hold C . The most common punct uation marks are avai lable under 1 . To scroll them through one by one, if you use traditional text input, press 1 repeatedly. If you use predictive text input, press 1 , and then * repeatedly. To open a list of special characters, press and hold * . Tip: To select several special ch aracters from the special characters list, press 5 after each hig hlighted character. Change the writ ing la nguage When you are writing text, you can change the writing language. For example, if you are writing t ext using a non- Latin alphabet and wan t to write Latin characters, such as e-mail or web addresses, yo u may need to change the writing language. To change the writing language, select Options > Writing languag e and a writing languag e that uses Latin characte rs. After changing th e writing la nguage, for example, if you press 6 repeatedly to reach a sp ecific character, changing the writing language gives you access to characters in a different order. Edit text an d lists To copy and paste text, while pressi ng and holding # , scroll left or right to highlight text. To copy the text to the clipboard, while still holding # , select Copy . To insert the text into a document, press a nd hold # , and select Pas te . 94 Messaging
To mark an item in a list, scroll to it, and press # . To mark multiple items in a list, press and hold # while you scroll up or down. To end the selec tion, stop scrolling, and release # . Write and send messages Select Menu > Messaging . Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain ma liciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Before you can create a mult imedia message or write an e-mail, you must have t he correct connection settings defined. The wireless ne twork may limit the size of MMS message s. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. Only devices that have comp atible features can receive and display multimed ia messages. The appearance of a message may vary dependin g on the receiving device. Check the size limit of e-mail messages with your service provider. If you attempt to send an e-mail message that exceeds the size limit of the e-mail server, the message is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempts to res end it periodically. Sending an e-mail requires a data connection, and continuous attempts to resend t he e-mail may incur charges from your service provider. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a message or move it to the Drafts folder. Messaging requires network services. 1 To send a text or a multimedia message, select New message . To send an audio or e-mail message, select Options > Create message , and the relevant option. 2 To select recipients or grou ps from the contacts list, select To . To enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e- mail address manually, select the To field. To add a semicolon (;) that se parates the recip ients, press * . 3 In the Subject field, enter the subject of the e-mail or multimedia message. If the Subject field is not visible, select Optio ns > Message header fields to change the fields that are visible. 4 In the message field, write the message. 5 To add an object to a message or e-mail, select and the relevant type of content. The message type may change to m ultimedia message based on the inserted content. 95 Messaging
6 To send the message or e-mail, select , or press the call key. Your device supports text messages beyond the lim it for a single message . Longer messag es are sent as two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Characters with accents, ot her marks, or some language options take more spa ce, and limit the number of characters that can be se nt in a single message. Messaging inbox Receive mess ages Select Menu > Messaging and In box . In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread multimedia message, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a message, and 1 new message are displayed in the home sc reen. To open the message, select Show . To open a message in the Inbox folder, select the message. To reply to a received message, select Options > Reply . Multimedia messages Importa nt: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain ma liciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification t hat a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message cen tre. To start a packet data connection to retrieve the message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a mu ltimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a mes sage. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Options > Objects . If the message includes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presen tation, select the indicat or. Data, settin gs, and we b service me ssages Your device can receive ma ny kinds of messages that contain data, such as business cards, ringing tones, operator logos, calendar ent ries, and e-mail notifications. You may also recei ve settings from you r service provider in a configuration message. To save the data from t he message, se lect Optio ns and the corresponding option. Web service messages are no tifications (for example, news headlines) and ma y contain a text mess age or a link. For availability and subscrip tion, contact your service provider. Message reader With Message reader you can listen to text, multimedia, and audio messag es and e-mail. To change the message read ing settings in the Speech application, select Op tions > Speech . 96 Messaging
To listen to new messages or e-mail, in the home screen, press and hold the left se lection key unt il the Me ssage reader application opens. To listen to message s from your Inbox folder or e-mail from your Mailbox, select a message and Options > Listen . To stop the reading, press the end key. To pause or resu me, press the scroll key. To skip to the next message or e-mail, scroll ri ght. To replay the current message or e-mail, scroll left . To skip to the previous message, scroll left twice. To adjust the volume, scroll up or down. To view the current message or e-mail in text format without the sound, select Options > View . E-mail Set up your e- mail With the Nokia e-mail wizard, you can set up your corporate e-mail account, such as Microsoft Outlook, Mail for Exchange, or Intellisync, and your in ternet e-mail account. When setting up your corporate e-mail, you may be prompted for the name of the server associated with your e-mail address. Ask your company IT department for details. 1 To start the wizard, go to the home screen, scroll to the e-mail wizard, and press the scroll key. 2 Enter your e-ma il address and passwo rd. If the wizard is not able to configure yo ur e-mail settings automatically, you need to se lect your e-mail account type and enter the related a ccount settings. If your device contains any additional e-mail clients, those are offered to you when you start the e-mail wizard. Send e-mail Select Menu > Messaging . 1 Select your mailbox and Optio ns > Create email . 2 In the To field, enter the re cipient's e-mail address. If the recipient's e-mail address can be found in Contacts, start entering th e recipient's name, and select the recipient from the proposed matches. If you add several recipients, insert ; to separate the e-mail addresses. Use the Cc field to send a copy to other recipients, or the Bcc field to send a blind copy to recipients. If the Bcc field is not visible, s elect Options > More > Show Bcc field . 3 In the Subject field, enter the subject of the e-mail. 4 Enter your message in the text area. 5 Select Options and from the following: Add attachment â Add an attachment to the message. Priority â Set the priority of the message. Flag â Flag the message for follow-up. Insert template â Insert text from a template. Add recipient â Add recipients to the message from Contacts. Editing options â Cut, copy, or paste the selected text. 97 Messaging
Writing language: â Se lect the writing la nguage. 6 Select Options > Send . Add attachments Select Menu > Messaging . To write an e-mail message, select your mailbox and Options > Create email . To add an attachment to the e-mai l message, select Options > Add attachment . To remove the selected attachment, select Options > Remove attachme nt . Read e-mail Select Menu > Messaging . Importa nt: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain ma liciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. To read a received e-mail message, select the mailbox , and select the message from the list. To reply to the message sender, select Options > Reply . To reply to the sender and all other recipients, select Options > Reply to all . To forward the message, select Options > Forward . Download attachments Select Menu > M essaging and a mailbox. To view the attachments in a received e-mail message, scroll to th e attachment field, and select Options > Actions > Ope n . If there are several attachments in the message, a list ope ns showing which atta chments have been downloaded or not. To download the selected attachment or all the attachments from the list to your device, select Options > Download or Download all . The attachments are not saved in your device, and are deleted when yo u delete the mes sage. To save the selected attachment or all the downloaded attachments in your device, select O ptions > Save or Save all . To open the selected, down loaded atta chment, s elect Options > Actions > Open . Reply to a mee ting request Select Menu > M essaging and a mailbox. Select a received meeting request, Options , and from the following: Accept â Accept the meeting request. Decline â Decline the meeting request. Forward â Forward the meeting request to another recip ient . Remove from calendar â Remove a cancelled meeting from your calendar. 98 Messaging
Search for e- mail messages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To search for items within the recipients, subjects, and body texts of the e-mail messages in the mailbox, select Options > Search . To stop the search, select Optio ns > Stop search . To start a new se arch, select Options > New search . Delete e-mails Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To delete the selected e-mail message, select Options > Delete . The message is plac ed in the Deleted items folder, if available. To empty the Deleted items fo lder, select the folder and Options > Empty deleted items . Switch betw een e-mail folders Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To open another e-mail folder or mailbox, select Inbox at the top of the display. Select the e-mail folder or mailbox from the list. Disconnect from the mailbox Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To cancel the synchronisation between the device and the e-mail server, an d to work with e-mail withou t a wireless connection, select Options > Disconnect . If your mailbo x does not have the Disconnect option, sele ct Options > Exit to disconnect from the mailbox. To start the synchronisation again, select O ptions > Connect . General e-mail settings Select Menu > Messaging and Settings > Global settings . Select from the following: Message list layout â Select whether the e-mail messages in In box display on e or two lines of text. Body text preview â Preview me ssages when scrollin g through the list of e-ma il messages in Inbox. Title divi ders â To be able to expand and collapse the list of e-mail messages, select On . Download notifications â Set the device to display a notification when an e- mail attachment has been downloaded. Warn before delete â Set the device to displa y a warning before you delete an e-mail message. Load HTML images â Automatically load HTML images in e-mails. View mess ages on a SIM ca rd Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > SIM messages . 99 Messaging
Before you can view SIM messa ges, you must copy them to a folder in your device. 1 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 2 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 3 To start copying, select a folder. To view the messages, open the folder. Messaging settings The settings may be preconfigured in your device, or you may receive them in a me ssage. To enter settings manually, fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or an asteri sk. Some or all message cent res or access p oints may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or rem ove them. Text message se ttings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settin gs > Text message . Select from the following: Message centres â View a list of all text message centres that have been defined. Message centre in use â Select which message centre to use to deliver text messages. Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding system when available, select Reduced support . Receive report â Select whether the network sends delivery reports on your me ssages (network service). Message validity â Select how long the message centre resends yo ur message if the first at tempt fails (net work service). If the message cannot be sent within the vali dity period, the message is delete d from the me ssage centre. Message sent as â To learn if your message centre is able to convert text messages int o these other formats, contact your service provider. Preferred connection â Select the connection to use. Reply via same centre â Select whether you want the reply messag e to be sent using the same text me ssage centre number (network service). Multimedia message settings Select Menu > M essaging and Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Select from the following: Image s ize â Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. MMS creation mode â If you select Guid ed , the device informs you if you try to send a message that may not be supported by the recipi ent. If yo u select Restricted , the device prevents you from sending me ssages that may not be supported. To include content in your messages without notifications, select Free . Access point in use â Select which access point is used as the preferred connection. Multimedia retrieval â Select h ow you want to receive messages. To receive m essages automat ically in your home network, select Auto in home netw . . Outside your home network, you receive a notification that there is a message to retrieve in the multimedia messa ge centre. If you select Always automatic , your device automatically 100 Messaging
makes an active packet data connection to retrieve the message both in and out side your home network. Allow anonymous msgs. â Select whether you want to reject messages from an anonymous sender . Receive adve rts â Select whether you want to receive multimedia messag e advertisements. Receive reports â Select whether you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Deny rep ort sendin g â Select whether you want to prevent your device from sending delivery reports of received messages. Message validity â Select for how long the message centre resends your message if the first attempt fai ls (network service). If the me ssage cannot be sent within this time period, the message is deleted from the message centre. E-mail sett ings Manage mailboxes Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > E- mail . To select which mailbox you want to u se to send and receive e-mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox. To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, select Mailboxes , scroll to the desired mailbox, and select Options > Delete . To create a new mailbox, select Mailboxes > Options > New mailbox . The nam e you give to t he new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Mess aging ma in view. You can ha ve up to six mailboxe s. Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to change the connection settings, user se ttings, retrieval settings, and automatic retrieval settings. Mailbox settin gs Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > E- mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Mailbox settings . To edit the settings for the ma ilbox, select from the following: My e-mail address â Enter your e-mail address. User name â Enter your user name given to you by your service provider. Password â Enter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. Access point in use â Select an internet access point (IAP). Mailbox name â Enter a name for the mailbox. Mailbox typ e â Defines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4. This setting cannot be changed. Security â Select the security op tion used to secure the connection to the remote mailbox . Port â Define a port for the connection. 101 Messaging
APOP secure login (for POP3 only) â Use with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the se nding of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. User settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settin gs > E- mail > Mailboxes , a ma ilbox, and User settings . Select from the following: My name â Enter your own name. Your name replaces your e-mail address in the recipientâÂÂs device if the recipientâÂÂs device supports thi s function. Send message â Define how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immediatel y for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send mes sage . If you select During next conn. , e-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. Send copy to s elf â Select whether you want to send a copy of the e-mail to your own mailbox. Include si gnature â Select wheth er you want to attach a signature to your e-mails. New e-mail a lerts â Select whether you want to receive the new e-mail indications (a tone, a no te, and a mail indicator) when new e-mail is received. E-mail deletion â Select whether you want to delete e- mails from phone only, from phone and server, or to be asked each time separately. Reply-to ad dress â Define an e-mail address to which replies to e-mails sent from the mailbox in question are deli vered . Web service me ssage settings Select Menu > M essaging and Options > Settings > Service mess age . Select whether you want to rece ive service messages. To set the device to automatically activat e the browser and start a network connection to ret rieve content when you receive a service message, select Do wnloa d messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast se ttings Select Menu > Messag ing and Optio ns > Settings > Cell broadcast . Check the available topics and related topic numbers with your service provider. Select from the following: Reception â Select whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. Language â Select the languages in wh ich you want to receive messa ges: All , Selected , or Other . Topic detection â Select whether the device automatically searches for n ew topic numbers, an d saves the new numbers without a name t o the topic list. Other se ttings Select Menu > M essaging and Options > Settings > Other . Select from the following: Save sent mess ages â Select whether you want t o save a copy of the text messages, multimedia messages, or e- mail that you send to the Sent folder. 102 Messaging
Number of saved msgs. â Define how many sent messages are saved to the sent folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. Memory in use â Select the memory where you want to save your mess ages. 103 Messaging
Make calls Voice calls 1 In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. To remove a number, press C . For international calls, press * twice for the character (which replaces the international access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leadi ng zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 To make the call, press the call key. 3 To end the call (or to cancel the call attempt), press the end key. Pressing the end key always ends a call, even if another application is active. To make a call from Contacts, select Menu > Con tacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the search field. To call the contact, press the call key. If you ha ve saved several numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list, and press the call key. Options during a call To adj us t t he vo lum e d ur in g a call, use the volume key on the side of your device. You can also use the scroll key. If you have set the volume to Mute , select Unmute first. To send an image or a video clip in a multimedia message to the other participan t of the call, select Options > Send MMS (in UMTS networks only). You can edit the message and change the recipient before sending. Press the call key to send the file to a compatible device (network service). To put an active voice call on hold while answering another incoming call, select Optio ns > Hold . To switch between the active and the held call, select Options > Swap . To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Options > Send DTMF . Enter the DTMF string or se arch for it in Cont acts. To enter a wait character ( w) or a pause character (p), press * repeat edly. To send the tone, select OK . You can add DTMF tones to the phone number or DTMF fields in a contact card. Tip: When you have only one active voice call, to put the call on hold, press the call key. To activate the call, press the call key ag ain. During an acti ve call, to route the sound from the handset to the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate loudsp eaker . If you have a ttached a compatible headset with Bluetooth connect ivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Act ivate handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select Options > Act ivate handse t . 104 Make calls
To end an active call and replace it by answerin g the waiting call, select Options > Replace . If you have several calls acti ve, to end them all, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that yo u can use during a voice call are network services. Voice mail Select Menu > Tools > Cal l mailbo x . When you open the Voice mail application (network service) for the firs t time, you are asked to enter t he number of your voice mailbox. To call your voice mailbox, scroll to Voice mailbox , and select Options > Call voice mail box . To call your video mailbox, scroll to Video mailbox , and select Options > Call video mailbox . If you have configured net call settings to your device and have an internet call mailbox, to call the mailbox, scroll to the mailbox, and select Options > C all internet call mbx. . To call your mailbox in the standby mode, press and hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. Select the mailbox you want to call. To change the mai lbox number, select the mailbox and Options > Change num ber . Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press the call key, or open the s lide. To mute the ring ing tone o f an incoming call, select Silence . If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key. If you activate the Call divert > Voice calls > If busy function in phone settings to divert calls, declining an incoming call also diverts the call. When you selec t Silence to mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, you can send a text message w ithout rejecting the call, informin g the caller that you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send me ssage . To s et up this option and write a standard text me ssage, sele ct Menu > Tools > Settings an d Phone > Call > Reject call with message . Make a conference call Your device supports conference calls between a maximum of six particip ants, including yourself. 1 Make a call to the first pa rticipant. 2 To make a call to another participan t, select Options > New call . The first call is put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, to join the first participant in the conf erence call, select Option s > Conference . To add a new person to the call, make a call to another participant, and add the new call to the conference call. 105 Make calls
To have a private con versation with one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Scroll to the participant, and select Private . The conference call is put on hold on your device. The other participants can still cont inue the conference call. To return to the conference call, select Options > Conference . To drop a participant, select Options > Conference > Drop part icipant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4 To end the active conference c all, press the end key. Speed dial a phone number To activate t he feature, select Menu > To ols > Settings and Phone > Call > Speed dialling . To assign a phone number to one of the number keys ( 2-9), select Menu > T ools > Speed dial . Scroll to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Opt ions > Assign . 1 is reserved for the voice or video mailbox, and for starting the web browse r. To call in the standby mode, press the assign ed key and the call key. Call wait ing You can answer a call while you h ave another call in progress. To activate call waiting, select Settings > Phone > Call > Call wa iting (network service). To answer the waiting call, pr ess the call key. The first call is put on hold. To switch between th e two calls, select Swap . To connect an incoming c all or a call on hold with an active call and to disconnect yourself from the calls, select Options > Transfer . To end the active call, press the end key. To end both calls, select Options > End all cal ls . Voice dialling Your device automatically creates a voice tag for th e contacts. To listen to th e synthesised voice tag, select a contact and Opt ions > Voice tag details . Scroll to a contact detail, an d select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags m ay be difficult in a noisy environment or during an em ergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialling in all circumstances. When you use voice dialling, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a short distance away when you say the voice tag. 106 Make calls
1 To start voice dialling, in the home screen, press and hold the call key. If a compatible headset with the headset key is attach ed, pr ess and hold the headset key to start voice dialling. 2 A short tone sounds, and Speak now is displayed. Say clearly the name that is saved for the cont act. 3 The device plays a synthe sised voice tag for the recognised contact in the selected device language, and displays the name an d number. To cancel the voice dialling, select Quit . If several numbers are sa ved for a name, you can say a lso the name and the number type, such as mobile or telephone. Make a video call When you make a video call (network service), you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call. The live video im age, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. T o b e a b l e t o m a k e a v i d e o c a l l , y o u m u s t h av e a U S I M c a r d an d b e i n t h e co v e r a g e o f a U M T S n e t w o r k . F o r a v a il a b i l i t y of and subscription to video call services, contact your network service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls ca nnot be made while another voice, video, or data call is active. Icons You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have d enied video s ending from y our device. To send a still image instead, select Menu > Tools > Settings and Phone > Call > Image in video call . Even if you denied video sending during a video call, the call is still char ged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1 To start a video call, ente r the phone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a contact. 2 Select Options > Call > Video call . The secondary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. Starting a video call may take a while. Waiting for v ideo image is shown. If the call is not successful (for examp le, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a text or multime dia message inste ad. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear t he soun d through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending ( ), in which case you only hear the sound and may see a still image or a grey background graphic. 3 To end the video call, press the end key. 107 Make calls
During a vi deo call To change between showing video or hearing the voice of the caller only, select Options > Enable , or Disable and the desired option. To activate the loudspeaker, select Options > Acti vate loudsp eaker . If you have attached a compatible h eadset with Bluetooth connectivity , to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select Options > Activ ate handse t . To use the camera in the back of your device to send video, select Options > Use secon dary camera . To switch back to the camera in the front of your device, select Options > Use main ca mera . To take a snapshot of the video you are s ending, select Options > Send snapshot . Video sending is paused and the snapshot is shown to th e recipient. The snap shot is not saved. To zoom your image in or out, select Options > Z oom . To change the vide o quality, select O ptions > Video preference > Normal quality , Clearer detail or Smoother moti on . Answer or decline a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. To answer the video call, press the cal l key. Allow video image to be sent t o caller? is displayed. To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do not activate the video call, you only hear the sound of the caller. A grey sc reen replaces the video image. To replace the grey screen wi th a still image captured by the camera in your device, select Menu > Tools > Settings and Phone > Call > Image in video call . To end the video call, press the end key. Video sharing Use video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is active wh en you activate vi deo sharing. If you do not want t o use th e loudspeaker for the voice call while you sh are video, you can a lso use a compat ible headset. Warning: Continuous exposure to high volume ma y damage your hearing. L isten to mus ic at a mod erate level, and do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Video sharing requirements Video sharing requir es a UMTS connection. Your ability to use video sharing depends on the availabi lity of the UMTS network. For more information on the service, UMTS 108 Make calls
network availability, an d fees associated with using this service, contact your service provider. To use video sharing, ensure the following: ⢠Your device is set up for person-to-person connections. ⢠You have an active UMT S connection and are within UMTS network coverage. If y ou move outside the UMTS network during a video sharing session, the sharing stops while your voice call continues. ⢠Both the sender and recipient are registered to the UMTS network. If you invi te someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network coverage or does not have video sharing installed or person-to-pers on connections set up, the recipient does not receive invitations. You receiv e an error message that indicates that the recipient cannot accept the in vitation . Video sharing settings To adjust video shar ing settings, select Menu > Tools > Settings and Connection > Video sharing . To set up video sharing, yo u need person-to-person and UMTS connection settin g s. Person-to-pe rson connection s ettings A person-to-person connection is also known as a session initiation protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use video sharing. Contact your serv ice provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them to your device. Your service provider may send you the settings or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a cont act: 1 Select Menu > Con tacts . 2 Select the contact, or create a new contact. 3 Select Options > Edit . 4 Select Options > Add detail > Share video . 5 Enter the SIP address in the format username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know the SIP ad dress for the contact, you can use the phone number of the recipient, including the country code, to s hare video (if supported by the network service provider). UMTS connection settings To set up your UMTS connection: ⢠Contact your service provider to establish an agreement for you to use the UMTS network. ⢠Ensure that the UMTS acce ss point connection settings for your device are configured properly. For more information about the settings, contact your service provider. Share live video or video clips During an active voice call, select Options > Share video . 1 To share live video during the call, select Live video . To share a video clip, select Vi deo clip and the clip you want to sh are. You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able t o share it . If your device not ifies you 109 Make calls
tha t t he vi de o c li p m us t b e co nv er te d, sel ec t OK . Your device must have a video editor for the conversion to work. 2 If the recipient ha s several SIP addres ses or phone numbers including the coun try code saved in the contacts list, select the desired address or n umber. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipient is not available, enter the addres s or number of the recipient including the country code, and select OK to send the invitation. Your device sends th e invitation to the SIP addres s. Sharing begins automatically when the recipient accepts the invitation. Options during video sharing Zoom the video (availab le for sender only). Adjust the brightness (available for sender only). or Mute or unmute the microphone. or Turn the loudspe a ker on and off. or Pause and resume video sharing. Switch to full screen mode (available for receiver only). 3 To end the sharing sessi on, select Stop . To end the voice call, press the end ke y. When you end the call, video sharing also ends. To save the live video you share d, select Yes when prompted. The device notifies you of the location of the saved video. If you access other applicat ions while you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paused. To return to the video sharing view, and to contin ue sharing, in the standby mode , select Options > Continue . Accept an invitat ion When someone sends you a vi deo sharing invitation, the invitation message displays the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to silent, it rings when you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a s hare invitation and you are not within UMTS network coverage, you will not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following: Yes â Accept th e invitation, and ac tivate the sharing session. No â Reject the invi tation. The sender receives a message that you rejected the in vitat ion. You can a lso press the end key to reject the invitation and end the voice call. To mute the video on your device, select Opt ions > Mute . To play the video at th e original volume, select Options > Original vo lume . This does not affect the audio playback of the other party of the phone call. To end the sharing sess ion, select Sto p . To end the voice call, press the end key. When you end the call, also video sharing ends. 110 Make calls
Log The log stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed a nd received calls only if the ne twork supports these functions, the device is switched on, and within the network service area. Recent calls Select Menu > Applications > Log and Recent calls . To view missed, received, and dialled calls, select Miss ed calls , Received calls or Dia lled numbers . Tip: To open the dialled numbers list in the home screen, press the call key. Tip: To open the dialled numbers list in the home screen, press the call key. Select Options and from the following: Save to Contacts â Save the highlighted phone number from a recent calls li st to your contacts. Clear list â Clear the selected recent calls list. Delete â Clear a hi ghlighted ev ent in the s elected list. Log durati on â Select the time how long the communication information is saved in the log. If you select No log , no information is saved in the log. Call duration Select Menu > Applications > Log . To view the approximate duration of your last call, dialled and received calls, select Call duration . Note: The actual invoice for ca lls and services from your service provider may vary , depending on network features, rounding off for bi lling, taxes, and so forth. Packet data Select Menu > Applications > Log . To check the amount of data sent or received during packet data connections, select Packet data > All sent data or All received data . To clear both sent and re ceived information, select Options > Clear counters . You need the lock code to clear the information. Monitor all communication even ts Select Menu > Applications > Log . To open the general log wher e you can monit or all voice calls, text message s, or data and wireless LAN connec tions registered by the device, select the general log tab . Subevents, such as a tex t me ssage sent in more than one part and packet data connections, are logged as one communication even t. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre , or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To view how much data was transferred a nd how long a certain packet data connection lasted, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by Pack. , and select Options > View . 111 Make calls
To copy a phone number from the log to the clipboard, and paste it into a text mess age, for example, select Options > Use number > Copy . To filter the log, select Options > Filter and a filter. 112 Make calls
Internet calls About interne t calls With the internet call servic e (network service), you can make and receive calls over th e internet. Internet calls can be established between computers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional telephone. To be able to use the service, you must subscribe to the service, and have a user account. To make or receive an intern et call, you must be in the service area of a wireless LA N, and connected to an internet call service. Activate internet calls Select Menu > Contacts and an internet call service. To make or receive internet calls, contact your service provider to receive the intern et call connection settings. To connect to an internet call service, your device must be in a network service area. To activate your intern et call service, select Options > Activate s ervice . To search for available wire less LAN (WLA N) connections, select Options > Search for WLAN . Make internet calls When you have activated th e internet call feature, you can make an internet call from all applications where you can make a regular voice call, such as the cont acts list or log. For example, in the contacts list, scroll to the desired contact, and select Options > Call > Internet call . To make an internet call in the active s tandby, enter the phone number or internet address, and s elect Net call . 1 To make an internet call to an internet address that does not start with a digit, press any number key when the device is in the active standby, t hen press # for a few seconds to clear the display and to switch from number mode to letter mode. 2 Enter the internet addres s, and press t he call key. Blocked contacts Select Menu > Contacts . Scroll left, and select the internet calls service from the list. Blocked contacts are prevented from seeing your online status. To see your blocked contacts, select Options > View blocked list . To add a contact to your blocked contacts list, scroll to the contact, and select Options > Bl ock contacts . To unblock a contact, scroll to the contact, and select Options > Unblock . When you unblock a contact, you allow the contact to see your online status. Manage internet call services Select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > Net setti ngs . 113 Internet calls
To add a new internet call service, select Download . Internet call se ttings Select Menu > Contacts . Scroll left, and select the internet calls service from the list. To view or edit internet call settings, select Opt ions > Settings and from the following: Service conne ctivity â Select the desti nation settings for internet call connectivity, and edit destination details. To change a destination, scro ll to the service, and select Change . Availability requests â Se lect whether to automatically accept all incoming pres ence requests without a confirmation query. Service i nformation â View technica l information abo ut the selected service. 114 Internet calls
Contacts (pho nebook) In Contacts, you can save a nd update contact information, such as phone numbers, ho me addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail image to a contact card. You can al so create contact groups, which allow y ou to send text messages or e-mail to many recip ients at the same ti me. Save and edit names and nu mbers 1 To add a new contact to t he contacts list, select Options > Ne w contact . 2 Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . To edit contacts , select a contact and Option s > Edit . Manage names and numbe rs To delete a contact card, select a card, and press C . To delete several contact cards at the same time, select Options > Mark/Unmark to mark the desired contact cards, and pres s C to delete. To send contact inform ati on, select a card, Options > Send business card , and the desired option. To listen to the voice ta g assigned to the contact, s elect a contact card and Opti ons > Voice tag details > Play voice tag . Default numbers and addresses You can assign defau lt numbers or addresses t o a contact. If a contact has se veral numbers or address es, you can easily call or send a messa ge to a certain number or address. The default number is also used in voice dialling. 1 In the contacts list, s elect a contact. 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want t o add a number or an address, and select Ass ign . 4 Select a number or an address you want t o set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the contact view. Ringing tones, images, and call te xt for contacts You can define a ring ing tone for a contac t or group, and an image an d a call text for a con tact. When the contact calls you, the device plays th e selected ringing tone and shows the call text or image (if the callerâÂÂs phone number is sent with the call and y o ur device recognises it). To define a ringing ton e for a contact or a contact group, select the contact or contact group and Optio ns > Ringing tone , and a ringing tone. To define a call text for a co ntact, s elect the contac t and Options > Add text for call . Enter the call text, and se lect OK . To add an imag e for a contact saved in the dev ice memory, select the contact, Options > Add image , and an image from Photos. To remove the ringing to ne, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. 115 Contacts (phonebook)
To view, change or remove the image from a contact, select the contact, Options > Image , and the desired option. Copy contacts When you open the contacts list for the fi rst time, the device asks if you want to copy names and numbers from the SIM card to your device. To start copying, select OK . If you do not want to copy the conta cts from the SIM card to your device, select Cancel . The device asks if you want to view the SIM card contacts in the contacts directory. To view the contacts, select OK . The contacts list opens, and the names stored on your SIM card are indicated with . SIM services For availability and informa tion on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vend or . This may be the service provider or other vendor. SIM contacts To add the names and numbers stored on the SIM card to the contacts list in Contacts, select Options > Sett ings > Contacts to display > SIM memory . You can add and edit SIM contacts, or ca ll them. The numbers you save in Contacts a re not automatically saved to your SIM card. To save numbers to the SIM card, in Contacts, select a contact and Options > Copy > SIM memory . Fixed dialling Select Menu > Contacts and Options > SIM numbers > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling servic e, you can rest rict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM cards support the fixed dialling se rvice. For more information, contact your service provider. When security featur es that restrict ca lls are in use (such as call barring, closed us er gr oup, and fixed dialling), calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Call barring and call diverting cannot be acti ve at the same time. You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. Cont act your service provider for your PIN2 code. Select Options and from the following: Activate fi xed dialling â Activate the fixed dialing. Deactivate fixed dialling â Deactivate the fixed dialing. New SIM contact â Enter the contact name and phone number to which calls are allowed. Add from Contacts â Copy a contact from the list of contacts to the fixed dialling list. To send text messages to the SIM contacts whi le the fixed dialling service is active, you need to add the text message centre number to the fixed dialling list. 116 Contacts (phonebook)
Manage contact groups Create contact groups 1 In Contacts, scroll right to open the groups list . 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name, and select OK . 4 Select the group and Options > Add members . 5 Scroll to a cont act, and press th e scroll key to mark each contact you wa nt to add. 6 Select OK . To rename a group, select Options > Rename , enter th e new name, and select OK . Remove members from a grou p 1 In the groups list, select the grou p you want to modify. 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options > Remove from group . 3 To remove the contact from the group, select Ye s . 117 Contacts (phonebook)
Personalise your device You can personalise your devi ce by changing the standby mode, main menu, ton es, themes, o r font size. Most of the personalisation option s, such as changi ng the font size, can be accessed through the device settings . Change t he look of your device Select Menu > T ools > Settings and Settin gs > General > Personalisation > Themes . Use Themes to change the look of the display, such as the wallpaper and icons. To change the theme that is used for all the applications in your device, select General . To preview a theme before activating it, select Options > Preview . To activate t he theme, select Options > Set . The act ive theme is indicated by . The themes on a compatible me mory card (if inserted) are indicated by . The themes on the memory card are not available if the memory card is not inserted in the device. If you want to use the them es saved in the memory card without the memory card, sav e the themes in the device memory or mass memory fi rst. To change the layout of the main menu, select Menu view . To have a wallpaper im age or a slide show of changing images as the background in the standby mode, select Wallpaper > Image or Slide show . To change the background of the call bubble shown when a call comes in, select Call image . Audio them es Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings > General > Personalisatio n > Themes and Audio th eme . In Audio themes, you can select a sound scheme such as 'Space' to cover all device ev ents, su ch as calling, battery low, and mech anical events. The so unds can be t ones, synthesised voice tags, or a combination of both. Select Active audio th eme and the sound scheme you want to use as th e active audio theme. Acti vating an audio theme changes a ll your previous sound s ettings. To return to using the default sounds, select the 'Nokia ' audio theme. To change the sounds for de vice events, select a device event group, for example, Menu ev ents . To add 3-D effects to th e audio theme, select Options > 3-D ringing tone s . 118 Personalise your device
To change the lang uage that is us ed for the synt hesised voice tag, select Optio ns > Set Speech language . If you have changed the sounds of device events, to save the theme, select Options > Save theme . Set sounds f or events To disable the sound of a devi ce event, select the device event group, the device event, and Silent . To set a synthesise d voice tag as the sound for a device event, select the device event group, the device event, and Speech . Enter the desired text, and select OK . This option is not available if you have selected Say caller's name in Profiles. Set tones Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and General > Personalisation > Profiles . To modify a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Person alise . To set ringing tones, select Ringing tone and a ri nging tone. To select a bookmark and open a connection to a web page to download more tones, select Download sounds (network service). To set other tones, such as key tones and wa rning tones, select the desired sett ing. If you want the callerâÂÂs name t o be spoken when your device rings, select Options > Personalise > Say caller's name > On . The callerâÂÂs name mu st be found in the contacts list. 3-D tones Select Menu > Tools > 3-D ringing tone s . With 3-D tones, you can enable three-dimensional sound effects for ringing tones. No t all ringing tones support 3- D effects. To enable the 3-D effects, select 3-D ring ing tone effects > On . To change the ringing t one, select Ringing tone and the desired ringing tone. To change the 3-D effect tha t is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the effect, select from the following settings: Trajectory speed â Scro ll left or ri ght to adjust the speed at which sound moves from on e direction to another. This setting is not available for a ll ringing tones. Reverberation â Select the type of echo. Doppler effect â Select On to have the ringing tone sound higher when you are closer to your device, and lower when you are farther aw ay. When you get closer to the device, the ringing tone seems to become higher, and lower when you move away from it. This setting is not available for all ringing tones. 119 Personalise your device
To listen to the ringing tone with th e 3-D effect, select Options > Play tone . If you enable t he 3-D to nes but do no t select any 3-D effect, stereo widening is applied to the ringing t one. To adjust the ringing tone volume, select Tools > Profiles > Options > Personalise > Ringing volume . Modify t he standby mode To change th e look of th e standby mod e, select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and General > Personalisation > Standby mode . The active standby display shows application sh ortcuts, and events from applications su ch as calendar, e-mail, and music player. To change the selection ke y shortcuts or the default shortcut icons in the acti ve standby mode, select Tools > Settings > General > Person alisation > Standby mode > Shortcuts . To change the clock shown in the standby mode, select Menu > Applicatio ns > Clock and Options > Settings > Clock type . You can also change th e standby mo de background imag e or what is shown in the power saver in the de vice settings . Tip: To check whether there ar e applications running in the background, press and hold the menu key.To close the applications you do not use, scroll to an application in the list, and press C . Leaving applications runni ng in the background increases the demand on battery power. Modify the main menu To change the ma in menu vi ew, in the main menu, select Menu > Tools > Se ttings an d General > Personalisatio n > Themes > Menu vie w . You can change the main men u to be shown as Grid , List , Horseshoe , or V-shaped . To rearrange the main menu , in the main menu, select Options > Move , Move to folder , or New folder . Y ou can move applications used less frequently into folders and place applications th at you use more often into the main menu. 120 Personalise your device
Time management Clock Alarm clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . To view your active and inacti ve alarms, open the alarms tab. To set a new ala rm, select Options > New alarm . Define the repetition, if need ed. When an alarm is active, is displayed. To turn off the sounding alarm, select Stop . To st op the alarm for a certain tim e period, select Snooze . If your device is switched o ff when an alarm is due, your device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. Tip: To define the time period af ter which the alarm sounds again when you s e t it to snooze, select Options > Sett ings > Alarm snooze time . To cancel an alarm, select Options > Remove alarm . To change the time, dat e, and clock type settings, select Options > Sett ings . World clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . To view the time in different locations, open the world clock tab. To add locations to the list, select Options > Add location . You can add a maximum of 15 locations to the list. To set your curren t location, scroll to a location, and select Options > Set as current locat ion . The location is displayed in the clock main view, and the time in your device is changed according to the selected location. Ensure that the time is correct and matches your time zone. Clock settings Select Options > Settings . To change the time or date , select Time or Date . To change the clock sh own on the home screen, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone network to update the time, date, and time zone informati on to your device (network service), select Autom atic time update > On . To change the alarm tone, select Clock alarm tone . Calendar To open the calendar, select Menu > Calendar . Calendar views To switch between month, week, and to-do note view, select Options > Month view , Week view , or To-do view . 121 Time manag ement
To change the starting day of the week, the view that is shown when you open the calendar, or the calendar alarm settings, select Options > Settings . To go to a certain date, se lect Options > Go to date . To go to today, press # . Create a calendar entry 1 To add a new calendar entry, scroll to the desired date, select Option s > New entry and from the following: Meeting â Add a reminder of your meeting. Meeting request â Create and send a new meeting request. You must h ave a mailbox se t up for send ing requests. Memo â Write a general note for the day. Anniversary â Add a reminder of birthdays or spec ial dates (entries are repeated annually). To-do â Add a reminder of a task that must be done by a specific date. 2 To add a description to an entry, select Op tions > Add descriptio n . 3 To save the entry, select Done . Tip: In the day, week, or month calendar view, press a key (0-9). An appointment entry op ens, and the char acters you enter are added to the subject field. In the to-do view, a to-do note entry opens. When the calendar alarm sounds, select Silence to mute the alarm. To stop the calen dar alarm, select Stop . To set the alarm to snooze, select Snooze . To define the period after which the calendar alarm sounds again when set to snooze, select Options > Settings > Alarm snooze time . Manage calendar entries To delete several events at a time, open the month view, and select Opt ions > Delete entry > Before date or All entries . To mark a task as completed in the to-do view, select the task and Options > Mark as done . To send a calendar note to a compatible device, select Options > Send . If the other device is not compatible with Coordin ated Universal Time (U TC), the ti me information of received calendar entries may not be displayed correctly. 122 Time manag ement
Office File manage r Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . About File m anager Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . With File manager, you can browse, manage, and open files. The available options may vary. To map or delete drives, or to define settings for a compatible remote driv e connected to your device , select Options > Remote drives . Find and organise files Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . To find a file, select Optio ns > Find . Enter a search term that matches the file name. To move and copy files and folders, or to create new folders, select Options > Organise . Shortcut: To apply actions to mult iple items at once, mark the items. To mark or unmark items, press # . Manage a memory card Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . These options are available on ly if a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. Select Options and from the following: Memory card options â Rename or format a memory card. Memory card password â Password protect a memory card. Unlock memory card â Unlock a memory card. Back up files to a memory card Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . To back up files to a memory card, select the file types you want to back up, and Options > Back up phone memory . Ensure that your memo ry card has enough free memory for the files that yo u have chosen to back up. Format mass memory When mass memory is reformatted, all data in the memory i s p er ma n en tl y l os t. Ba c k u p data you want to keep before formatting the mass memory . You can use Nokia Ovi Suite or Nokia Nseries PC Suite to back up data to a compatible PC. Digital rig hts managemen t technolo gies (DRM) may prevent some backup data from being restored. Contact your service provider for more information about DRM used for your cont ent. To format mass memory, select Option s > Format mass memory . Do not format the mass memory u sing PC software because it may ca use degraded performance. 123 Office
Formatting does not guarantee that all confi dential data stored in the device ma ss memory is permanently destroyed. Standard formattin g only marks the formatted area as available spa ce and deletes the address to find the files again. The reco very of formatted or even overwritten data may still be possible wi th special recovery tools and software. About Quickoffice Select Menu > A pplications > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quickword for viewing Microsoft Word documents, Quicksheet for viewing Microsoft Excel worksheets, Quickpoint for Microsoft PowerPoint presentations, and Quickm anager for purchasing software. You can view Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003 documents (D OC, XLS, a nd PPT file formats) with Quickoffice. If you have the ed itor version of Quickoffice, you can also edit files. Not all file formats or features are supported. Currency converter Select Menu > A pplications > Office > Co nverter . Select Type > Currency . Before you can make currency conversions, you must select a base currency and add exchange rates. The default base currency is Home. The rate of the base currency is always 1. 1 Select Options > Currency rates . 2 The default na me for the cu rrency items is Foreign. To rename a currency, select Options > Rename currency . 3 Add the exchange rates for the currencies, and select Done . 4 In the other Unit field, select the currency to which you want to convert . 5 In the first Amount field, enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field shows the converted value automatically. To change the base currency, select Options > Currency rates , a currency and Options > Set as base currency . When you change base curr ency, you must enter new exchange rates because all pr eviously set excha nge rates are cleared. Calculator Make calculations Select Menu > A pplications > Office > Cal culator . This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, en ter the first number of the calculation. To remove a number wit h the keypad, press C . Select a function such as add or subtract. Enter the second number of the calculation, and select = . Save calculations To save the results of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . The saved res ult replaces the previously stored result in the memory. 124 Office
To retrieve the results of a calculation from the memory and use them in a c alculation, select Options > Memory > Recall . To view the last saved result , select Optio ns > Last result . Exiting the Calculator application or switching off the device does not clear th e memory. You can recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application. Zip manager Select Menu > Applications > Office > Zip . With Zip manager, you can create new archive files to s tore compressed ZIP formatted file s; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archive password for protected archives; and change settings, su ch as comp ression level, and file name encoding. You can save the archi ve files in the device memory or on a memory card. Notes Select Menu > Applications > Office > Notes . You can creat e and send notes to other compatible devices, and save received plain text files (TXT file format) to Notes . To write a note, start enteri ng the text. The note editor opens automatically. To open a note, select Open . To send a note to other compatible devices, select Options > Send . To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings for a note, select Options > Synchronis ation . Select Start to initialise synchronisation or Set tings to define the synchronisation settings for the note. Adobe Reader Select Menu > Applications > Office > Adobe PDF . With Adobe Reader, you can re ad PDF documents with your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; an d send PDF files using e-mail. 125 Office
Applications RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can play video clips or stream media files over th e air witho ut saving them to the devi ce first. RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. When playback is active, in the landscape view, use the media keys to control the player. Play video cl ips Select Menu > A pplications > RealPlayer . To play a video clip, select Video clips , and a clip. To list recently played files, in the application main view, select Recently played . In the list of video clips, scroll to a clip, select Options and from the following: Use video clip â As sign a video to a contact or set it as a ringing tone. Mark/Unmark â Mark items in the list to send or delete multiple items at the same time. View details â View details of the selected item, such as format, resolution, and duration. Settings â Edit settings for vid eo playback and streaming. Stream content ov er the air In RealPlayer, you can only open an RTS P link. However, RealPlayer pl ays a RAM file if you open an HTTP link to it in a browser. Select Menu > A pplications > RealPlayer . To stream content over the air (network service), select Streaming links and a link. You can als o receive a streaming link in a text me ssage or multim edia message, or open a link on a web page. Before live content begins streaming, your device connects to the site and starts loading the content. The content is not saved in your device. RealPlayer settings Select Menu > A pplications > RealPlayer . You may receive RealPlayer se ttings in a sp ecial message from your service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. To select the settings for the video, select Options > Settings > Video . To select whether to use a proxy server, to change the default access poin t, and to set the port range used when connecting , select Optio ns > Settings > Streaming . For the correct settings, contact your s ervice provider. 1 To edit the advanced settings, select Options > Settings > Streaming > Networ k > Options > Advanced sett ings . 126 Applications
2 To select the bandwidth used for a network type, select the networ k type and the desired value. To edit the bandwidth yourself, select User defined . Application manager With Application mana ger, you can see the software packages installed in your de vice. You can view details of installed applications, remo ve applications, and define installation settings. Select Menu > Applications > App. mgr. . You can install two types of applications and software to your devi ce: ⢠J2ME applicati ons based on Java⢠t echnology with the .jad or .jar file extensions ⢠Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system wi th the .sis or .sisx fi le extensions Only install software specifica lly designed for your device: Nokia N86 8MPNokia N86 8MPNokia N86 8MP. Software providers will often refer to the official model number of this product: N86-1N86-3N86. Install applicatio ns and software You can transfer installation files to your device from a compatible computer, dow nload them during browsing, or receive them in a multim edia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using other co nnectivity methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity. You can use Nokia Ap plication Installer in Nokia Ovi Su ite to install an applicat ion to your device. Icons in Application manager indicate the following: .sis or .sisx application Java application application not fully installed application installed in the mass memory application installed on the memory card Important: Only install and use applications and other software from tru sted source s, such as applic ations that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified testing. Before installation, note the following: ⢠To view the application ty pe, version number, an d the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View details . To display the security certificate details of the application, select Details: > Certificates: > View details . ⢠If you install a file that con tains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you have the original installation file or a full backup copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install the application again from the original ins tallation file or the backup copy. The JAR file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. When you are 127 Applications
downloading the JAR file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obta in these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. To install an application or software, do the following: 1 To locate an installation file, select Menu > Settings and App. mgr. . Alternativ ely, search installation files using File manager, or select Messaging > Inbox , and open a message that contains a n installation file. 2 In Application ma nager, select Opti ons > Install . In other applications, select the installation file to start the installation . During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the inst allation. If you install an application without a digital signature or certification, the device di splays a warning. Continue installation only if you ar e sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an ins talled application, select the application. If the application does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Installat ions folder in the main menu. To see which software packag es are installed or removed and when, select Optio ns > View log . Importa nt: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the devi ce to stop functioning. After you install application s to a compati ble memory card, installation files (.sis, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory a nd prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia Ovi Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, then use the file mana ger to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment, delet e the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applicat io ns and software Select Menu > A pplications > App. mgr. . Scroll to a software package, and select Options > Uninstall . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you ha ve the original software packag e or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to op en documents created with that software. If another software packag e depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. For more information, see the documentation of the inst alled software package. Application manager settings Select Menu > A pplications > App. mgr. . Select Options > Settings and from the following: Software installa tion â Select whether Symbian software that has no verifi ed digital signature can be installed. 128 Applications
Online certificate check â Check the o nline certificates before installing an application. Default web address â Set the default address used when checking onli ne certificates. Some Java applications ma y require that a message be sent or a network connection be made to a specific access point to download extra data or components. Recorder Select Menu > Applications > Recorder . With the Recorder application, you can record voice memos and telephone conversations. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. To record a sound clip, select . To stop recording a sound clip, select . To listen to the sound clip, select . To select the recording qualit y or where you want to save your sound clips, se lect Optio ns > Settings . Recorded sound clips are saved in the Sound clips folder in Gallery. To record a telephone conver sation, open recorder during a voice call, and select . Both parties hear a tone at regular intervals during recording. Speech Select Menu > Applications > Speech . With Speech, you can set the langua ge, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. To set the language for the message reader, s elect Language . To download additional languages to your device, select Options > Download languages . Tip: When you download a new lang uage, you must download at least one voice for that langua ge. To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice depends on the selected language. To set the speakin g rate, select Spee d . To set the speakin g volume, select Volume . To view details of a voice, open the voice tab, and select the voice and Option s > Voice details . To listen to a voice, select the voice and Options > Play voice . To delete languages or vo ices, select the item and Options > Delete . Message reader settings To change the message rea der settings, open the Settings tab, and define the following: Language detection â Activate automatic reading language detect ion. 129 Applications
Continuous reading â Activate continuous readin g of all selected messages. Speech prompts â Set the message reader to insert prompts in messages. Audio source â Listen to message s through the earpiece or louds peake r. Licences To view digital rights licences, select Menu > Applications > Licen ces . Digital righ ts management Content owners may use differe nt types of digital righ ts management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual property, includ ing copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM- protected content. With this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask that such DRM softwa re's ability to access new DRM-protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prev ent renewal of such DRM- protected content already in your device. Revocati on of such DRM so ftware does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM- protected content. Digital rights mana gement (DRM) protected content comes wi th an associat ed acti vation key that define s your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protected content, to back up both the activation keys a nd the content, use the backup feature of Nokia Ovi Sui te. If your device has WMDRM-protected content, both the activation keys and the con tent will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You ma y also lose the activation keys and the content if the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the activati on keys or the content may limit your ability to use the same con tent on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activation keys may be con nected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. In the main view, select from the following: Valid lic ences â View licences that are connected to media files or whose validity period has not begun. Invalid li cences â View licences that are not valid; the time period for using the media file is exceeded or ther e is a protected media file in the device but no connected activation key. Not in use â View licences that have no media files connected to them in the device. To buy more usage time for a media file, select an invalid licence and Options > Get new licence (web service messages must be enabled). 130 Applications
Settings Some settings may be preset fo r the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. General settings In general settings, you can edit the general se ttings of your device or restore the device to original default settings. You can adjust time and da te settings also in the clock. Personalisation settings Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and General > Personalisation . You can edit settings related to the display, standby mode, and general functions of your device. Themes allows you to change the look of the display. Voice commands opens the settings for the Voice commands application. Tones allows you to change the tones of the calendar, clock, and currently active profile. Display Light sensor â Scro ll left or righ t to adjust the light sensor that observ es the lighting conditi ons and adjusts the brightness of the display. The light sensor ma y cause the display to flicker in low light. Font size â Adjust the size of the text and icons on the display. Power save r time- out â S e l e c t t h e t i m e - o u t p e r i o d a f t e r which the power saver is activated. Welcome note / logo â The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time yo u switch on the device. Select Default to use the default image, Text to write a welcome note, or Image to select an image from Photos. Light time-out â Select a time-out after which the backlight of the di spla y is switched off. Standby mode Shortcuts â Assign shortcuts to the selection keys to be used in the standby mode and select which applications are shown in the active toolbar. If the active standby is set off, you can assign keypad shortcuts for the different presses of the scroll key. Change Menu view â S e l e c t Horizontal icon bar to view a horizontal toolbar and the content from different applications on the screen. Select Vertical icon bar to view a vertical toolbar on the screen. The content from different applications is hidden. To display the content, in the standby mode , select a shortcut and press the scroll key right. Select Ba sic to switch off active toolbar. Operator logo â This setting is only available if you have received and saved an operator l ogo. Select Off if you do not want the lo go to be shown. Language Changing the settings for th e phone language or writing language affects ever y application in your device until you change these settings ag ain. Phone language â Change the language of the display text in your device. This also affects the format used for 131 Settings
date and time and the sep arators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language according to the information on you r SIM card. After you change t he language, the device restarts. Writing l anguage â Change the writing langua ge. This affects the characters available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Predictive text â Set predictive text input on or off for all editors in the device. The predictive text dictionary is not available fo r all languages. Accessories settings Select Menu > T ools > Settings and General > Enhancemen t . Some enhancement connectors indicate which type of enhancement is connected to the device. The available settings depend on th e type of enhancement. Select an enhancement and from the following: Default profil e â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certain compatible enhancement to your device. Automati c answer â Select whet her you wa nt the device to answer an incomi ng call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic ans wer is disabled. Lights â Set whether lights rema in on after the time-out. TV-out settings To change the settings for a TV-out connection, sele ct TV- Out and from the following: Default profil e â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a Noki a Video Connectivity Cable to your device. TV screen size â Select the aspect ratio of the TV: Normal or Widescreen for widescreen TVs. TV system â Select t he analogue video signal sys tem that is compatible with your TV. Flicker filter â To improve image quality on the screen of your TV , sele ct On . The flicker filter may not diminish image flicker on all TV screens. Slide handling sett ings Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings and General > Slid e handli ng . Select from the following: Opening the sli de â Set the device to answer an incoming call when you open the slide. Closing the slide â Set the device to end an active call when you close the slide. Keyguar d activation â Se t the device to lock the keypad when you close the slide. Sensor settin gs and display rotation When you activate the sensors in your device, y ou can control certain funct ions by turning the device. Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings and General > Sensor settings . Select from the following: Sensors â Activat e the sensors. 132 Settings
Turning control â Selec t Silencing calls and Snoozing alarms to mute calls and snooze alarms by turning your device so that the displa y faces down. Security settin gs Phone and SIM Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and General > Security > Phone and SIM card and from the following: PIN code request â When active, the code is requested each time the device is swit ched on. Deactivating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code , PIN2 co de , and Lock code â You can change the PIN code, PIN2 code, and lock code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . If you forget the PIN or the PI N2 code, contact your service provider. If you forget th e lock code, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. Keypad autolock period â Select whether the keypad is locked when your device has been idle for a certain period of time. Phone autol ock period â To avoid un au thorised use, you can set a time-out a fter which the device automatically locks. A locked device cannot be used until the correct lock code is ente red. To turn off the autolock period, select None . Tip: To lock the device manually , press the power key. A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone . Lock if SIM card changed â You can set the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device mai ntains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Closed user group â You can specify a group of people to whom you c an call and who can call you (network service). Confirm SIM servi ces â You can set the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). Certifica te managemen t Select Menu > Tools > Settings an d General > Security > Certificate ma nagement . Digital certificates do not guarantee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. In the certificate management main view, you can see a list of authority certificates th at are stored in your device. Scroll right to see a list of pers onal certificates, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that invo lve transferri ng co nfidential information. The y s ho ul d a ls o b e us ed if yo u w an t t o r edu ce th e r isk of viruses or other mali cious so ftware and be sure of the authenticity of softw are wh en downloading and installing software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connecti ons and software instal lation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased se curity. The existence of a 133 Settings
certificate does not offer an y protection by itself; t he certificate manager must contai n correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased se curity to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check th at the current date and time in your device are correct. View certificate detailsâÂÂcheck auth enticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the va lidity period of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the corre ct security certificate in your devic e. To check certificate details, sc roll to a certificate, and select Options > Certificate details . The validity of th e certificate is checked, and on e of the following notes may be displayed: Certificate not truste d â You have not set any application to use the certificate. Expired certificate â The certificate validity period has ended. Certificate not vali d yet â The certificate validity period has not yet begun. Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Change the trus t settings Before changing any certific ate settings , you mus t make sure that you really trust the owner of t he certificate and that the certificate really belongs to th e listed owner. Scroll to an authority certificate, a nd select Options > Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the se lected certificate is shown. For example: Symbian installatio n : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. Internet : Yes â The certificate is able to certify servers. App. installation : Ye s â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java⢠application. Select Options > Edit trus t setting to change the value. Security module Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings and General > Security > Security module . T o v ie w o r e d i t a s e cu r i t y m o d u le (if available), scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information about a security module, scroll to it, and select Options > Security details . 134 Settings
Restore origina l settings Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and General > Factory settings . You can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. After resetting, th e device may take a longer time to p ower on. Documents and fi les are unaffected. Positioning se ttings Select Menu > Applications > Landma rks and Positioning se ttings . Position ing meth ods Integrated GPS â Use the integrated GPS receiver of your device. Assisted GPS â Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS) to receive assistance data from a n assistance data se rver. Bluetooth GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectivi ty. Network based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). Position ing server To define an access point, an d positioning server for A-GPS, select Positioning se rver . The positioning server may be preset by your service provider, and you may not be able to edit the settings . Notation settings To select wh ich meas urement sys tem you wa nt to use for speeds and distan ces, select Measurement system > Metric or Imperial . To define in which format the coordinate information is shown in your device, select Coordinate format , and the desired format. Phone settin gs In phone settings, you can edit settings related to phone calls and network. Call settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings an d Phone > Call . Send my caller ID â You can set your phone number t o be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the p erson to whom you are calling , or th e value may be set by your service provider when you make a subscription ( Set by network ) (network service). Send my internet call ID â You ca n set your internet caller ID to be displayed to or hidden from the person to whom you are calling. Call waitin g â To be alerted for incoming calls (network service) while you ar e in a call, select Activate . To check whether the function is activat ed, select Check status . Internet call waiting â T o b e n o t i f i e d o f a n e w i n c o m i n g internet call while you have a call in progress, select Activated . 135 Settings
Internet call alert â To be alerted for incoming internet calls, select On . If yo u select Off , you are not alerted, but you receive a notification if you missed a ca ll. Reject call with message â To send a text message to a caller informing why you coul d not answer the call, select Yes . Message text â W r it e a t ex t t o b e s en t in a t e xt me ss ag e when you reject a call. Image in vide o call â If video is not sent during a video call, you can select a still im age to be displayed instead. Automatic redial â Select On , and your device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attemp t. To stop automatic redialling , press the end key. Show call duration â Activate this sett ing if you want the length of a call to be displayed during the call. Summary after call â Activ ate this s etting if yo u want the length of a call to be displayed after the call. Speed dial â S elect On , and the n umbers assigned to the number keys (2 to 9) can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See " Speed dial a phone number " , p. 106. Anykey an swer â Select On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pres sing any keypad key, except the power key, selection keys, zoom/volume key, or capture ke y. Line in us e â This setting (network service) is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irresp ec tive of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you are not able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Line ch ange â To prevent line selection (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this settin g, you need the PIN2 code. Call divert Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings and Phone > Call divert . Call divert allows you to divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone nu mber. For details, contact your service provider. To activate call divert, select Activate . To check whether the option is active, select Check status . Several diverting options can be active at the s ame time. When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings and Phone > Call barring . Call ba rring (network s ervice ) allows you to re strict the calls that you make or re ceive with the device. For example, you can restrict a ll o utgoing internat ional calls or incoming calls when you are abroad. To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. 136 Settings
Voice call barring Select the desired barring option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Deactivate ), or check whether the option is active ( Check status ). Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Internet call barring To select whether anonymous calls are allowed from the internet, set Anonymou s call barrin g on or off. Network settings Your device can automatica lly switch between the GSM and UMTS networks . The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and Phone > Netw ork and from the following: Network mode â Select which network to use. If you select Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or UMTS network automatically , according to the ne twork parameters and the roamin g agreements between the wireless service providers. For details and roaming cost s, contact your network service provider. This option is shown only if supported by th e wireless service provider. A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Operator selectio n â Select Automatic to set the device to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the ne twork from a list. If the connection to the manually se lected netwo rk is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. The selected network mu st have a roaming agreement with your home cellular network. Cell info display â Set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network ba sed on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to acti vate cell info reception. Connection settings In connection settings, you can edit access points and other connectivity settings. Data connections and access points Your device supports packet data connections (network service), such as GPRS in th e GSM network. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the sa me time, and access points can share a data connection. In t he UMTS network, data connections remain ac tive during voice calls. You can also use a WLA N data connecti on. Only one connection in one wireless LAN can be active at a time, but several applic ations can us e the same internet access point. To establish a data connecti o n, an access point is requ ired. You can define different kinds of access points, such as th e following: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages 137 Settings
⢠Internet access point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access poin t you need with your service provider for the service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your service provider. Access points Create a new access point Select Menu > T ools > Settings and Connection > Destinations . You may receive access point settings in a message from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. When you select one of the access point groups ( , , , , ), you can see the access point types: indicates a protected access point indicates a packet data acces s point indicates a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point Tip: You can create internet acce ss points in a WLAN with the WLAN wizard. To create a new access point, select Access point . The device asks to c heck for available connections. After the search, connections th at are already available are displayed and can be shared by a new access p oint. If you skip this step, you are asked to select a connection method and to define the settings needed. To edit the settings of an a ccess point, select one of the access point groups, scroll to a n access point, and se lect Edit . Use the instructions provided by your service provider to edit the following: Connection name â Enter a name for the connection. Data bearer â Select the data connection type. Depending on the data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be d efined or with a red * . Other fields can be left empty, unless your service provider has instructed otherwis e. To use a data connection, your service provider m ust support this feature, and if n ecessary, activate it for your SIM card. Create access point groups Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings and Connection > Destinations . Some applications allow you t o use access point groups to connect to a network. To avoid selecting which acce ss point to use every time the device attempts to connect to a network, you can create a grou p that contain s various access points, and define the order in which the acces s points are used to connect to a network. For exampl e, you can add wireless L AN (WLAN) and pa cket data access points to an in te rnet access point group and use the group for browsing th e web. If you give the WLAN access point the higher priority, the device connects to the 138 Settings
internet throu gh a WLAN if available and throug h a packet data connection if not. To create a new access point group, select Options > Manage > New de stination . To add access points to an access point group, select the group and Options > New access po int . To copy an existing access point from another group, select the group, scroll to an existing access point, and select Options > Organise > Copy to othe r dest. . To change the priority order of access points within a group, scroll to an access point and Optio ns > Organise > Change priority . Packet data access points Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the display. Or, open one of the access point groups, select an access point m arked with , and select Edit . Use the instructions provided by your service provider to edit the following: Access point name â The access poin t name is provided by your service provider. User name â The user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by your service provider. Prompt password â If you want to set the device to ask for a password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes . Password â A password may be needed to make a da ta connection and is usually provided by your service provider. Authentication â Select Secure to always send you r password encrypted or Normal to se nd your password encrypted when possible. Homepage â Depending on the access point type you are setting up, enter the web a ddress or the address of the multimedia message centre. Use access point â Select After conf irmation to set the device to ask for confirmation before the connection using this access point is created, or Automatically to set the device to connec t to the des tin ation using this access point automatic ally. Select Options > Advanced sett ings and from the following: Network typ e â Select the internet protocol type to transfer data to and from y our device. The other se ttings depend on the selected network type. Phone IP address (for IPv4 o nly) â Enter the IP address of your device. DNS addresses â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. To obtain these addres ses, contact your internet service provider. Proxy server addr ess â Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy port number â E n t e r t h e p o r t n u m b e r o f t h e p r o x y server. 139 Settings
WLAN internet ac cess points Select Menu > T ools > Settings and Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the display. Or, open one of the access point groups, select an access point marked with , and select Edit . Use the instructions provided by your service provider to edit the following: WLAN network name â Select Ent er manually or Search for networks . If you select an exist ing network, WLAN network mode and WLAN security mod e are determined by the settings of its access point device. Network s tatus â Define whether the netw ork name is displayed . WLAN network mode â Select Ad-hoc to create an a d hoc network, and to allow devices to send and receiv e data directly; a WLAN ac cess point device is not needed. In an ad hoc network, all devices must use the s ame WLAN network name. WLAN security mo de â Select the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA/WPA2 . If you select Open n etwork , no encryption is used. The WEP, 802.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. Use access point â S e l e c t After confirmati on to s et the device to ask for confirmation before the connection using this access point is created or Automatically to set th e device to connect to the destin ation using this access point automatica lly. To enter th e settings for the se lected security mode, select WLAN security se ttings . Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: IPv4 setti ngs â Enter the IP addres s of your device, the subnet IP address, the de fault gateway, and the IP addresses of the primary and seconda ry DNS servers. Contact your internet service provider for these addresses. IPv6 setti ngs â Define the type of DNS address. Ad-hoc channel (only for ad hoc n etworks) â To enter a channel number (1-11) manually, select User define d . Proxy server addr ess â Enter the address for the proxy server. Proxy port numb er â Enter the proxy port number. Packet data settings Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings and Connection > Packet dat a . The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. Packet data connect ion â If you select When available and you are in a network tha t supports packet data, the device registers to the packet data network. Starting an active packet data connection (for example, to send and receive e-mail) is qu icker. If there is no packet data coverage, the device per iodically tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When needed , the device uses a packet data connection on ly if you start an application or action that needs it. Access point â The access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data modem to a compatible compute r. 140 Settings
High speed packet acces s â Enable or disable the use of HSD PA (netwo rk serv ic e) in UMTS networks. Wireless LAN s ettings Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and Connection > Wireless LAN . Show WLAN availabi lity â Select whether is displayed in the standby mo de when a wireless LAN is available. Scan for networks â If you set Show WLAN availability to Yes , se lect how often the device searches for available wireless LANs and upda tes the indicator. To view advanced settin gs, select Optio ns > Adva nced settings . Changing wireless LAN advanced settings is not recommended. SIP settings Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and Connection > SIP settings . Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) settings are needed for certain network services usin g SIP. You may receive the settings in a sp ecial text message from your service provider. You can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings. Configurations Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and Connection > Configurations . You may receive tr usted server settings from your service provider in a configuration me ssage. Yo u can save v iew or delete these settings in configurations. Access point name control Select Menu > Tools > Settings an d Connection > APN control . With the access point name control service, you can restrict packet data connect ions and allow your device to use only certain packet data access points. This set ting is only avail able if y our SI M card s uppor ts the access point control serv ice. To set the control service on or off or to change the allowed access points, select Option s and the correspondin g option. To change the options, you need your PIN2 code. Contact your service provider for the code. Application settings To edit the settings of some of the applications in your device, select Menu > Tool s > Settings and Applications . To edit the settings, you ca n also select Op tions > Settings in each application. Remote configuration Select Menu > Tools > Device mgr. . With Device ma nager, you c an manage s ettings, data, and software on your device remotely. 141 Settings
You can connect to a server, and receive configuration settings for your device. You may receive server profiles and different configurat ion settings from your serv ice providers or company information management department. Configurat ion settings may include connection and other settings used by different applications in your device. The available options may vary. The remote configuration connection is usually started by the server when the device se ttings need to be updated. To create a new server profile, select Options > Server profiles > Options > New se rver profile . You may receive these settings from your service provider in a configuration message. If not , define the following: Server name â Enter a name for the configuration server. Server ID â Enter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. Server pass word â Enter a password to identify your device to the server. Access point â Select the access point to use for the connection, or create a ne w access point. You can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start a connection. This setting is available only if you have selected Internet as the bearer type. Host address â Enter the web ad dress of the configuration server. Port â Enter the port number of the server. User nam e and Passwor d â Enter your user ID and password for the co nfiguration server. Allow configuratio n â Se lec t Ye s to allow the server to initiate a configuration sessi on. Auto-accept all requests â S e l e c t Yes if yo u do not want the server to ask for your confirmation when it initiates a configuration session. Network authe ntication â Select whether to use http authentication. Network us er name and Ne twork password â Enter your user ID and password for the http authenticatio n. This setting is available only if you have selected Network authentication to be used. To connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device, select Options > Start configuration . To view the configuration log of the selected profile, select Options > View log . To update the device software over the air, select Options > Check for updates . The update does not erase your settings. When you re ceive th e update package on your device, follow the instru ctions on the display. Your device is restarted once th e installation is complete. Downloading software updates may involve t he transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device battery has enough power, or connect the charger before starting the upda te. 142 Settings
Warning: If you install a software upda te, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls , until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. Be sure to back up data before accepting ins tallation of an update. 143 Settings
Troubleshooting To view frequently asked qu estions about your device, visit th e product s upport pag es at www.ns eries.com/ support . Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for ex ample, a commercial internet service provider (ISP) or network service provider. Q: How do I close an ap plication that is not responding? A: Press and hold the menu key. To close an application, scroll to it, and press C . Pressing C does not close Music player. To close music player, select it from the list, and Options > Exit . Q: Why do images l ook smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, di scoloured, or bri ght dots app ear on the screen ev ery time I tur n on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. S ome displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Q: Why can't my device establish a GPS conne ction? A: Find more information about GPS, GPS receiver, satellite signals, and location inform ation in this user guide. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my frien dâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth connectivity? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have a ctivated Bluetooth connectivity, a nd are not in hidden mode. Check also that the distance between the tw o devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I e nd a Bluetoot h connection? A: If another device is conn ected to your device, you can end the connection from the other device or deactivate Bluetooth connectivit y in your device. Select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > Bluetoot h and Bluetoot h > Off . 144 Troubleshooting
Q: Why canâÂÂt the other device see the files stored on my device in the home network? A: Make sure that you have configu red the home network settings, content sharin g is turned on in your device, a nd the other device is UPnP compat ible. Q: What can I do if m y home network connection sto ps working ? A: Switch off the wireless LAN (WLAN) connection from your compatible PC and your device, and switch it on again. If this does no t help, restart your com patible PC and your device. If the connec tion still does not work, reconfigure the WLAN settings in both your compatible PC and device. Q: Why can't I see my compatible PC in my device in the home network? A: If you are using a firewall application in your compatible PC, check that it allows home media server t o use the external connection (you ca n add Home media server to the firewall application 's exceptions list). Check from the firewall settings that the fire wall application allows traffic to the following ports: 1900, 49152, 49153, and 49154. Some WLAN access point devi ces have a built-in firewall. In such cases, check that th e firewall in the access point device does not block traffic to the following ports: 1900, 49152, 49153, and 49154 . Check that the WLAN settings are the same in your device and compatible PC. Q: Why can't I see a w ireless LAN (WLAN) acce ss point even though I know I'm withi n its range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can only access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know the co rrect SSID, and have created a WLAN internet access poin t for the network on your Nokia device. Q: How do I switch wire less LAN (WLAN) off on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when you are not connected or trying to conn ect to another access point, or not scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can speci fy that your Nokia device does not sca n, or scans less often, for available networks in the ba ckground. WLAN switches off in between background scans. To change the backg round scan settings: 1 Select Menu > Too ls > Se ttings and Connection > Wireless LAN . 2 To increase the background scan time int erval, adjust the time in Scan for networks . To stop background scans, select Show WLAN availability > Never . 3 To save your changes, pres s Back . When Show WLAN availability is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not shown in the standby mode. However, you can still manually scan for available WLAN networks, and connect to WLAN networks as usual. 145 Troubleshooting
Q: How can I save my data before deleti ng it? A: To save da ta, use Nokia Ovi Suite or Nokia Nseries PC Suite to synchronise with or to ma k e a b ac k - up c op y of a ll data to a compatible comp uter.You can also send da ta using Bluetooth connectivity to a compatible device.You can also store data on a compatible memory card. Q: What do I do if the me mory is full? A: Delete item s from the dev ice memory or mass memo ry. If your device displays the note No t enough memo ry to perform ope ration. Delete some data f irst. or Memory l o w . De l e t e s o m e d a t a f r o m ph o n e m e m o ry . when you are deleting several items at the same time, delete items one by one, beginning wi th the smallest items. Q: Why canâÂÂt I sel ect a contact for my message? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, an address, or an e-ma il address. Select Menu > Contacts , the relevant contact, and edit the conta ct card. Q: How can I end the dat a connection w hen the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia me ssage centre . To stop the device from making a data connection , select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Multimedia retrieval and Manual to have the multimedia messaging ce ntre save messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when you have a new message in the multimedi a message centre. If you select Off , the device does not make any network connections related to multimedia messaging. To set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application o r action that needs it, select Menu > Tools > Se ttings an d Connection > Packet data > Packe t data connection > When ne eded . If this does not help, switch the device off, and swi tch it on again. Q: Why do I have problems connecting the device to my PC? A: Ensure that you have the late st version of Nokia Ovi Suite or Nokia Nseries P C Suite an d that it is installed and running on your compatible PC. For further information on how to use Nokia Ovi Suite or Nokia Nseries PC Suite, see the application help or visit the Nokia support pages. Q: Can I use my device as a fax modem with a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your device as a fax modem. However, with call diverting (network se rvice), you can divert incoming fax calls to a fax number. 146 Troubleshooting
Green tips Here are tips on how you can co ntribute to protect ing the environment. Save energy When you have fully charged the battery and disconnected the charger from the device, unplug the charge r from the wall outlet. You do not need t o charge your battery so often if you do the following: ⢠Close and disable applic ations, services, and connections when not in use. ⢠Decrease the brightness of the screen. ⢠Set the device to enter the power saver mode after the minimum period of inactivity, if available in your device. ⢠Disable unnecessary soun ds, such as keypad and ringing tones. Recycle Most of the materials in a Nokia phone are recyclable. Check how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia.com/werecycle, or with a mobile device, www.nokia.mobi/werecy cle. Recycle packaging and user guid es at your local recycling scheme. Save paper This user guide helps you get started with your device. For more detailed instructions, open the in-device help (in most applications, select Options > Help ). For further support, see www.nokia.com/support. Learn more For more information on the environmental attributes of your device, see www.nokia.com/ecodeclaration. 147 Green tips
Accessories Warning : Use only batter ies, chargers, and accessori es approved by Nokia f o r use with this particular model. The use o f any other types may invalidate any approval or wa rranty, and may be dangerous. I n particular, use of unappro ved chargers or batterie s may present a risk of fi re, explosio n, leakage, or ot her hazard. For availability of approved accesso ries, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not t he cord. Battery Battery and charge r information Yo u r d ev i ce is p ow e re d b y a r ec h ar ge a bl e ba tt e ry . Th e b a tt er y in t en de d fo r u se wi t h this device is B L-5K. Nokia may make a dditional batter y models availab le for this device. This device is intended for use wh en supplied with power fro m the following chargers: AC-10. The exact charger m ode l number may vary depending o n the type of plug. The plug variant is identified by one of the following: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, K, or UB. The battery can be charged and d ischarged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When t he talk and stand by times are noticea bly shorter than norma l, replace the battery. U se only Nokia approved batteries, and recha rge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a battery is being used for the fir st time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged perio d, it may be necessary to connect the charger, then di sconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. If th e battery is c ompletely discharge d, it may take several minutes before th e charging indi cator appears on the display or before any calls c an be made. Safe removal. Al ways switch the device off and di sconnect the charg er before removing the battery. Proper chargi ng. Unplug th e charger fro m the electrical plug and the d evice when not in use. Do not leave a ful ly charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifet ime. If le ft unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge o ver time. Avoid extreme tempe ratures. Always tr y to keep the battery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extreme temper atures re duce the c apacity a nd life time of th e battery . A device with a hot or cold batt ery may not work tem porarily . Batter y performance is pa rticularly limite d in temperatures we ll below freezing. Do not short-circuit . Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connectio n of the positive ( ) and negative (-) termin als of the battery. (These lo ok lik e metal st rips on the battery. ) This migh t happen, for example, when you carry a spar e battery in y our pocket or purs e. Short- circuiting the termi nals may damage the battery or the connec ting objec t. Disposal. Do not dispose of batt eries in a fire as they may explode. Dispose of batteri es according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispos e as household waste. Leak. Do not dismantle, cut, open, crush, bend, punctur e, or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a batter y leak, prevent batter y l i qu i d c on t ac t wi th sk i n o r ey e s. If t hi s happens, flush the aff ected areas immediately with water, or seek medical help. Damage. Do not mo dify, remanufacture, at tempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, or i mmerse or expo se it to wat er or other li quids. Batte ries may explode i f damaged. Correct use. Us e the battery only for i ts intended p urpose. Impro per battery u se may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and you b elieve the battery has been damaged, take it to a service cent re for inspection before continuing to use it. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. K eep your batter y out of the reac h of small children. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getti ng an original Noki a battery, purcha se it from a Nokia authorised serv ice centre or dealer, and inspect the hologram label using the following steps: 148 Accessories
Authenticate hologram 1 W hen you look at the hol ogram on the label, you sho uld see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking fro m another angle. 2 When yo u angle the hologram l eft, right, down and up, you should se e 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each si de respectively. Successf ul compl etion of the st eps is not a total ass urance of the auth entici ty of the battery. If you cannot c onfirm authenticity or if you have any reason to believe that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the lab el is not an authentic Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to t he nearest Nokia authorised service centre or dealer fo r assistance. To find out more a bout original Nokia bat teries, see www.nokia.com/battery. Taking care of your device Your device is a product of superior design and crafts manship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you p rotect your warrant y coverage. ⢠Keep the devi ce dry. Prec ipitation, hum idity, and all typ es of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will cor rode el ectronic circu its. If y our devi ce does get wet, rem ove the battery, a nd allow the device to dry c ompletely before replacin g it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dust y, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic compone nts can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hig h or cold temper ature. High temperatures ca n shorten the life of electronic de vices, damage b atteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. When the device warms to its normal temperature from a cold temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boar ds. ⢠Do not attempt to open the devic e other than as instructed in t his guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can bre ak internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or str ong detergents to clean the device. Only use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean t he surface of the device. ⢠Do not paint th e device. Paint can clog the moving parts and pr event proper operation. ⢠Use only th e supplie d or an approv ed replacement antenna. Unauthorised antennas, modificatio ns, or attachments could d amage the device and may violate regulations governing radi o devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Backup all data you want to keep, s uch as contacts and calendar note s. ⢠To reset the d evice from time t o time for optimum performance, power off the device and remove the battery. These suggestions appl y equally to your device, battery, charger, or any accessory. Recycle Always return your used electronic prod ucts, batteries, and packaging materials to dedicate d colle ction p oints. This wa y you help p revent uncon trolled wa ste dis posal and promote the recycling of materials. Chec k product environme ntal informatio n and how to recycle your Nokia products at www.no kia.com/werecycle, or nokia.mobi/werecycle. 149 Taking care of your device
The crossed-out wheeled-b in symbol on your pro duct, battery, literature, or packaging reminds you that all electrical and elec tronic products, batteries, and accumul ators m ust be ta ken to se parate co llection at the end of their workin g life. This requirement applies in the European Union. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For mo re enviro nmental information, s ee the product Eco - Declarations at www.nokia.com/environment . Additional safety information Small children Your device and its access ories are not toys. They may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reac h of small child ren. Operating environment Th is d evi ce me ets RF exp os ure gu ide li nes in the no rma l u se p osi ti on a t th e e ar o r at least 1.5 centimetres (5/8 inch) away from the body. Any carry case, belt clip, or hol der for body-worn operation should not contai n metal and should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. To send data files o r messages requir es a quality connectio n to the network. Data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Foll ow the separation distance inst ructions until the transmissi on is completed. Parts of the d evice are magnetic. Meta llic materials may be attracted to the devi ce. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic sto rage media near the device , because information stored on them may be eras ed. Medical devices Operation of radio tr ansmitting equipment, including wireless phones , may interfere with the function of inadequa tely protecte d medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of t he medical device to determine whether they are ade quately shielded from exte rnal RF energy. Switch off yo ur device when regulat ions posted instruct you to do so. Hospitals or heal th care facilities may use equipment sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices reco mm end a minimum separation of 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) betwee n a wireless device and an implant ed medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverte r defibrillator, to avoid potential interference wi th the medical device . Persons who have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimetres (6 i nches) from the medical d evice. ⢠Not carry the wireless d evice in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wirel ess device to the ear opposite the medical d evice. ⢠Turn th e wireles s device off if there is any rea son to sus pect tha t interf erence is taking place. ⢠Follow the manufacturer dire ctions for the implanted medica l device. If you have any quest ions about using your wireless device with an impla nted medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearing ai ds Some digital wireless dev ices may interfere with some hearing aids. Vehicles RF signals may affect i mproperly insta lle d or inadequately shield ed electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electr onic fuel inject ion, elect ronic antilo ck braking, electronic speed contr ol, and air bag systems. For mo re information, check with the manufacturer of your vehicle or its equipment. Only qualified personnel shou ld service the device or install the d evice in a vehicle. Faulty installatio n or service may b e da ngerous and may invalidate yo ur warranty. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mount ed and operating pr operly. Do not s tore or carry flammable l iquids, gase s, or explosive materi als in the sam e com partme nt as the de vice , its parts , or acc essori es. Reme mber that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place your device o r accessories in the air bag depl oyment area. Switch off your device before boarding an ai rcraft. The use of wireless t eledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of t he aircraft and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your d evice in any area w ith a potential ly explosive atmos p here. Obey all posted instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause a n explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at serv ice stati ons. O bserv e restri ctions i n fuel de pots, storag e, and distribution area s; chemical plants; or whe re blasting operatio ns are in progress. Areas with a po tentially expl osive atmosphere ar e often, but no t always, clearl y marked. They include areas wher e you would be advised to turn off your vehicle 150 Additional safety information
engine , below de ck on boat s, chem ical tran sfer or storage facili ties and wh ere th e air contains chemicals or part icles such as grain, dust, or m etal powders. You should check with the manufacturers o f vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such a s propane or b utane) to deter mine if this devi ce can be safely used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-progra mmed functions. If your device suppo rts voice calls over the internet (i nternet calls), activate both the internet ca lls and the cell ular phon e. The device may at tempt to make emer gency calls over b oth the cellula r networks and through your internet call provider if both are activated. Connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wir eless dev ice for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If t he device is not on, switch it on . Check for adequate signal strength. Depending on your device, y ou may al so need to complete th e following: ⢠Insert a S IM card if you r device use s one. ⢠Remove certain call restrictions yo u have activated in your device. ⢠Change your profile fro m Offline or Flight profile to an active profile. 2 P ress the end key as many times as need ed to clear the d isplay and ready the device for call s. 3 Ente r the official emergency number for your present location. Em ergency number s vary by l ocation. 4 P ress the call key. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as a ccurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communicat ion at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification info rmation (SAR) This mobile device meets guidelines for exposure to radio waves. Your mobi le devic e is a radio tr ansmitte r and rece iver. It i s designed not to exce ed the limit s for exposu re to radio wa ves recom mended by in ternati onal guide lines. These guideli nes were develope d by the independ ent scientific organisatio n ICNIRP and include s afety margins designed to assure the prot ection of all persons , regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines fo r mobile devices employ a unit of measurement k nown as the Speci fic Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR l imit stated in the ICNIRP gu idelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W /kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SA R are conducted using stan dard operating positi ons with the device transmitt ing at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The a ctual SAR level of an operating device can be below the maximum value because the device is d esigned to use only the power required to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a numbe r of factors such as ho w close you are to a net work base station . The highest SAR value unde r the ICNIRP gui delines for use of t he device at the ear is 0.76 W/kg. Use of device accessories may result in different SAR va lues. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting a nd testing requiremen ts and the network band. Additional SAR information may be pr ovided under product information at www.nokia.com. 151 Additional safety information
Index A access codes 19 access points 138 â groups 138 accessories See enhancements accessories settings 132 active standby mode 120, 131 active toolbar 31 â in camera 29 â in Photos 38 address book See contacts alarm â calendar note 121, 122 alarm clock 121 albums â media 39 anniversary notes 122 answering calls 105 antennas 15 application manager 127 applications 127 assisted GPS (A-GPS) 68 attachments 96 audio message s 95 audio themes 118 auto-update for time/date 121 B backing up device memory 123 backlight time-out 131 battery â charging 13 â power saver setting 131 â saving power 19 birthday notes 122 blogs 53 Bluetooth â authorising devices 48 â pairing 48 â passcode 48 â receiving data 47 â security 49 â sending data 47 Bluetooth connectivit y â blocking devices 49 bookmarks 54 brightness, display 131 browser 52 â bookmarks 54 â browsing pages 52, 53 â cache memory 55 â downloads 54 â searching conte nt 54 â security 55 â settings 56 â toolbar 52 â widgets 54 C cable 50 cache memory 55 calculator 124 calendar 121 calendar entry â deleting 122 â sending 122 call log 111 call waiting 106 calls 104 â answering 105 â conference 105 â dialled 111 â duration of 111 â internet calls 113 â missed 111 â options during 104 â received 111 â rejecting 105 â restricting See fixed dialling â settings 135 â voice mail 105 camera â colour 35 â flash 31 â image quality 35 â imaging mode 29 â indicators 28 â lighting 35 â location information 30 152 Index
â options 31 â scenes 32 â self-timer 33 â sequence mode 32 â settings 35 â video mode 34 â video quality 36 certificates 133 character encoding 94 charging the battery 13 chatting 26 clipboard, copying to 94 Clock â settings 121 clock 120, 121 compass 72 computer connections 50 See also data connections conference calls 105 configuration See settings connection manager 46 connection methods â Bluetooth 47 â data cable 50 contacts â copying 116 â default information 115 â deleting 115 â editing 115 â groups 117 â images in 115 â names and numbers 115 â ringing tones 115 â saving 115 â sending 115 â synchronising 50 â voice tags 115 Contacts on Ovi 26 content â synchronising, sending, and retrieving 21 converter 124 copying text to clipboard 94 copyright protection 130 currency â converter 124 D data connections â PC connectivity 50 â synchronisation 50 date and time 121 declining calls 105 device manager 141 dialled numbers 111 dismissing calls 105 display rotation 132 display settings 131 DLNA 81 downloads 54 DRM (digital rights management) 130 duration of calls 111 E e-mail â accounts 99 â adding attachments 98 â deleting 99 â disconnecting 99 â downloading attachments 98 â folders 99 â readin g 98 â searching 99 â sending 97 â set-up 97 â settings 99, 101 end all calls option 106 F factory settings, restoring 135 feeds, news 53 file manager 123 fixed dialling 116 FM transmitter 66 â playing songs 66 â settings 67 font settings 131 G gallery 43 â presentations 43 â sound clips 43 â streaming links 43 games 88 general information 17 153 Index
GPS â position requests 70 GPS (global positioning system) 68 grid view of menus 120 H headset 14 help application 17 home network 6 5 â copying files 8 3 â sharing content 82 HSDPA (high-speed downlink packet access) 25 I images â editing 41 inbox â message 96 inbox, message 96 indicators and icons 2 2 installing applications 127 internet call services â managing 113 internet calls 113 â activating 113 â blocking contacts 113 â making 113 â settings 114 internet connection 52 See also browser internet radio â favourites 59 â listening 58 â searching for stations 59 â settings 60 â station directory 59 J J2ME Java application support 127 Java scripts/applications 127 K keyguard 133 keypad 133 L landmarks 70 language settings 131 licences 130 light settings 131 list view of menus 120 location information 68 lock code 13, 19 locking â keypad 133 loudspeaker 24 M main menu 120 Maps 72 â compass 72 maps â browsing 73 â collections 75 â driving 76 â favourites 75 â finding locations 74 â indicators 73 â internet settings 78 â navigating 75 â network positioning 72 â Nokia Map Loader 80 â routes 74, 79 â saving locations 75 â sending locations 75 â settings 78 , 79 â traffic information 77 â updating 79 â walking 76 media â music player 63 â RealPlayer 126 meeting notes 122 meeting requests â receiving 98 meetings â setting up 122 memo notes See to-do no tes memory â clearing 20 â web cache 55 154 Index
message reader 96 â sele cting voic e 129 messages â folders for 93 â icon for incoming 96 â multimedia 96 â settings 100 Mini Map 53 MMS (multimedia message service) 95, 96 multimedia 43 multimedia messages 95, 96 music player 63 â playlists 64 â transferring music 66 muting soun d 105 my numbers 115 N N-Gage 88 â settings 91 N-Gage views 88 navigation tools 68 network settings 137 news feeds 53 Nokia Ma p Loader 80 Nokia Maps Updater 79 Nokia support information 17 notes 125 O offline profile 24 operator logo 131 options menu for calls 104 outbox, message 93 Ovi 27 Ovi Files 27 Ovi Store 26 P packet data connection â access point settings 139 â counters 111 â settings 140 page overview 53 pairing â device s 48 â passcode 48 PDF reader 125 personal certificates 133 personalisation 118, 131 phone setup 21 phonebook See contacts photographs See camera Photos â active toolbar 34 photos â file de tails 38 â organisi ng files 38 â red-eye 41 â tags 39 â toolbar 38 â viewing 37 PIN code 19 pin code 13 PIN2 code 19 playing â messages 96 podcasting â direct ories 61 â downloads 62 â playing 62 â searching 61 â settings 60 positioning information 68 positioning settings 135 power saver 131 predictive text input 93 presentations 43 presentations, multimedia 96 profiles â offline restrictions 24 proxy settings 139 PUK codes 19 punctuation, te xt entry 94 R radio â listening 57 â settings 57 â stations 57 RealPlayer 126 recording video clips 3 4 red-eye removal 41 155 Index
redial feature 136 reject ing calls 105 remote co nfiguratio n 141 ringing tones 119 roami ng 137 S scenes, image and video 32 screen settings 131 security â Bluetooth 49 â certificates 133 â web browser 55 security code 19 security module 134 self-timer, camera 33 sending â using Bluetooth 47 sensors 132 sent messa ges folder 93 service messages 96 settings â access point name contro l 141 â access points 138 â applications 141 â call barring 1 36 â call divert 136 â calls 135 â camera 35 â certificates 133 â clock 121 â configuration 141 â display 131 â FM radio 57 â FM transmitter 67 â home network 81 â internet calls 114 â internet radio 60 â language 131 â maps 79 â network 137 â packet data 140 â packet data access points 139 â personalisation 131 â podcasting 60 â positioning 135 â SIP 141 â slide 132 â standby 131 â tv-out 132 â video centre 87 â video sharing 109 â web browser 56 â WLAN 140, 141 â WLAN internet access points 140 shared video 108 shooting modes, camera 32 signature, digital 134 SIM card â messages 99 SIM card security 133 SIP 141 slide settings 132 slide show 39 SMS (short mes sage service) 95 software â updating 18 software applications 127 software updates 17 songs 63 sound clips 43 sounds 118 speaker phone 24 special characters, tex t entry 94 speech 129 speed dialling 106 standby mode 120, 131 streaming links 43 support resources 17 Symbian applications 127 synchronisation of data 50 T text â predictive input 93 text entry 93 text messages â receiving and reading 96 â replying to 96 â sending 95 â settings 100 â SIM messages 99 themes 118 time and date 121 156 Index
time zone settings 121 time-out for backlight 131 to-do no tes 1 22 tones 119 â ring settings 119 â settings 131 toolbar 29 transferring cont ent 21 troubleshooting 144 trust settings 134 TV configuration 132 tv-out mode 40 U unlocking keypad 133 updates â device software 17 UPIN code 19 UPUK code 19 USB charging 13 USB data cable 50 useful information 17 V video c alls 10 7, 10 8 â options during 108 Video Centre 85 video centre â downloading 85 â my videos 86 â transferring videos 86 â video feeds 86 â viewing 85 video clips â shared 108 video settings 36 video sharing â accepting invitation 110 â requirements 108 â sharing live video 109 â sharing video clips 109 voice calls See calls voice commands 106 See also voice dialling voice dialling 106 voice mail â calling 105 â changing number 105 volume controls 24 W wallpaper 118 web connection 52 web logs 53 week settings â calendar alarm 121 welcome note 131 widgets 54 wireless LAN settings 141 WLAN â access points 46 â availability 46 â MAC addr ess 45 WLAN wizard 46 world clock 121 wrist strap 15 Z Zip manager 125 zooming 30, 34 157 Index
é 2009 Nokia. All rights reserved. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-484 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other r elevant provisions of D irective 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declarati on of Conformity can be found at ht tp://www.nokia.com / phones/declaration_of_conformity/. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nserie s, N86, N-Gage, Nokia Original Accessories logo, and Ovi are trad emarks or registered t r ademarks of Nokia Corp oration. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Noki a Corporation. Other pro duct and company names mentioned herein ma y be trademarks or tradenames of the ir respective owner s. Reprodu ction, tra nsfer, dis tributio n, or storage of part or al l of the con tents i n this document in any form wi thout the pr ior written permission of Nokia is prohibited . Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. No kia reserves the right t o make changes and improv ements to any of the products describ ed in thi s documen t without prior no tice. This product includes software licensed from Sy mbian Software Ltd é1998-2009. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Sy mbian Ltd. Java and all Java-b ased marks are trad emarks or registered tr ademarks of Sun Micros ystems , Inc. Portions of the Nokia Maps software ar e é1996-2009 The FreeType Project. Al l rights reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in conne ction with information which has been encoded in co mpliance with th e MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer enga ged in a perso nal and nonco mmerci al acti vity an d (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video pr ovider. No lice nse is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information, including that related to promotional, internal, and commercial uses, may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http:// www.mpegla.co m. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL , CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. The third-party applicat ions provided with your device ma y have been created and may be owned by persons or entiti es not affiliat ed with or relat ed to Nokia. Nokia does not own the cop yrights or intell ectual p roperty rights to the third -party applications. As such, Nokia does not take any responsibility for end-user support, functionality of the applications, or t he i nformation in the applicat ions or these materials. Nokia does not provid e any warranty fo r the third-part y applications. BY USING THE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE APPLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPR ESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED B Y APPLICABLE LAW. YOU FURT HER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FI TNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR THAT TH E APPLICATIONS WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGHTS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, B UT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMP LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. Reverse engineering of software in the device i s prohibited to t he extent permitte d by appl icable law. Inso far as thi s user g uide con tains an y limit ations on Nokia 's representations, warr anties, damages and liabilities, such limitati ons shall likewise limit any representa tions, warranties, dama ges and liabiliti es of Nokia's licensors. The availability of particular products and applications and services for these products may vary by r egion. Please check with your No kia dealer for details and availability of language op tions. This device may contain commo dities, technology or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Diversion co ntrary to l aw is pro hibited.
FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTIC E Your device may cause T V or radio inter ference (for ex ample, when us ing a telephone in close pr oximity to re ceiving equipment ). The FCC or Industry Can ada can requ ire you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local se rvice facility. This devi ce complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operatio n is subject to the foll owing two conditions : (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device mus t accept any interference received, includi ng interferenc e that may cause und esired opera tion. Any changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by Nokia could void the user's authority t o operate this equipment. /Issue 2 EN
Contents Safety 7 About your device 7 Network services 8 Shared memory 9 ActiveSync 9 Magnets and magnetic fields 9 Get start ed 10 Keys and parts (front and top) 10 Keys and parts (back and sides) 10 Short slide keys 11 Kickstand 11 Insert SIM card and battery 11 Memory card 12 Switch the device on and off 13 Charge the battery 13 Headset 14 Attach wrist s trap 15 Antenna locations 15 Find help 17 In-device help 17 Support 17 Additional applications 17 Update device software 17 Settings 18 Access codes 19 Prolong battery life 19 Free memory 20 Your dev ice 21 Phone setup 21 Nokia Switch 21 Display indicators 22 Shortcuts 23 Mobile Search 24 Volume and loudspeaker control 24 Offline profile 24 Fast downloading 25 Ovi 26 About Ovi Store 26 Ovi Contacts 26 Ovi Files 27 Camera 28 About the camera 28 Activate the camera 28 Image captu re 28 Video recording 34 Camera settings 35 Photos 37 About Photos 37 View images and videos 37 View and edit file details 38 Organise images a nd videos 38 Active toolbar 38 Albums 39 Tags 39 Slide show 39 TV-out mode 40 Edit images 41 2 Contents
Edit videos 41 Gallery 43 About Gallery 43 Main view 43 Sound clips 43 Streaming links 43 Presentations 43 Connectivity 45 Wireless LAN 45 Connection manager 46 Bluetooth 47 Data cable 50 PC connections 50 Sync 50 Browser 52 About Browser 52 Browse t he web 52 Browser toolbar 52 Navigate pages 53 Web fee ds and b logs 53 Widget s 54 Content search 54 Download and purchase items 54 Bookma rks 54 Empty the cache 55 End the connection 55 Connection security 55 Web settin gs 56 Music 57 FM radio 57 Nokia Music Store 58 Nokia Internet Radio 58 Nokia Podcasting 60 Music player 63 FM transmitter 66 Position ing (GPS) 68 About GPS 68 Assisted GPS (A -GPS) 68 Hold your device correctly 69 Tips on creating a GPS connection 69 Position requests 70 Landmarks 70 GPS data 70 Nokia Maps 72 About Maps 72 Network positioning 72 Compass 72 Move on a map 73 Display indicators 73 Find locations 74 Plan rout es 74 Save and send locations 75 View your saved items 75 Navigate to the destinat ion 75 Walk to your destination 76 Drive to your destination 76 Traffic and safety 77 Maps settings 78 Internet settin gs 78 Navigation settings 78 3 Contents
Route se ttings 79 Map setti ngs 7 9 Update maps 79 Nokia Map Loader 8 0 Home network 81 About home network 81 Settings for home network 81 Activate sh aring and define cont ent 82 View and share media files 8 2 Copy media files 83 Important security information 83 Nokia Video Cen tre 85 View and download video clips 85 Video feeds 86 My videos 86 Transfer videos from your PC 86 Video centre settings 87 N-Gage 88 About N-Gage 88 N-Gage views 88 Get starte d 88 Play and manage games 89 Edit profile details 90 Connect with other players 90 N-Gage settings 91 Messaging 93 Messaging main view 93 Write text 93 Write and send message s 95 Messaging inbox 96 Message reader 96 E-mail 97 View messages on a SIM card 99 Messaging settings 100 Make calls 104 Voice calls 104 Options during a call 104 Voice mail 105 Answer or decline a call 105 Make a conference call 105 Speed dial a phone number 106 Call waiting 106 Voice dialling 106 Make a video call 107 During a video call 108 Answer or decline a video call 108 Video sharing 108 Log 111 Internet calls 113 About internet calls 113 Activate inter net calls 113 Make internet calls 113 Blocked contacts 113 Manage internet call services 113 Internet call sett ings 114 Contact s (phonebo ok) 115 Save and edit names and numbers 115 Manage names and numbers 115 Default num bers and address es 115 4 Contents
Ringing tones, images, and call text for contacts 115 Copy contacts 116 SIM services 116 Manage contact group s 117 Personalise your de vice 118 Change the look of your device 118 Audio themes 118 Set tones 119 3-D tones 119 Modify the standby mode 120 Modify the main menu 120 Time management 121 Clock 121 Calendar 121 Office 123 File manager 123 About Quickoffice 124 Currency converter 124 Calculator 124 Zip manager 125 Notes 125 Adobe Reader 125 Applications 126 RealPlayer 126 Application manager 127 Recorder 129 Speech 129 Licences 130 Settings 131 General settings 131 Phone settings 135 Connection settings 137 Application settings 141 Remote configuration 141 Troubleshoot ing 144 Green tips 147 Save energy 147 Recycle 147 Save paper 147 Learn more 147 Accessories 14 8 Battery 148 Battery and charger information 148 Nokia battery authenticati on guidelines 148 Taking care of your device 149 Recycle 149 Additional safet y information 150 Small children 150 Operating environment 150 Medical devices 150 Vehicles 150 Potentially explosive environments 150 Emergency calls 151 Certification information (SAR) 151 5 Contents
Index 152 6 Contents
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAF ELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COM ES FIRST Obey all local laws. Alwa ys keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, which coul d affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN RESTRICTED ARE AS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical equipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting areas. GLASS PARTS The front cover of the de vice is made of glass. This glass can break if the device is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If the glass breaks, do not touch the glass parts of the device or attempt to remove the broken glass from the device. Stop using the device until the glass is replaced by qualified service personnel. QUALIFIE D SERVIC E Only qualified personne l may install or repair this product. ACCESSORIES AN D BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible produ cts. WATER-RESI STANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. Note: The surface of this device does not contain nickel in the platings. The surface of this device contains stain less steel. About your de vice The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800,1900, and UMTS 900, 7 Safety
1900, 2100 networks. Contact your service p rovider for more information about networks. When using the features in this devi ce, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights . Copyright protection may pr event some images, music, and other content from being copied, modified, or transferred. Your device supports sev eral methods of con nectivity. Like computers, your device may be exposed to viruses and other harmful content. Exercise caution with messages, connectivity requests, browsing, and downloa ds. Only install and use services and other software from trustworthy sources that offer ade quate security and protection against harmful so ftware, such as applications that are Sy mbian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Consider insta lling antivirus an d other security software on your device and any connected com puter. Importa nt: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the devi ce to stop function ing. Your device may have preins talled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites. You may also access other third- party sites through your device. Third-pa rty sites are not affiliated with Nokia, an d Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you choose to access such sites, you should take precau tions for security or con tent. Warning: To use any features in this dev ice, other than the ala rm clock, the device must be sw itched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be v iewed or modified. Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety inst ructions. Do not connect incompatible products. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Network servi ces To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Some features are not available on all networks; other features ma y require that you ma ke specific arrangements with your service provider to use them. Network services invo lve transmission of data. Check with your service provid er for details about fees in your home network and when roaming on other networks. Your service provider can explain what charges will apply. Some networks ma y have limitations that affect how you can use some features of this devi ce requiring network support such as support for specific technologies like WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols and language-d ependent characters. 8 Safety
Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on you r device menu. Your device may also have cus tomized items such as menu names, menu order, and icons. Shared me mory The following features in th is device may share memory: multimedia messag ing (MMS), e-mail applic ation, instant messaging. Use of one or mo re of these features may reduce the memory available for the remaining features. If your device displays a message that the memory is full, delete some of the information stored in the shared memory. During extended operation su ch as an active video call and high speed data connection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect t he device is not working proper ly, take it to th e nearest authorised service facility. ActiveSync Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM info rmation between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. Magnets and magnetic fields Keep your device away from magnets or magnetic fields. 9 Safety
Get started Keys and parts (front and top) 1 Light sensor 2 Selection keys 3 Call key 4 Menu key 5 Numeric key pad 6 Microphone 7 Scroll and selection key 8 Clear key C 9 End key 10 Earpiece 11 Secondary camera 1 Power key 2 Nokia AV Connect or (3.5 mm) 3 Micro USB connector Keys and parts (back and sides) 1 Stereo speaker 10 Get started
2 Volume/Zoom key 3 Capture key 4 Stereo speaker 5 Flash and video light 6 Lens cover 7 Main camera 8 Key lock switch Short slide keys Short slide keys act as media, zoom, or gaming keys depending on the application. Short slide keys also enable multitasking, for example, if you are browsing the internet with the Music player application in the background, you can control the player with the Play/ Pause key. 1 Forward/Zoom in key 2 Play/Pause key and gaming key 3 Stop key and gaming key 4 Rewind/Zoom out key Kickstand You can use th e kickstand, for example, when you view images or video clips. Open the kickstand at the back of the device, and place the device on a level surface. When you open the kickstand, the Photos application is opened automatically . To modify the kickstand set tings, select Menu > Tools > Settings and Gene ral > Personalisation > Kickstand . Insert SIM card and battery Safe removal. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. 1 With the back of the device facing you, remove the back cover by lifting it from the bottom end of the device. 11 Get started
2 Insert the SIM card into the card holder. Ensure that the bevelled corner on the card is facing right, and that the contact area on the card is fa cing down. 3 Insert the battery. 4 To replace the cover, press the cover down u ntil the cover locks into place. Memory card Use only compatible microSD cards approved by Nokia for use with this device. Nokia uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with this de vice. Incompatible cards may damage the card and the devi ce and corrupt data stored on the card. Insert the me mory card A memory card may be alread y inserted in the device. If not, do the following: 1 With the back of the device fa cing you, lift up t he cover. 2 Insert a compatible memory card in th e slot. E nsure that the contact area on the ca rd is facing down and towards the slot. 3 Push the car d in. You ca n hear a click when the card locks into place. 12 Get started
4 Close the back cover. Ensure that the cover is properly closed. Remove t he memory card Important: Do not remove the memory card during an operation when the card is being accessed. Doin g so may damage the memory card and th e device, and corrupt data stored on the card. 1 Before you remove the card , press the power key, and select Remove memory card . All applications are closed. 2W h e n Removing memory card will close all open applications. Remove anyway? is displayed, select Yes . 3W h e n Remove memory card and press 'OK' is displayed, remove the back cover of the device. 4 Press the memory card to release it from the slot. 5 Pull out the memory card. If the de vice is sw itche d on, select OK . 6 Replace the back cover. Ensure that the cover is properly closed. Switch the device on and off To switch on the device: 1 Press and hold the power key. 2 If the device asks for a PIN code or lock code, enter it, and select OK . The preset lock code is 12345 . If you forget the code and your de vice is locked, your device will require service and additional charges may apply. For more information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. To switch off the device, press the power key briefly, and select Switch off! . Charge the ba ttery Your battery has been partia lly charged at the factory. There may not be a need to charge the battery in advance. If the device indicates a low ch arge, do the following: 13 Get started
Regular charging 1 Connect the charger to a wall outlet. 2 Connect the charger to the device . The charging indicator light next to the U SB connector is lit w hen the battery is being charged. 3 When the device indi cates a full charge, disconnect the charger from the device, then from the wa ll outlet. You do not need to charge the battery for a specif ic length of time, and you ca n use the de vice while it is charging. If the battery is completely disc harged, it may take several minutes before the charging indicat or appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Tip: Disconnect the charger from the wall outlet when the charger is not in use. A charger that is connected t o the outlet consumes power even when it is not connected to the device. USB char ging You can use USB charging when a wall outlet is not available. With USB charging , you can als o transfer dat a while charging the device. 1 Connect a compatible USB device to your device using a compatible USB cable. The efficiency of USB chargi ng varies significantly. In some cases, it ma y take a very long time for charging to start and the device to start functioning. 2 If your device is switched on, you can selec t from the available USB mode option s on the display of the device. During extended operation such as an active video call and high speed data connection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition i s normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorised service facility. Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphones to your device. You may need t o select the cable mode. Some headsets come in two parts, a remote control unit and headphones. A remote cont rol unit has a microphone and keys to answer or en d a phone call, adjust the volume, and play music or video files. T o use the headphones with a remote control unit, connect the unit to the Nokia AV Connector in the device, then connect the headphones to the unit. 14 Get started
Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Do not connect products that crea te an output sig nal as this may cause damage to the device. Do not conn ect any voltage source to the Nokia AV Conn ector. When connecting any extern al device or any headset, other than those approved by Nokia for use with this device, to the Nokia AV Connector, pay special attention to volume levels. Attach wris t strap 1 Open the back cover. 2 Thread a wrist strap, and tight en it. 3 Close the back cover. Antenna locations Your device may have internal and external antennas. Avoid touching the antenna a rea unnecessarily while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Contact with antennas affects t he communicatio n quality and may cause a higher power lev el during operation and may reduce the battery life. 1 Bluetooth and wireless LAN (WLAN), and GPS antennas 2 FM transmitter ante nna 3 Cellular antenna The FM transmitter antenna is locat ed in the back cover of your device. If you change the back cover, check that the new cover includes this antenna, otherwise this 15 Get started
connection stops working. Bluetooth, WLAN, and GPS antennas are located a t the back of your device. 16 Get started
Find help In-device help Your device contains instru ctions to help to use the applications in your device. To open help texts from the main menu, select Menu > Applications > Help and the application for which you want to read inst ructions. When an applic ation is open, t o access the h elp text for the current view, select Options > Help . When you are reading the inst ructions, to change the size of the help text, select Options > Decrease font size or Increase font size . You may find links to related topics at the end of the help text. If you select an underlined word, a short exp lanation is displayed. Help texts use the fo llowing indicators: Link to a related help topic. Link to the application being discussed. When you are reading the inst ructions, to switch between help texts and the appl ication that is open in the background, select Options > Show open apps. and the desired application. Support When you want to learn more a bout how to use your product or you are un sure how your device should function, see the support page s at www.nokia.com/ support or your local Nokia website, w ww.nokia.mobi/ support (with a mobile device), the Help appli cation in the device, or the user guide. If this does not resolve your issue, do the following: ⢠Restart the device: switch off the device, an d remove the battery. After about a minute, replace the battery, and switch on the device. ⢠Restore the original factor y settings as explained in the user guide. Your documents and files are not deleted in the reset. If the issue remain s unsolv ed, contact Nokia for repair options. See www.nokia.com/repair. Before sending your device for repair, always back up the data in your device. Additional applications There are various application s provided by Nokia and different third-party software developers that help you do more with your device. Thes e applicat ions are expla ined in the guides that are avai lable on the product support pages at www.nokia.com/ support or your local Nokia website. Update device software Software updates using your P C Software updates may include new features and enhanced functions that were not available at the time of p urchase of your device. Updati ng th e software may also improve the device performance. 17 Find help
Nokia Software Updat er is a PC application that enables you to update your device so ftware. To update your device software, you need a compatible PC, broadband int ernet access, and a compatible USB data cable to connect your device to the PC. To get more information, to check th e release notes for the latest software versions, and to download the Nokia Software Updater application, see www.nokia.com/ softwareupdate or your local Nokia website. To update the device software, do the following: 1 Download and install the Nokia Software Up dater application to your PC. 2 Connect your device to the PC using a USB data cable, and open the Nokia S oftware Update r application . The Nokia Software Updater applicat ion guides you to back up your files, update the software, and restore your files. Software updates over the air Select Menu > A pplications > SW update . With Software update (netwo rk service), you can check if there are updates available for your device software or applications, and download them to you r device. Downloading software updates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device battery has enough power, or connect the charger before st arting the update. Warning: If you install a software update , you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls , until the installation is completed and the device is re started. Be sure to back up data before acce pting installation of an update. After updating your device so ftware or applications using Software update, the instruction s related to the updated applications in the user guide or the helps may no longer be up to date. Select Options and from the following: Start update â Download the available updates. T o unmark specific upda tes that you do not want to download, select the up dates from the list. Update via PC â Update your device using a PC. This option replaces the S tart update option when updates are only available using the Nokia Software Updater PC application. View details â View information on an update. View update history â View the status of previous updates. Settings â Change the settings, such as the default a ccess point used for downloading updates. Disclaimer â View the Nokia licence agreement. Settings Your device normally has MMS, GPRS, stre aming, and mobile internet settings automatica lly configured, based on your network service provider information. You may have settings from your serv ice providers already installed 18 Find help
in your device, or you may re ceive or request the settings from the network service prov iders as a special message. You can change t he general settings in your device, s uch as language, standby mode, display, and keypad lock settings. Access codes If you forget any of the access codes, contact your service provider. Personal identification numb er (PIN) code â This code protects your SIM card again st unauthorised use. T he PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorre ct PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. UPIN code â This code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an en ha nced version of t he SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. P I N 2 c o d e â T h i s c o d e ( 4 t o 8 d i g i t s ) i s s u p p l i e d w i t h s o m e SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in yo ur device. Lock code (also known as se curity code) â Th e lock code helps you to protect your device against una uthorised use. The preset code is 12345. Yo u can create and change the code, and set the device to request the code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your device. If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service and additional charges may apply. For more information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. Personal Unblocking Key (PUK) code and PUK2 code â These codes (8 digits) ar e required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code , respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your device. UPUK code â This code (8 digi ts) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the co de is not supplied with th e USIM card, contact the operator whose USIM card is in your device. Prolong battery li fe Many features in your device increase the demand on battery power and reduce th e battery lifetime. To save battery power, note the following: ⢠Features that use Bluetoot h technology, or allowing such features to run in the ba ckground while usi ng other features, increase the demand on battery power. Deac tivate Blu etooth tech nology when you do not need it. ⢠Features that use wireless LAN (WL AN), or allowing such features to run in the ba ckground while usi ng other features, increase the demand on battery power. WLAN on your Nokia device deactivates when you are not trying to connect, not connected to an access point, or not scanning for available networks. To further reduce batt ery consumption, you can specify that your device do es not scan, or scans le ss often, for available networks in the background. ⢠If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connection settings, and there is no packet data coverage (GPR S), the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. To prolong the operating time of your device, select Packet data connection > When needed . 19 Find help
⢠The Maps application downloads new map information when you scroll to new areas on t he map, which increases the demand on battery power. You can prevent the automatic downloa d of new maps. ⢠If the signal strength of the cellular network varie s much in your area, your device must scan for the available network repeated ly. This increases the demand on battery power. If the network mode is set to dual mode in the n etwork settings, the devi ce searches for the UMTS ne twork. You can set the device to use only the GSM network. To use only the GS M network, select Menu > Tools > Settings and Phone > Ne twork > Netw ork mode > GSM . ⢠The backlight of the displa y increase s the demand on battery power. In the display settings, you can chan ge the length of the time-out period after which the backlight is switched off, and adjust the light sens or that observes lighting conditions and adjusts the display brightness. Select Menu > Tools > Settings and General > Personalisation > Display and Light time-out or Brightness . ⢠Leaving applications runn ing in the background increases the demand on ba ttery power. To close the applications you are not using, press and hold the menu key, scroll to the appl ication, and press C . ⢠To save power, activate the power save mode. Press the power key, and select Activate powe r saving . To deactivate it, press the power key , and select Deactivate power sa ving . You may not be able to change the settin gs of certain application s when the power save mode is turned on. Free memor y To view how much memory is available for different data types, select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies you if available memory is low. To free memory, transfer data to an alt ernative memory (if available) or compatible computer. To remove data you no longer need, use File manager or the respective application. Yo u can rem ove the following: ⢠Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e- mail messages from the mailbox ⢠Saved web pages ⢠Contact information ⢠Calendar notes ⢠Applications shown in Appl ication ma nager that you do not need ⢠Installation files (with .sis or .sisx file extensions) of installed applications. Back up the installation files to a compatible computer. ⢠Images and v ideo clips in Photos. 20 Find help
Your device Phone setup When you switch on your de vice for the first time, the Phone setup application opens. To access the Phone setu p application later, select Menu > To ols > Phone setup . To set up the device con nections, select Sett ings wizard . To transfer data to your de vice from a compatible Nokia device, select Phone swi tch . The available options may vary. Nokia Switch Transfer content You can use th e Switch applic ation to copy content such as phone numbers, addresses, calendar items, and images from your previous Nokia device to your device. The type of content that can be transferred depen ds on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content. If that device supports synchronisati on, you can also synchronise data between the devi ces. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. If the other device cannot be switched on without a SIM card, you can insert your SIM card in it. When your device is switched on without a SIM card, the Offline profile is automatically activated, and t ransfer can be don e. Transfer content for the first time 1 To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, sele ct Phone switc h in the Welcome application, or select Menu > Tools > Switch . 2 Select the connection type you want to use to transfer the data. Both devices must support the selected connection type. 3 If you select Bl uetooth connectivity as the con nection type, connect the two devices. To have you r device search for devices with Bl uetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the device f rom which you wa nt to transfer content. You are as ked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices are now paired. Some earlier Nokia device s may not have the Sw itch application. In this case, the Switch application is sent to the other device as a message. To ins tall the Switch application on the other device, open the message, and follow the instruct ions on the display. 4 On your device, select the content you want to transfer from the other device. When the transfer has starte d, you can cancel it and continue later. Content is transferred from the memory of th e other device to the corresponding lo cation in your device. The transfer time depends on the am ount of data to be transferred. Synchronise, retrieve, or send content Select Menu > Tools > Switch . 21 Your device
After the first transfer, se lect from the following to start a new transfer, depending on the model: to synchronise content between your dev ice and the other device, if the other device supports synchronisation. T he sync hronisation is two-way. If an item is deleted in one device, it is deleted in both. You cannot rest ore deleted items with synchronisation. to retrieve content from the other device to your device. With retrieva l, content is transferred from the other device to your device. You may be asked to keep or delete the original content in t he other device, depending on the device model. to send content from your devi ce to your other device If you cannot send an item, de pending on the type of the other device, you can add the item to the Nokia folder, to C:\Nokia or E:\Nok ia in your device. When you select the folder to transfer, the items are synchronised in the corresponding folder in the other device, and vice versa. Use shortcuts to repeat a transfer After a data t ransfer, you can save a shor tcut with the transfer settings to the main view to repeat the same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, select Option s > Shortcut settings . For example, you can cr eate or change the name of the short cut. A transfer log is shown after every transfer. To view the log of the last transfer, select a s hortcut in the main view and Options > View log . Handle tra nsfer co nflicts If an item to be transfer red has been edited in both devices, the device attempts to merge th e changes automatically. If this is not pos sible, there is a transfer conflict. Select Check one by one , Priority to this phone , or Priority to other phon e to solve the conflict. Display indicators The device is being used in a GSM network (network service). The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waitin g to be sent in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. The ringing type is set to Silent, a nd the message and e-mail alert tones are turned off. A timed profile is active. The device keypad is locked. A clock alarm is active. The second phone line is being used (network service). 22 Your device
All calls to the device are diverted to another number (network service) . If you have two phone lines, a number in dicates the active line. Your device is connec ted to a network via wireless LAN or UMTS (network service) and ready for an internet call. A compatible headset is connected to th e device. The FM transmitter is a ctive but not tra nsmitting. The FM transmitter is active an d transmitting. A compatible TV out cable is connected to the device. A compatible text phone is connected to the device. A data call is active (network service). A GPRS packet data connection is active (network service). indicates that the connection is on hold and that a conn ection is available. A packet data connection is active in a part of the network that supports EGPRS (network service). indicates that the connection is on h old and that a connection is available. The icons indicate that EGPRS is available in the n etwork, but your device is not necessarily using an EGPRS connection to transfer data. A UMTS packet data conne ction is active (network service). indicates that the connection is on hold and that a conn ection is available. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and active (network service). indicates that the connec tion is on hold and that a connection is available. You have set the device to scan for wireless LANs, and a wireless LAN is available (network service). A wireless LAN connection is acti ve in a network that uses encryption. A wireless LAN connection is acti ve in a network that does not use encrypti on. Bluetooth connectivity is on . Data is being transmitted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the in dicator is blinking, your device is trying to connect with another device. A USB connection is active. Synchronisation is in progress. GPS is active. Shortcuts When in the menus, instead of using the scroll key, you can use the number keys, # , and * to quickly access the applications. For example, in the main menu, press 5 to open Messaging or # to open the application or folder in the corresponding location in the menu. To switch between open applications, p ress and hold the menu key. Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. To start a web connection (network service), in the standby mode, press and hold 0 . In many applications, to view the most common option items ( ), press the scroll key. To change the profile, press th e power key, and select a profile. 23 Your device
To switch between the General and Silent pro files, in the standby mode, press and hold # . If you have two phone lines (network service), this action switches between the two lines. To call your voice mailbox (network service), in the standby mode, press and hold 1 . To open a list of last dialle d numbers, in the standby mode, press the call key. To use voice commands, in the standby mode, press and hold the right selection key . To remove an application fr om the menu, select it, and press C . Some application s may not be removed. Mobile Search Select Menu > Search . You can also access Mobile Search directly from the active standby mode, if that has been activated in the sett ings. Use Mobile Search to access inter net search engines and to find and connect to local se rvices, websites, images, and mobile content. You can also se arch content in your dev ice, such as calendar entries, e-mail, and other messages. Web search (network servi ce) 1 In the Search main view, select Search the In ternet . 2 Select a search engine. 3 Enter your text to search. 4 Press the scroll key to start th e search. My content search To search content in your de vice, in the main view, enter your text to the search field. The search results are displayed on the sc reen as you write. Volume and loudspeaker cont rol To increase or decrease th e volume level when you have an active call or are listening to a s ound, use the volume key. The built-in loudspeaker allo ws you to speak and listen from a short distan ce without having to hold the device to your ear. To use the loudspeaker during a call, press Loudsp. . To turn off the loudspeaker, press Handset . Offline prof ile To activate the offline pro file, press the power key briefly, and select Offl ine . 24 Your device
The offline profile lets you use the device without connecting to the wireless cellular network. When you activate the offline profile, the connection to the cellular network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indica tor area. All radio freque ncy (RF) signals to and from the device to the cellular network are prevented. If you try to send messages using the cellular network, they are placed in the Outbox folder to be sent later. When the offline profile is active, you can use your device without a SIM card. If the SIM card is not properly in place, the device starts in the offline profile. Important: In the Offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may sti ll be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must firs t activate the phone function by changing profiles. If the devi ce has been locked, enter the lock code. When you have activated the offline profile, you can still use the wireless LAN, for example, to read your e-mail or browse on the internet. You can also use Bluetooth connectivity while in the offline profile. Remember to comply with any applicable safet y requirements when establishing and using a wi reless LAN or Bluetooth connections. To switch to another profile, press the power key briefly, and select another profile. Th e device re-enables wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficient signal strength). Fast downloading High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA, also called 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-s peed data downloads. When HSDPA support in the device is activa ted and the device is connected to a UMTS network that supports HSDPA, downloading data such as me ssages , e-mail, and browse r pages through the cellular network may be faster. An active HSDPA connection is indicated by . You can activate or deactivate support for HSDPA in packet data settings. For availability and subscription to da ta connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the download sp eed; sending data to the network, such as messages and e-mail, is not affected. 25 Your device
Ovi For more information on Ovi services, go to www.ovi.com. About Ovi Store In Ovi Store, you can download mobile games, applications, videos, images , and ringing tones to your device. Some of the items are free of charge; others you need to purchase using your credit card or through your phone bill. Ovi Store offers yo u conten t that is com patible with your mobile device and relevant to your tastes and location. You can share recommendations with your friends, see what they are do wnloading, and let them see the items you are interested in. The content in Ovi Store is sorted into the following categorie s: ⢠Recommended ⢠Games ⢠Personalise ⢠Applications ⢠Audio & video Ovi Contac ts About Contacts on O vi With Contacts on Ovi, you can stay connected to the people who matter most. Search for contacts, an d discover friends in the Ovi community. Keep in touc h with your friends - chat, share your location an d presence, and easily follow what your friends are up to and where they are. You can even chat with friends who use Google Talkâ¢. Sync your contacts , calendar, and other con tent between your Nok ia device and Ovi.com. Your important information is stored and kept up-to-date both in your device and on the web. With Contacts on Ovi, you can make your contacts list dynamic and be confident that your contacts a re stored on Ovi.com. You must have a Nokia Account to use the service. Create an account on your mobile device, or go to www.ovi.com on your PC. Chat with your friends To connect to Contacts on Ovi, open the Contacts application and the Ovi tab. Select Go online and the connection method. Use a wireless LAN (WLAN) conn ection where available. A packet data connection may generate additiona l data transmission charges. For pricing details, contact your network service provider. To start a chat with a friend, select Options > Chat . To send a chat message, enter the text in the message field, and select Send . In the chat view, select Options and from the following: Send â Send the message. Add smiley â Insert a smiley. Send my locatio n â Send your location deta ils to your chat partner (if supported by both devices). Profile â View the details of a friend. 26 Ovi
My profile â Select your presence status or avatar, personalise your message, or change your details. Edit tex t â Copy text from or paste text into your message. End chat â End the active chat. Exit â End all a ctive chats, and clos e the application. The available options may vary. To receive location information from your friend, you must have the Maps application. To send and receive location information, both the Maps and Positioning applications are needed. To view the location of your friend, select Show on map . To return t o the Contac ts on Ov i main view without en ding the chat, select Back . If you receive a phone numbe r in a chat, to add it to your contacts, call, send message to, or copy the number, select Options . To open or copy a web link received in a chat, select Options . If you receive an e-mail addr ess in a chat, to copy the e- mail address or send e-mail to it, select Options . Ovi Files With Ovi Files, you can use you r Nokia N86 8MP to access content on your computer if it is switched on and connected to the internet. You will need to install the Ovi Files application on every co mputer you want to access with Ovi Files. You can try out Ovi Files for a limited trial period. With Ovi Files, y ou can: ⢠Browse, search, and view your images. You do not need to upload the images to the websit e but you can access your computer content wi th your mobile device. ⢠Browse, search, and view your files and documents. ⢠Transfer song s from your computer to your device. ⢠Send files and folders from your computer without moving them to and from your device first. ⢠Access files on your computer even when your computer is switched off. Just choose which folders and files you want to be available, and Ovi Files automatically keeps an up-t o-date copy stored in a protected, online storage for access even when your computer is switched off. For support, see files. ovi.com/suppo rt. 27 Ovi
Camera About the camera Your Nokia N86 8MP has two cameras. The ma in, high- resolution camera, is on th e back of the device. The secondary, lower resolution ca mera is on the front. You can use both cameras to capture images and record videos. Your device supports an im age capture resolution of 3264x2448 pixels (8 megapix els ). The image resolution in this guide may appear different. The images and video clip s are saved in Photos. The produced images ar e in the JPEG format. Video clips are recorded in the MPEG-4 file format with the .mp4 file extension, or in the 3GPP file format with the .3gp file extension (sharing qu ality). See "Video settings" , p. 36 . To free memory for new images and video clips, transfer files to a compatible PC u sing a compatible US B data cable, for example, and remove the files from your device. The device informs you when the memory is full. You can then free up memory in the curr ent storage or change the memory in use. You can send images and video clips in a multimedia message, as an e-mail atta ch ment, or by usin g other connection methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity or a wireless LAN connection. You can a lso upload them to a compatible online album. Activate the camera To activate t he main camera , open the lens cover. To activate the main camera when the lens cover is already open and the camera is active in the background, press and hold the ca pture key. To close the main camera, close the lens cover. Image ca pture Still image camera indicators The still image camera viewfi nder displays the following: 1 Capture mode indicator 2 Active toolbar (not displa yed during image capture). 3 Battery charge level indi cator 4 Image resolution indicator 5 Image counter (the estimate d number of images you can capture using the curr ent image quality setting and memory) 6 The device memory ( ), mass memor y , and memory card ( ) indicators, which show where images are saved 28 Camera
7 GPS signal indicator Active toolbar The active toolbar provides you with shortcuts to different items and settings before and after capturing an ima ge or recording a video clip. To select a toolbar item, scroll to the item, and press the scroll ke y. You can also define when the active toolbar is displayed. The settings in the active to olbar return to the default settings after you close th e camera. To view the active toolbar before and after ca pturing an image or recording a video clip, select Options > Show toolbar . To view the active t oolbar only when you need it, select Options > Hide toolbar . To display th e toolbar when it is hidden, press th e scroll key. The toolbar is displayed for 5 seconds. By default, not all shortcuts are avai lable. To add or remove shortcuts from the toolbar, select Option s > Customise t oolbar . From the active toolbar, select from the following: Switch to video mode. Switch to ima ge mode. Select the scene. Turn the video light off (video mode only). Turn the video light on (video mode only). Select the flash mode (images only). Activate the self-timer (images only). Activate sequence mode (images only). Select a colour effect. Adjust the white balance. Adjust the exposure comp ensation (images only). Adjust sharpn ess (images only) . Adjust contras t (images only) . Adjust light sensitivity (images only). Activate panorama mode. The icons change to refle ct the current setting. Saving the captured image ma y take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. Capture images When capturing an i mage, note the following: ⢠Use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠The quality of a digitally zoomed image is lower than that of a nonz oomed image. ⢠The camera goes into the battery saving mode if there are no keypresses for a moment. To continue capturing images, press the capture key. To capture an image, do the following: 1 If the camera is in the video mode, select the image mode from the active toolbar. 2 To lock the focus on an ob ject, press the capture key halfway down (main camera only, not av ailable in landscape or sport scene.). A green locked focus indicator appears on the display. If the focu s was not locked, a red focus indica tor appears. Release the capture key, and press it ha lfway down again. You can also capture an imag e without locking the focu s. 29 Camera
3 To capture an image, press the capture key. Do not move the device before the image is saved and the final image appears on the screen. To zoom in or out when capt uring an image, use the zoom key in your de vice . To activate t he front camera, s elect Options > Use secondary camera . To capture an image, press the s croll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. To leave the camera open in the background and use other applications, press the menu key. To return to t he camera, press and hold the capture key. Locatio n informatio n You can automatically add capture location information to the file details of the captured material. For example, in the Photos application, you can then view the location where an image was captured. Select Menu > A pplications > Camera . To add location information to all captured material, select Options > Settings > Record lo cation > On . The location information is availa ble only for images captured with the main camera. It may take several minutes to obtain the coordinates of your location. The availabilit y and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your lo cation, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditio ns. If you share a file that includes location inform ation, also the location information is shared, and your location may be visible to third parties viewing the file. The device requires network services to acquire location information. Location information indicators: â Location information unavailable. GPS stays on in the background for severa l minutes. If a satellite connection is found and the indi cator changes to within that time, all the images capt ured and video clips recorded during that time are tagg ed based on the received GPS positioning information. â Location information is available. Location information is added to the file details. Files with location inform ation are indica ted with in the Photos application. Panorama mode Select Menu > A pplications > Camera . Select panorama mode from the toolbar. 30 Camera
1 To capture the first image in the pano rama, press the capture key. 2 Slowly turn the device left or right as shown by the arrows. A panorama preview is displayed and the camera captures the image as yo u turn. The green arrow indicates that you can slowly proceed to turn. The red pause mark indicates that you should stop moving until the green arrow is displayed aga in. You can predict when the next key fr ame is captured when the red rectangle moves to the centre of the preview area. 3 To complete the capture, se lect Stop . The panoram ic capture sto ps auto matically when the maximum image width has been reached. Note that it may take some time for the device to process the captured image. After capturing an image After you capture an ima ge, select from the following options in the active tool bar (available only if Show captured image is enabled in th e still image camera settings): ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete ( ). ⢠To send the image using a multimedia message, e- mail, or other connection me thods, such as Bluetooth connectivity, press the call key, or select Send ( ). If you are in a call, select Send to caller ( ). ⢠To add the image to an album, select Add to album . ⢠To view information ab out the image, select Details . ⢠To send the image to a compatible online album, select (available only if you have set up an accoun t for an album). ⢠To zoom in an image after capturing it, select to open the image, and use the zoom keys of your device. To use the image as wallpaper in the active standby mode , select Options > Set as wallpaper . To set the image as a call image for a contact, select Options > Assign t o contact . To return to the viewfinder to capture a new image, press the capture key. Flash The flash is available on ly in the main camera. Keep a safe distance wh en us ing the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera of your device has a dual LED flash for low light conditions. Select the desired flash mode from the active toolbar: Automatic ( ), Red-eye ( ), On ( ), and Of f ( ). 31 Camera
Video light To increase light levels when recording video in low light, select . Scenes Scenes are only available in the main camera. A scene helps you to find the righ t colour and lightin g settings for the current enviro nment. The settings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environment. The default scene in the image mode is Auto , and in the video mode Automatic (both indicated with ). To change the scene, in th e active toolbar , select Scene modes and a scene. To make your own scene sui table for a certain environment, scroll to User def ined , and select Options > Change . In the us er defined scene you can adjust different lighting and colour settings. To copy the settings of anothe r scene, select Base d on scene mode and the desired scene. To sa ve the chan ges and retu rn to the scenes list, press Back . To activate your own scene, scroll to User defined , press the scroll key, and select Select . Capture images in a sequence The sequence mode is availabl e only in the main camera. To set the ca mera to captur e images in sequence (if enough memory is available), in the activ e toolbar, select Sequence mo de . To start capturing imag es in a quick sequence, select Burst , and press and hold the capture key. The device captures images until you release the key or until the memory runs out. If you press the capture key briefly, the device captures six image in a sequence. To capture two or more images in defined intervals, select the desired time in terval. To capture the imag es, press the capture key. To stop capturing i mages, select Cancel . The number of images taken depends on the available memory. The captured images are show n in a grid on the display. To view an image, press the scroll key. I f you used a time interval, only the last capt ured image is shown on the display. You can view t he other images in the Photos application. You can also use the sequence mode with the se lf-timer. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture k ey. To switch off the sequence mode, in the active toolbar, select Sequence mode > Si ngle shot . 32 Camera
You in the pictureâÂÂself -timer The self-timer is available only in the main camera. Use the self-timer to delay the capture so th at you can inclu de yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, in the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 se conds , 10 seconds , or 20 seconds . To activate the self-timer, select Activate . The device beeps when the timer is running and the quadrangle blinks just before the image capture. The camera takes the picture after the selected delay elapses. To switch off the self-timer, in the ac tive toolbar, select Self timer > Off . Tip: In the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when taking a picture. Tips on takin g good photographs Picture quality Use the appropriate picture quality. The camera has several picture qualit y modes. Use the highest setting to make sure tha t the camera produces the best picture quality available. Note howev er, that better picture qualit y requires more storage spac e. For multimedia message (MMS) and e-mail attachm ents it may be necessary to use the smallest picture qualit y mode optimised for MMS sending. You ca n define the quality in the camera setti ngs. See "Still image camera settings" , p. 35 . Background Use a simple background. For portraits and other pictures with people, avoid having your subject in front of a cluttered, complex backgr ound that may distract attention from the subject. Move the camera, or the subject, when these condition s cannot be met. Move the camera closer to the object to take clearer portraits. Depth When shooting landscapes an d sceneries, add depth to your pictures by placing obje cts in the foreground. If the foreground object is too cl ose to the camera, it may be blurred. Lighting conditio ns Changing the source, amount, and direction of light can change photographs dramatically. Here are some typical lighting conditions: ⢠Light source behind the subject. Av oid placing your subject in front of a strong light source. If the light source is behind the subject or visible in the display, the resulting picture may have weak contrast, may be too dark, and may contain un wanted light effects. ⢠Sidelit subject. Strong side light gives a dramatic effect but may be too ha rsh, result ing in too much contrast. ⢠Light source in front of the subject. Hars h sunlight may cause the subjects to squi nt their eyes. The contrast may also be too high. 33 Camera
⢠Optimal lighting is found in situations where there is plenty of diffused, soft ligh t available, for example, on a bright, partially cloudy da y or on a sunny day in the shadow of trees. Video recording Video capture indicators The video vi ewfinder di splays the following: 1 Capture mode indicator 2 Video stabilisation on indicator 3 Audio mute on indicator 4 Active toolbar (not displayed during recording) 5 Battery charge level indica tor 6 Video quality indicator. To change this setting, se lect Options > Sett ings > Video quality . 7 Video clip file type 8 Available recording time. Wh en you are recording, the current video lengt h indicator also shows the elap sed and remaining time. 9 The location to which the video clip is saved. 10 GPS signal indicator Record videos 1 If the camera is in the image mode, select the video mode from the active toolbar. 2 To start recording, press the capture key. The red record icon ( ) is displayed and a tone sounds. 3 To pause recording at any time, press Pause . Select Continue to resume. If you pause recording and do not press any key within one min ute, the recording stops. To zoom in or out of the subject, use the zoom key in your device. 4 To stop recording, press the capture key. The video clip is automatically saved in Photos. The maximum lengt h of a video clip is approximately 30 seconds with sharing quality and 90 minutes with other quality settings. To activate t he front camera, s elect Options > Use secondary camera . To start recording a video, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. After recording a video After you record a video clip, select from the following options in the active toolbar (available only if Show captured video is set to On in the video settings): ⢠To immediately play the vide o clip you just recorded, select Play ( ). ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, select Delete ( ). ⢠To send the video clip using a multimedia message, e- mail, or other connection methods, such as Bluetooth 34 Camera
connectivity, press the call key, or select Send ( ). This option is not availabl e during a call. You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG -4 file format in a multimedia message. You can also send the video clip to a person you are talking to. Select Send to caller ( ) (only availa ble during a call). ⢠To add the video clip to an album, s elect Add to album ⢠To upload the video clip to a compatible online album, select (only available if you have set up an account for a compatible online album). ⢠To return to the vi ewfinder to record a new video clip, press the capture key. Camera settin gs There are two kinds of sett ings fo r the camera: setup settings and main s ettings. The setup s ettings return to the default setti ngs after you close the camera, b ut the main settings rem ain the same until you change them again. To adjust the setup se ttings, use the options in the active toolbar. See "Colour and li ghting settings" , p. 35 . To change the main settings, in the image or video mode, select Options > Settings . Still image camera settings To change the main set tings, in the image mode, select Options > Sett ings and from the following: Image quality â Set the resolution (main camera only). The better the image quality, the more memory the image consumes. Add to album â Save the image t o an album in Photos . Record location â To add GPS location coordinates to each image file, select On . Receiving a GPS signal may take time or the signal may not be avai lable. Show captured image â Select whether to view the captured image after it is taken or t o continue image capturing immediately. Default image name â Define the default name for the captured images. Extended di gital zoom â The setting is only available in the main camera. On (continuous) allows the zoom increments to be smooth an d continuous between digital and extended digital zoom, On (paused) allows the zoom increments to pause at the digital and extended digital step point, and Off allows a limited am ount of zoom while retaining the image resolut ion. Use the extended zoom on l y w h e n g e t t i ng c l o s e r t o the subject is more important than the final image quality. The overall quality of a digitally zoomed image is al ways lower than that of an unzoomed image. Capture tone â Set the tone that sounds when you capture an image. Memory in use â Select where to store your images. Restore camera se ttings â Restore the camera settings to default values. Colour and lighting settings In the active toolbar, se lect from the following: Flash mode ( ) (image only) â Select the desired flash mode. Colour tone ( ) â Select a colour effect. Switch video li ght on or Swit ch video light off â Switch the video light on or off (video mode only). 35 Camera
White balance ( ) â Select the current lighting condition. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately. Exposure compensation ( ) (image only) â I f you are shooting a dark subject against a very light background, such as snow, adjust the exposure to 1 or 2 to compensate for the backgrou nd brightn ess. For light subjects against a dark background, use -1 or -2. Sharpness ( ) (image only) â Adju st the sharpne ss of the image. Contrast ( ) (image only) â Adjust the difference between the lightest and da rkest parts of the image. Light sensitiv ity ( ) (image only) â Increase the light sensitivity in low light co nditions to avoid too dark images. The screen display changes to match the se ttings you make. The available setti ngs vary depending on the selected camera. The setup settings are shootin g-mode specific. Switching between the modes does not reset the defined settings. The setup settings return to the defa ult settings when you close the camera. If you select a new scene, th e colour and li ghting s ettings are replaced by the selected scene. You can change the setup settings after sele cting a scene if needed. Video settings To change the main settings , in t he video mode, select Options > Settings and from the following: Video quality â Set the quality of the video clip. Select Sharing , if you want to send the video clip using a multimedia message. The clip is recorded with QCIF resolution, in 3GPP format, and the size is limited to 300 kB (approximately 30 seco nds). You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG-4 format in a multimedia message. Record location â To add GPS location coordinates to each file, select On . Receiving the GPS signal may take time or the signal may not be available. Video stabil isation â R educe the effects of the camera shaking when recording a video. Audio recording â Select whether to record sound. Add to album â Add the recorded video clip to an album in Photos. Show captured video â Select to view the first frame of the recorded video clip after the recording stops. To view the entire video clip, select Play from the active toolbar (main camera) or Options > Play (secondary camera). Default video name â Enter the default name for captured video clips. Memory in use â Select where you want to store your video clips. Restore camera settings â Restore the camera settings to default values. 36 Camera
Photos About Photos Select Menu > Phot os and from the fo llowing: Captured â View all the images and videos you have captured. Months â View images and videos categorised by the month they where captured. Albums â View the default al bums and the ones you have created. Tags â View the tags you hav e created for each item. Downloads â View items and videos downloaded from the web or received as a multimedia or e-mail message. All â View all items. Share onlin e â Post your images or videos to the web. View images and video s Select Menu > Phot os and from the fo llowing: All â View all images and videos. Captured â View images captured and video clips recorded with the camera of your device. Downloads â View downloaded video clips. Images and video clips c an also be sent to you from a compatible device. To be able to view a received image or video clip in Photos, you must first save i t. The images and video clip files are in a loop and ordered by date and time. The number of files is displayed. To browse the files one by o ne, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, sc roll up or down. To open a file, select the fi le. When an image opens, to zoom in the image, use the zoom keys. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently . To edit an image or a video clip, select Opt ions > Edit . To see where an image marked with was captured, select Options > Show on map . To print your images on a compatible printer, select Options > Print . 37 Photos
To move images to an album for later printing, select Options > Add to album > Prin t later . View and edit fil e details Select Menu > P hotos . Go to an item. To view and edit image or video properties, select Options > Details > View and edit and from the following: Tags â View the currently us ed tags. To add more tags to the current file, select Add . Descript ion â View a free-form de scription of the file. To add a description, select the field. Locat ion â View GPS location information, if available. Title â View the thumbnail im age of the file and the current file name. To edit th e file name, select the file name field. Albums â View in which albums the current file is located. Resolution â View the size of the image in pixels. Durati on â View the length of the video. Usage righ ts â T o v i e w t h e D R M r i g h t s o f t h e c u r r e n t f i l e , select View . Organise images and videos Select Menu > P hotos . You can organise files as follows: To view items in the Tags view, add tags to the items. To view items by months, select Months . To create an album to store items, select Albums > Options > New album . To add an image or a video clip to an album, select the item and Add to album from the active toolbar. To delete an image or vide o clip, select the item and Delete from the active toolbar. Active to olbar The active toolbar is available only when you have selected an image or a video clip in a view. In the active toolbar, go to different items, and select the desired option. The availabl e options vary depending on the view you are in and wh ether you have s elected an image or a video clip. To hide the toolbar, select Optio ns > Hide icons . To activate the active toolbar when it is hidden, press the scroll key. Select an image or a video clip and from the following: Play the video clip. Send the image or video clip. Upload the image or video clip to a comp atible online album (only av ailable if you hav e set up an account for a compatible online albu m). Add the item to an album. Manage tags and other properties of the item. 38 Photos
Albums Select Menu > Phot os and Albums . With albums, you ca n conveniently manage your images and video clips. To create a new album , select Options > Ne w album . To add an image or a video clip to an album, select the item and Options > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the image or video clip. The item you added to the album is still visible in Photos. To remove an image or a video clip from an album, select the album and the item, and Options > Remove from album . Tags Select Menu > Phot os . Use tags to categorise media items in Photos. You can create and delete tags in Tag manager. Tag manager shows the currently used tags a nd the number of ite ms associated with each tag. To open Tag mana ger, select an image or video clip and Options > Detail s > Tag manager . To create a tag, select Options > New tag . To assign a tag to an im age, select the image and Options > Add tags . To see the tags you have created, select Tags . The size of the tag name corresponds to the number of items the tag is assigned to. To view all the images asso ciated with a tag, select the t ag from the list. To view the list in alph abetical order, select Optio ns > Alphabetical . To view the list in most fr equently used order, select Options > Most used . To remove an image from a tag, select the ta g and the image, and select Options > Remove from tag . Slide show Select Menu > Photos . To v ie w y ou r i ma ge s a s a sl ide show, select an image and Options > Slide sh ow > Pl ay forwards or Play backwards . The slide show starts from the se lected file. To view only the selected images as a slide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark images. To start the s lide show, selec t Options > Sl ide show > Play forwards or Play b ackwards . To resume a pause d slide show, select Continue . To end the slide show, select End . To browse the images, scroll left or right. 39 Photos
Before starting the slide sh ow, to adjust the slide show settings, select Options > Slide show > S ettings and from the following: Music â Add sound to the slide sh ow. Song â Select a music file from the list. Delay betw een slides â Adjust the tempo of the slide show. To adjust the volume during the slide show, use the volume keys. TV-out mode To view the captured images and video clips on a compatible TV, use a Nokia Video Connectivity Cable. Before viewing the images and video clips on TV, you may need to configure the TV-out settings for the applicable TV system and TV aspect ratio. See "Accessories settings" , p. 132 . You cannot use the TV as the camera viewfinder i n TV-out mode. To watch images and video cl ips on TV, do the following: 1 Connect a Nokia Video C onnectivity Cable to the video input of a compatible TV. 2 Connect the other end of the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to the Nokia AV Connector of your dev ice. 3 You may need to select the cable mo de. 4P r e s s , select Gallery and browse for the file you want to view. The images are shown in the image viewer, and the video clips are played in Video centre. All audio, including the acti ve calls, stereo video clip sound, key tone, and ringing tone is routed to the TV when the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable is connected to the device. You can us e the device microphone no rmally. For all applications other than the folders in Photos , t he TV screen displays what is displaye d on the screen of your devic e. The opened image is displaye d in full-screen on the TV. When you open an image in the thumbnail view while it is viewed on the TV, zoom ing in is not available. When you open a highlighted video clip, Video centre starts p laying the video c lip on the device display and the TV screen. See "RealPlayer" , p. 126 . You can view images as a slid e show on TV. All items in an album or marked images are displayed on the TV in full- screen while the selected music plays. See "Slide show" , p. 39 . 40 Photos
The quality of the TV image may vary due to different resolution of the devices. Wireless radio signals, such as incoming calls, may cause interference in the TV image. Edit image s Image editor To edit an image, in Photos, scroll to the image, and select Options > Edi t . To add effects to your images, select Op tions > Add effect . You can crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, colour, contra st , and resolution; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the image. Crop image To crop an image, select Optio ns > Add effect and ( Crop ). To crop the image manually, select Manual . A cross appears in the upper left co rner of the image. Scroll to adjust the crop borders, select Set , an d adjust the crop borders from the lower right corner. To readjust the cr op borders from the upper left corner, select Back . When you are satisfied with the crop area , select Crop . If you select a predefined aspe ct ratio, the selected aspect ratio is locked when you adjust the crop borders. Reduce red-e ye To reduce red-eye in an image, select Options > Add effect and ( Red-eye reduction ). Scroll the cross o nto the eye, and pr ess the scroll key. S croll to resize the loop to fit t he si ze of the eye. To reduce the redness, press the scroll key. W hen you have finished editing the image, select Done . To save the change s and return to the previous view, select Back . Useful shortcuts You can use the followi ng shor tcuts when editing images: ⢠To view a full-screen image, press * . To return to the normal view, press * again. ⢠To rotate an image clockw ise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1 . ⢠To zoom in or out, press 5 or 0 . ⢠To move on a zoomed image, scroll up, down, left, or right. Edit vide os The video editor supports .3gp and .mp4 video file formats, and .aac, .amr , .mp3, and .wav audio file formats. It does not necessarily supp ort all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. To edit video clips in Photos, scroll to a video clip, select Options > Edi t , and from the following: 41 Photos
Merge â to add an image or a video clip to the beginning or the end of the selected video clip Change sound â to add a new sound clip, and to replace the original sound in the video clip. Add text â to add text to the beginning or the end of the video clip Cut â to trim the video and mark the sections you want to keep in the video clip To take a snapshot of a video clip, in th e cut video view, select Options > Take snapshot . In the thumbnail preview view, press the scroll key, and select Take snapshot . 42 Photos
Gallery About Gallery Select Menu > Applications > Gall ery . Gallery is a storage place for your images, video and sound clips, songs, and streami ng links. Main view Select Menu > Applications > Gall ery . Select from the following: Images â View images and video clips in Photos. Video clips â View video clips in Video centre. Songs â Open Music player. Sound clips â Listen to sound clips. Streaming links â View and open streaming links. Present ations â View presentations. You can browse and open fold er s and copy and mo ve items to folders. You can also create albums and copy and add items to albums. To open a file, select the file from the list. Video clips and streaming links open and p lay in Video centre, and music and sound clips in Music player. Sound clips Select Menu > Applications > Gall ery and Sound clips . This folder contains all the sound clips you have downloaded from the web. The sound clips created with the Recorder application with MMS optimised or normal quality settings are al so saved in this folder, but the sound clips created with high quali ty settings are stored in the Music player application. To listen to a sound file, select the file from the list. To rewind or fast-forward, scroll left or right. Tip: You can use the media keys to stop, pause, resume, rewind, and fast-forward. Streaming links Select Menu > Applications > Gallery and Streaming links . To open a streaming link, sele ct the link from th e list. To add a new s treaming link, select Options > New link . Present ations Select Menu > Applications > Gallery . With presentations, you can view scalable vector graphics (SVG) and flash files (SWF), su ch as cartoons and maps. SVG images maintain their a ppearance when printed or viewed with different screen sizes and resolutions. 43 Gallery
To view files, select Presentation s . Go to an image, a nd select Options > Play . To pause playing, select Options > Pause . To zoom in, press 5 . To zoom out, press 0 . To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or anticlockwise, press 1 or 3 , respectively. To rotate the image 45 degrees, press 7 or 9 . To switch between full and normal screen mode, press * . 44 Gallery
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet or to another compatible device or PC. Wireless LAN About WLA N To use a wireless LAN (WLA N) connection, it must be available in the location, and your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some WLANs are protected, and you need an access key from the service provider to connect to them. Note: In France, you are only allowed to use WLAN indoors. Features that use WLAN, or that are allowed to run in th e background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power an d reduce the battery life. Your device supp orts the following WLAN features: ⢠IEEE 802.11b/g st andard ⢠Operation at 2.4 GHz ⢠Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) with keys up to 128 bits, Wi-Fi protected access (WPA), and 802.1x authentication me thods. These functions can be u sed only if they are supported by the network. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encrypt ion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. WLAN connections To use a WLAN, you must create an internet access point in a WLAN. Use the access p oint for applications that need to connect to the intern et. A W LAN connection is established when you create a data connection using a WLAN access point. The active WLAN connecti on is ended when you end the data conne ction. You can also end the connection manually. You can use a WLAN durin g a voice call or when packet data connection is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point dev ice at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access poin t. When the device is in the Offli ne profile, you can still use a WLAN, if available. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using a WLAN connection. If you move the device to another loca tion within the WLAN and out of range of a WLAN access point, the roaming functionality can automatically connect your device to anoth er access point t hat belongs to the same WLAN. As long as you remain within range of access points that belong to the same netw ork, your device can stay connected to the network. Tip: To check the unique media access control (M AC) address that identifies your device, for ex ample to configure the MAC address of your device to a WLAN router, enter *#62209526# in the home screen. The MAC address is displayed. 45 Connectivity
See WLAN availability To set your device to show wireless LAN (WLAN) availability, select Menu > Tools > Settings and Connection > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability . If a WLAN is available, is displayed. WLAN wizard Select Menu > T ools > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. . The WLAN wizard helps you find and connect to a wireles s LAN (WLAN). When you open t he application, your device starts to scan for available WLAN s and lists them. Select Optio ns and from the following: Refresh â Update the list of available WLANs. Filter WLAN networks â Filter out WLAN s in the list of found networks . The selected ne tworks are filtered out the next time the application searches for WLA Ns. Start web br owsing â S tart browsing th e web using the access point of the WLAN. Cont.web br owsing â Continue web browsing using the currently active WLAN connection. Disconnect WLAN â Disconnect the active connection to the WLAN. Details â View the details of the WLAN. Importa nt: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase t he secu rity of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryption reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data . Connection manager Active data connections Select Menu > T ools > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. . Select Active data connections . In the active data connect ions view, you can see the open data connections: data calls packet data connections wireless LA N (WLAN) c onnections Note: The actual inv oice for ca lls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for bi lling, taxes, and so forth. To end a connection, select Options > Disconnect . To close all open connections, select Options > Disconnect all . To view the details of a connection, select Options > Details . Available WLANs Select Menu > T ools > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. and Available WLAN networ ks . The available WL AN view shows a l ist of wireless LANs (WLAN) within rang e, their network mo de (infrastructure 46 Connectivity
or ad hoc), and sig nal strength indicator. is dis playe d for networks with encrypti on, and i f yo u r de vi c e h a s a n active connection in the network. To view the details of a network, select Options > Details . To create an internet access poi nt in a network, select Options > Define access po int . Bluetooth Select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > Bluetooth . About Bluet ooth Bluetooth technology in your device enables wireless connections between electronic devices within a rang e of 10 metres (33 feet). A B luetooth connection can be used to send images, videos, text , business cards, calendar notes, or to connect wirelessly to devices that use Bluetooth tech nology. Since devices using B luetooth technology communicate using radio waves, your devi ce and the other devices do n o t n e e d t o b e i n d i r e c t l i n e - o f - s i g h t. T h e t w o d e v i c e s o n l y need to be within a maximum of 10 metres of each other, although the connection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or other elec tronic devices. Several Bluetooth connecti ons ca n be active at a time. For example, if your device is connected to a headset, you can also transfer files to anot her compatible device at the same time. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specificati on 2.0 EDR supporting the following profiles: Dial-Up Networking (DUN), Object Push Profile (OPP), File Transfer Profile (FTP), Hands Free Profile (HFP), Headset Profile (HSP), Basic Imaging Profile (BIP), Remote SIM Access Profile (SimAP), Device Id entification Profile (DI), Phonebook Access Profile (PBAP), Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile (GAVDP), Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP), Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP). To ensure interopera bility between other devices supporting Bluetooth tech nology, use Nokia ap proved accessories for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. Features using Bluetooth technology i ncrease the demand on battery power and redu ce the battery life. Send and receive d ata with Bluetoo th Select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > Bluetooth . 1 When you activa te Bluetooth connect ivity for the first time, you are asked to name your device. Give y our device a unique name to ma ke it easy to recognise if there are several Bluetooth devi ces nearby. 2 Select Bluetooth > On . 3 Select My phone's vi sibility > Shown to a ll or Define period . If you select Define period , you need to define the time during which your device is visible to others. Your device and the name you entered can now be seen by ot her users with devices us ing Bluetooth technology . 4 Open the application where the item you want to send is stored. 47 Connectivity
5 Select the item and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . The device searches for o ther devices using Bluetooth technology within range and lists them. Tip: If you have sent data using Bluetooth connectivity before, a list of the previous se arch results is displayed. To search for mo re Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 6 Select the device with which you want to connect. If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmit ted, you are ask ed to enter a pass code. When the connection ha s been established, Sending data is displayed. The Sent folder in the Messaging application does not store messages sent using Bluetooth connectiv ity. To receive data us ing Bluetoo th connectivi ty, select Blueto oth > On and My phone's visibility > Shown to all to receive data from a non-paired device or Hidden to receive data from a paired de vice only. When you receive data through Bluetooth connectivity, depending on the settings of an active p rofile, a tone sounds, and you a re asked if you want to accept the message in which the data is included. If you accept, th e message is placed in the Inbox folder in the Messaging application. Tip: You can ac cess the files in the device or on the memory card using a compatible access ory that supports the File Transfer Profile Client service (for example, a laptop computer). A Bluetooth connection is disconn ected automatically after sending or receiving da ta. Only Nokia Ovi Suite and some accessories such as headsets may ma intain a connection even if not actively used. Pair devic es Select Menu > T ools > Connectivity > Bluetooth . Open the paired devices tab. Before pairing, decide on yo ur own passcode (1- 16 digits), and agree with the user of the other device to use the s ame code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a fixed passcode. You need the pass code only when you connect the devices for the first time. After pairing, it is possible to authorise the connection. Pa iring and auth orising the connection ma kes connecting quicker and easier, as you do not have to accept th e connection between paired devices every time you establish a connection. The passcode for remote SIM access must have 16 digits. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible co nne cted accessory, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device, while in this mode. To make calls, you must first leave the remote SIM mode. If the device has b een locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first. 1 Select Option s > New paired device . The device starts to search for Bluet ooth devices within range. If 48 Connectivity
you have sen t data using Bluet ooth connectivity before, a list of the previous sea rch results is displayed. To search for more Bluet ooth devices, select More devices . 2 Select the device with which you wa nt to pair, and enter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered to the other device as well. 3 Select Yes to make the connection between your device and the other device automatic, or No to confirm the connection manually every time a connection attempt is ma de . After pairing, the device is saved to th e paired devices pag e. To give a nickname to the paired device, select Options > Assign short name . The nickname is disp layed in your device. To delete a pairing, select the device whose pairing you want to delete and Opt ions > Delete . To delete all pairings, select Opt ions > Delete all . If you are currently connected to a device and cancel the p airing with that device, pairing is remo ved immediately , and the connection is ended. To allow a paired device to connect au tomatically to your device, select Set as authorised . Connections between your device and the other device can be made without your knowledge. No separate a cceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status only for your own devices, such as your compatible heads et or computer, or devices tha t belong to someone you trust. If you want to accept connection requests from the other device separately every time, select Set as unauthorised . To use a Bluetooth audio acce ssory such as a Bluetooth handsfree or headset, you need to pair your device with the accessory. For the passco de and further instructions, see the accessory user guide. To connect to the audio accessory, switch on t he accessory. Some a udio accessories connect automa tically to your device. Otherwise, open the paired devices tab, select the accessory and Options > Connect to audio devi ce . Block devices Select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > Bluetooth . To block a devic e from esta blishing a Bluet ooth connection to your device, open the paired devices tab. Select a device you want to block and Options > Block . To unblock a device, open the blocked devices tab, and select Options > Delete . To unblock all blocked devices, select Options > Delete all . If you reject a pairing request from another device, you are asked if you want to block a ll future connection requests from this device. If you accept the query, the remote device is added to the list of blocked devices. Security tips When you are not using B luetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . 49 Connectivity
Do not pair with an un known device. Data ca ble To avoid corrupting data, do no t disconnect the USB data cable during data transfer. Transfer data between your devi ce and a PC 1 Insert a memory card in yo ur device, and connect the device to a compatible PC with the data cable. 2 When the device asks which m ode to use, select Mass storage . In this mode, you can see your device as a removable hard drive in your computer. 3 End the connection from the computer (from the Unplug or Eject Hardware wizard in Microsoft Windows, for example) to avoid damaging the memory card. To use Nokia Ovi Suite with your device, install Nokia Ovi Suite on your PC, connect th e data cable, and select PC Suite . To synchronise the music in your device with Nokia Music Player, install the Nokia Music Playe r software on your PC, connect the data cable, and s elect Media transfer . To change the USB mode you normally use with the data cable , select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > USB an d USB conne ction mode , and the desired option. To set the device to ask for the mode each time you connect the data cable to the device, select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > USB and Ask on conn ection > Yes . PC connec tions You can use your device with a variety of comp atible PC connectivity and data com munications applications . With Nokia Ovi Suite or Nokia Nseries PC Suite, you can, for example, transfer images between your device and a compatib le PC. For information on Apple Macintosh support and connecting y our device to an Apple Ma cintosh device, see www.nseries.com/mac . Sync Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings > Connectivity > Sync . Sync enables you to synchronise your notes, calendar entries, text and multi media messages, browser bookmarks, or contacts with various compatible applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronisat ion settings in a special message from your service provider. A synchronisation profile cont ains the necessary sett ings for synchronisation. When you open the Sync application, the default or previously used sync profile is displayed. To modify the profile, scroll to a sync item, and select Mark to include it in the profile or Unmark to leave it out. To manage sync profiles, select Options and the desired option. 50 Connectivity
To synchronise data, select Options > Synchronise . To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, select Cancel . 51 Connectivity
Browser About Browser Select Menu > Web . With the Browser application, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML) we b pages on the internet as originally designed. You can also browse web pages that are designed specifically for mobile devices, and use extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), or the wireless markup language (WML). To browse the web, you need to have an internet access point configured in your device. The browser requires network service. Browse t he web Select Menu > Web . Shortcut: To start the browser, press and hold 0 in the home screen. To browse the web, in th e bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or start to enter a web address (the field opens automa tically ), and select Go to . Some web pages ma y contain material, such as graphics and sounds, that requires a larg e amount of memory to view. If yo ur device r uns out o f memory wh ile loading such a web page, the graphics on t he page are not shown. To browse web pages with graphics disabled, to save memory and increase the page loading speed, select Options > Settings > Pa ge > Load cont ent > Text only . To enter a web ad dress, select Options > Go to > New web page . To refresh the content of the web page, select Option s > Web page options > Reload . To save the current web page as a bookmark, select Options > Web page options > Save as bookmark . To view snapshots of the we b pages you have visited during the current browsi ng session, select Back (available if History list is ac tivated in the browser settings and the current web page is not the first web page you visit). To prevent or allow the automatic opening of multiple windows, select Options > Web page opt ions > Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups . To view the shortcut key map, select Optio ns > Keypad shortcuts . To edit the shortcut keys, select Edit . Tip: To minimise the browser without e xiting the application or connection, press the end key once. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar helps you select frequently used functions of the browser. 52 Browser
To open the toolbar, press and hold the scroll key on a blank spot on a web page. To move within the toolbar, scroll left or right. To select a feature, press the scroll key. From the toolbar, sele ct from the following: Recently visit ed pages â View a list of the web addresses you visi t frequently. Overview â View an overview of the current web page. Search by keyword â S earch on the current w eb page. Reload â Refresh the web page. Subscribe to w eb fee ds (if available) â View a list of available web feeds on th e current web page, and subscribe to a web feed. Navigate pages Mini Map and Page overvi ew help you navigate web p ages that contain a large amount of information. To activate Mini Map, select Options > Sett ings > General > Mi ni map > On . When you scroll through a large web page, Mini Map opens and shows an overvi ew of the page. To move in Mini Map, scroll left, right, up, or down. When you find the desired location , stop scrolling. Mini Map disappears and leaves you at the selected location. When you are browsing a web pa ge that contains a la rge amount of information, you ca n also use Page overview to view what kind of informat ion the web page conta ins. To see an overview of the current web page, press 8 . To find the desired spot on the web page, scroll up, down, left, or right. Press 8 again to zoom in and view the desired section of the web page. Web feeds and blog s Select Menu > Web . Web feeds are XML files on web pages that are used to share, for example, the latest news headlines or blogs. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages. The browser application auto matically detects if a web page contains web feeds. If web feeds are available, to subscribe to a web feed, select Options > Subscribe to web fee ds . To update a web feed, in the Web feeds view, select a feed and Options > Web feed op tions > Refresh . To define whether the web feeds are updated automatic ally, in the We b feeds view, select Options > Edit > Edit . This option is not av ailable if one or more feeds are marked. 53 Browser
Widgets Your device supports widg ets. Widgets are small, downloadable web application s that deliver multimedia, news feeds, and other information , such as weather reports, to your device. Installed wi dgets appear as separate applications in the Applications folder. The default access point for widge ts is the same as in the web browser. When active in the background, some widgets may update information automatically to your devic e. Using widgets may involve th e transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For information about data transmission charges, contact your service provider. Content search Select Menu > Web . To search for text, phone numbers, or e-mail address es within the current web page, select Options > Find keyword and the appropriate option. To go to the next match, scroll down. To go to the previous match , scroll up. Tip: To search for text within the current web page, press 2 . Download and purch ase items You can download items such as ringing ton es, images, operator logos, themes, an d vi deo clips. These items can be provided free of charge, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applications in your device, for example, a downloaded photo can be sa ved in Gallery. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted s ources, such as app lications that are Symbian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified⢠testing. To download an item : 1 Select the link. 2 Select the appropriate option to purchase the item (for example, Buy ). 3 Carefully read all th e information provided. 4 To continue or cancel the download, select the appropriate option (for example, Accept or Cancel ). When you start a download, a li st of ongoing an d completed downloads from the current browsin g session is displayed. To modify the list, select Options > Downloads . In the list, select an item a nd Options to cancel ongoing downloads, or open, save, or delete completed downloads . Bookmarks Select Menu > Web . 54 Browser
Select Options > Go to > Bookmarks . You can select web addresses from a list or from a collection of bookmarks in the Recently visited pages folder. If you start to enter a web address, the field opens automatic ally. indicates th e homepage defin ed for the default ac cess point. To go to a new web p age, select Options > Go to > New web page . To send and add bookmarks, or to set a bookmark as the homepage, select Optio ns > Bookm ark options . To edit, move, or delete bookmarks, select Options > Bookmark manager . Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory location tha t is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information re quiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Cache . End the co nnection To end the connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . To delete the information the ne twork server collects about your visits to various web pages, select Option s > Clear privacy data > Cookies . Connection security If the security indica tor ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indi cate that the data transmission between the ga teway and the cont ent server (where the data is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmi ssion between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You ar e notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connecti ons and software instal lation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased se curity. The existence of a certif icate d oes not offer an y protection by itself; the certificate manager must co ntain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increa sed security to be available. Certificates have a restri cted lifetime. If "Expired 55 Browser
certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check th at the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certific ate settin gs, you mu st make sure that you really trust the owner of t he certificate and that the certificate really belong s to the listed owner. Web setting s Select Menu > Web and Option s > Settings . Select from the following: General settings Access point â Change the default access point. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider; you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Homepage â Define the homepage. Mini map â Turn Mini Map on or off. History list â While browsing, to select Back to see a list of the pages you hav e visite d during the current browsing session, turn History list on. Security warnings â Hide or show security notificati ons. Java/ECMA s cript â Enable or disable the use of scripts. Page setting s Load con tent â S e l e c t w h e t h e r y o u w a n t t o l o a d i m a g e s and other objects while browsing. Screen size â S e l e c t b e t w e en f u ll screen and the no rmal view with the options list. Default encoding â If text char acters are not shown correctly, you can select an other encoding according to the language of the current page. Block pop-ups â Allow or block automatic opening of pop-ups while browsing. Automatic reload â If you wa nt the web pages to be refreshed automatically while browsing, select On . Font size â Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy sett ings Recently visited pages â Enable or disable automatic bookmark collectin g. If you want to continue saving th e addresses of the visited web pa ges in the Recen tly visited pages folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . Form data saving â If you do not want the data you enter in forms on a web page to be saved and used the next time you open the page, select Of f . Cookies â Enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. Web feed settings Automatic updates â Defi ne whether you want web feeds to be updated automatically and how often you want to update them. S etting the application to retrieve web feeds automatically may involve the tr ansmission of large amounts of data thro ugh your service provider' s network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmiss ion charges. Acc. point for au to-update â Select the desired acc ess point for updating. This opt ion is only available when Automatic updates is activated. 56 Browser
Music Warning: Continuous exposure to high volume m ay damage your hearing. Listen to music a t a moderate level, and do not hold the device near your ea r when the loudspeaker is in use. FM radio The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenn a. A compatible heads et or accessory needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly. To open the radio, select Menu > Mu sic > FM radio . When you open the radio for th e first time , a wizard helps you to save local radio station s (network service). To check availability and costs of the visu al service and station directory services, contact your service provider. Listen to the radio Select Menu > Music > FM radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. You can make a c all or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The ra dio is muted when there is an active call. To start a station search, select or . If you have saved radio stations in your devi ce, to go to the next or previous saved station, select or . Select Options and from the following: Activate loudsp eaker â Listen to the radio using th e loudspeaker. Manual tuning â Change the frequency manually. Station dire ctory â View available stations based on location (network service). Save station â Save the station to which you are currently tuned to your st ation list. Stations â Open the list of your saved stations. Play in background â Return to the standby mode while listening to the FM radio in the background. Saved stations Select Menu > Music > FM radio . To open the list of your sa ved stations, select Op tions > Stations . To listen to a saved station, select Option s > Station > Listen . To change station deta ils, select Opti ons > St ation > Edit . FM radio settings Select Menu > Music > FM radio . 57 Music
To automatically search for a lternative frequencies if the reception is weak, select Options > Settings > Alternative f requencies > Auto scan on . To set the default access point for the radio, select Options > Settings > Access point . To select the region wher e you currently are, select Options > Settings > Current region . This sett ing is displayed only if there is no network coverage when you start the application. Nokia Music Store Select Menu > Music > Music store . In the Nokia Music Store (netwo rk service) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your device. To purchase music, you firs t need to register for the service. To access the Nokia Music Store, you must have a valid internet access point defined in the device. Nokia Music Store is not available for all countries or regions. To find more music in the different categories, select Options > Find in M usic store . To select the access point to use with th e Nokia Music Store, select Default access point . Nokia Inte rnet Radio Select Menu > Music > Internet radio . With the Nokia Internet Radio app lication (network service), you can listen to av ailable rad io st ations on the internet. To listen to rad io stations, you must have a wireless LAN (WLAN) or packet data access point defi ned in your device. Listening to the stations may involve the transmission of large amou nts of data through your service provider's network. The recommended connection method is WLAN. Check with your service provider for terms and data service fees before using other connections. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow large data transfers for a set monthly fee. Listen to inte rnet radio stations Select Menu > Music > Internet radio . To listen to a radio station on the internet, do the following: 1 Select a station from your favourites or the station directory, or search for stations by name from the Nokia Internet Radio service. To add a station manually, select Optio ns > Add station manually . You can also browse for station links with the Web browse rapplication. Compatible links are automatically open ed in the Internet Radio application . 2 Select Listen . The Now playing view opens, displaying information about the currently playing station and song. 58 Music
To pause the playback, press the scroll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To view station information, select Options > Station informati on (not available if you have saved the station manually). If you are list ening to a stat ion saved in your favourites, scroll left or right to listen to the previous or next saved station. Favourite stations Select Menu > Music > Internet radio . To view and listen to your favourit e stations, select Favourites . To add a st ation manually to favour ites, select Options > Add station manually . Enter the we b address of the station and a name that you want to appear i n the favourites list. To add the currently playing stat ion to favourites, select Options > Add to Favourites . To view station information, to m ove a station up or down in the list, or to delete a station from favourites, select Options > Station and the desired option. To view only stations beginning with p articular letters or numbers, start entering the characters. Matching stations are displayed. Search for stations Select Menu > Music > Internet radio . To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio service by name, do the following: 1 Select Search . 2 Enter a station name or the first letters of the name in the search field, and select Search . Matching stations are displayed. To listen to a station, select th e station and List en . To save a station to your favourites, select the sta tion and Options > Add to Favourites . To make another search, select Options > Search again . Station dire ctory Select Menu > Music > Internet radio and Statio n directory . The station directory is maintained by Nokia. If you w ant to listen to internet radio stations outside the directory, add station information manu ally or browse for station links on the intern et with the Web browser application. Select from the following: Browse by genre â View the available r adio station genres. Browse by language â View the languages in which there are stations broadcasting. 59 Music
Browse by country/region â View the countries in which there are stations broadcasting. Top stations â View the most popular stations in the direct ory. Internet radio settings Select Menu > Music > Internet radio and Option s > Settings . To select the default access point to con nect to the network, select Default access point and from the available options. If you wa nt the device to ask you to select the access point every time you open the application, select Always ask . To change the connection sp eeds for different connection types, select from the following: GPRS connection bitrate â GPRS pack et data connections 3G connection bitrate â 3G packet data connections Wi-Fi connection bitrate â WLAN connections The quality of the radio broa dcast depends on the selected connection speed. The higher the speed, the better the quality. To avoid bu ffering, use the highes t quality only with high speed connections. Nokia Podc asting With the Nokia Podcasting application (network service), you can search, discover, subscribe to, and download podcasts ov er the air, and pl ay, manage, an d share audio and video podcasts with your device. Podcasti ng settings To open Nokia Podcasting, select Menu > Music > Podcasti ng . Before using Nokia Podcasting, define your connection and download setti ngs. The recommended connection method is WLAN . Check with your service provider for terms and data service fees before using different connec tion methods. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow large da ta transfers for one monthly fee. Connecti on settings To edit the connection settings, select Options > Settings > Connection and from the following: Default access poin t â Select the access point to define your connection to the internet. Search service URL â Define the podcast search service URL to be used in searches. Download settin gs To edit the download set tings, select Options > Settings > Download and from the following: Save to â Define the location where you want to save your podcasts. Update inte rval â Define how often podcasts are updated. Next update date â Defin e the date of the next automatic update. Next update time â Define the t ime of the nex t automatic update. 60 Music
Automatic updates only occu r if a specific default access point is selected and Nokia Podc asting is running. If N okia Podcasting is not running, the automatic update s are not activated. Download limit (%) â Define the percentage of memory that is reserved for podcast downloads. If limit ex ceeds â Defi ne what to do if the downloads exceed the download limit. Setting the application to retrieve podcasts automa tically may involve the tran smission of large amo unts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. To restore the default sett ings, select Opti ons > Restore default in the settings view. Search podcasts The search service h elps you to find podcasts by keyword or title. The search service uses the po dcast search service URL that you defined in Podcasti ng > Options > Se ttings > Connection > Search service URL . To search for podcasts, select Menu > Music > Podcasting and Search , and enter the desired keywords. Tip: The search service looks for podcast tit les and keywords in descriptions, not specific episodes. General topics, such as football or hip-hop, usually give better results than a specific team or artist. To subscribe to marked channe ls and add them to your list of subscribed podcasts, select Subscribe . You can also add a podcast by selecting its title. To start a new sea rch, select Op tions > New sear ch . To go the website of a podcast, tap the podcast, and select Options > Open web page (network service). To see the details of a podcast, tap the podcast, and select Options > Description . To send a podcast to anothe r compatible device, tap the podcast, and select Options > Send . Directories To open directories, select Menu > Music > Podcasti ng and Directories . Directories help you find new podcast episodes to which to subscribe. The contents of the directories change. Select th e desired directory to update it (network service). The colour of the directory changes, when the update is complete. Directories can include podcas ts listed by popularity or themed folders. 61 Music
To open a themed folder, select the fol der. A list of podcasts is displayed. To subscribe to a podcast, select the title and Subscribe . After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, an d play them in the podcasts menu. To add a new web directory or folder, select Options > New > Web directory or Fol der . Enter the title and URL of the outline processor markup language (OPML) file, and select Done . To edit the selected folder, web link, or web directory, select Options > Edit . To import an OPML file stored on your device, select Options > Import OPML fi le . Select the location of the file, and import it. To send a directory folder as a multimedia message or using Bluetooth connectivity, select the folder and Options > Send . When you receive a message with an OPML file using Bluetooth co nnectivity, open the file to save the file int o the Received folder in Dire ctories. Open the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add to you r podcasts. Downloads After you have subscribed to a podcast, from directories, search, or by entering a we b address, you can manage, download, and play episodes in Podcasts. To see the podcasts you have subscribed to, select Podcasti ng > Podcasts . To see individual episode titl es (an episode is a particular media file of a podcast), select the podcast title. To start a download, select the epis ode title. To download or to continue to download select ed or marked episodes, select Options > Download . You can download multiple episodes at the same time. To play a portion of a podcast during download or after partial downloading, se lect the podcas t and Options > Play previe w . Fully downloaded podcasts ca n be found in the Podcasts folder, but are not shown until the library is refreshed. Play and manage podcasts To display the available ep isodes from the selected podcast, in Podcasts , select Open . Under each episode, you see the file format, the size of the file, and time of the upload. When the podcast is fully do wnloaded, to play the full episode, select it and Play . 62 Music
To update the selected podcas t or marked podcasts, for a new episode, select Option s > Update . To stop the updating, select Options > Stop update . To add a new podcast by entering th e URL of the podcast, select Options > New podcast . If you do not have an access point defined or if during packet data connection you are asked to enter a user name and password, contact your service provider. To edit the URL of the selected podcast, select Optio ns > Edit . To delete a downloaded podc ast or marked podcasts from your device, select Opt ions > Delete . To send the selected podcast or marked podcasts to another compatible device as .opml files as a multimedia message or by Bluetooth connectivity, select Options > Send . To update, delete, and send a group of selected podcasts at once, select Options > Mark/U nmark , mark the desire d podcasts, a nd select Options to choose the desired action. To open the website of the podcas t (network servic e), select Options > Open web pa ge . Some podcasts provide the op p ortunity to interact with the creators by commenting and voting. To connect to the internet to do this, select Options > View comments . Music player Music player supports files fo rmats such a s AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. You can also use Music player to listen to podcast episodes. Podcasting is the method for delivering audio or video content over the internet using either RSS or Atom technologies for playback on mobile devices and PCs. Play a song or a podcast episode To open Music player, select Menu > Music > Music player . You may have to refresh the musi c and podcast libraries after you have updated the song or podcast selection in your device. To add a ll available items to the library, in the Music player main view, select Options > Refresh library . To play a song or a podcast episode, do the following: 63 Music
1 Select categories to navigate to the song or podcast episode you want to hear. 2 To play the selected files, press . To pause playback, pres s ; to resume, press again. To st op playback, p ress . To fast forward or rewind, press and hold or . To go to the next item, press . To return to the beginning of the item, press . To skip to the previous item, press again within 2 seconds af ter a song or podcast h as started . To switch random play ( ) on or off, select Options > Shuffle play . To repeat the current i tem ( ), all items ( ) , o r t o s w i t c h repeat off, select Options > Repeat . If you play podcasts, shuffle and repeat are automatically switched off. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and st ereo image or to enhance bass, select Options > Settings . To view a visualisation du ring playback, select Opti ons > Show visualisation . To return to the standby mode and leave the p layer playing in the background, press the end key, or to switch to another open applicat ion, press and hold the menu key. To close the player, select Options > Exit . Playlist s Select Menu > Music > Music player . To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlist s . 64 Music
To view details of the playlist, select Optio ns > Playlist details . Create a playlist 1 Select Options > New playlist . 2 Enter a name for the playlist, and select OK . 3 To add songs now, select Yes ; or to a dd the songs later, select No . 4 If you select Yes , select artists to find th e songs you want to include in the playli st. Press the scroll key to add items. To show the song list under an artist titl e, scroll right. To hide the song list, scroll left. 5 When you have made your selections , select Done . The playlist is saved to the mass memory of your device. To add more songs later, when viewing the p laylist, select Options > Add songs . To add songs, album s, artists, genres , and composers to a playlist from the different vi ews of the music menu, select an item and Options > Add to playlist > Saved playlist or New playli st . To remove a song from a playlist, select Options > Remove . This does not delete the song from the device; it only removes it from the playlist. To grab so ngs and drop t hem to a new posit ion, use the scroll key. Podcasts Select Menu > Music > Podcasting . The podcast menu di splays the podcasts available in the device. Podcast episodes have three states : never played, partially played, and completely p layed. If an episode is partially played, it plays from the last playback position the next time it is played. If an episode is never played or completely played, it plays from the beginning. Home network with music player You can play content stored in your Nokia device remotely on compatible devices in a home network. You can also copy files from your Nokia de vice to other devices th at are connected to the home network. Home ne twork must be configured first. See "About home network" , p. 81 . Play a song or a podcast remotely 1 Select Menu > Mu sic > Music player 2 Select categories to navigate to the song or podcast episode you want to hear. 3 Select the desired song or podcast and Options > Play > Via external player . 4 Select the device in which the file is played. 65 Music
Copy songs or p odcasts wirelessly T o c o p y o r t r a n s f e r m e d i a f i l e s from your device to another compatible device in a home network, select a file and Options > Copy to home network . Content s haring does not have to be switched on in the h ome network settings. See "Activate sharing and define content" , p. 82 . Transfer music from PC You can use the following methods to transfer music: ⢠To v i ew y ou r d ev i ce o n a P C as a m as s m em or y d ev i ce where you can transfer any data files, ma ke the connection with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using a USB ca ble, select Mass storage as the connection mode. ⢠To synchronise music with Windows Media Player, connect a compatible USB da ta cable and select Media transfer as the connection mode. To change the def ault US B connection mode, select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > USB and USB connection mode . FM transmitter About the FM tr ansmitter The availability of the FM transmit ter may vary by count ry. At the time of writing, the FM transmitter may be used in the following European countries : Austria, Belgium , Bulgaria, Czech Rep ublic, Denmark, E stonia, Finland, Germany, Iceland, Ireland, Lithuania, Liechtenstein, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlan ds, Norway, Portuga l, Spain, Switzerland, Sweden , Turkey , and United Kingdom. For the latest information, an d the list of non-European countries, see www.nokia.com/fmtransmitter. With the FM transmitter, you can play songs in your device through any compatible FM rece iver, such as a car radio or a home stereo system. The operating distance of t he FM transmitter is up to a maximum of 2 metres (6.5 feet). The transmission ma y be subject to interference due to obstructions, such as walls, other electronic devices, or from public radio stations. The FM transmitter may cause interference to nearby FM receivers operating on the same frequency. To avoid interference, always search fo r a free FM frequenc y on the receiver before using the FM transmitter. The FM transmitter cannot be used at the same ti me as the FM radio of your device. The operating frequency range of the transmitter is from 88.1 to 107.9 MHz. When the transmitter is on and transmitting s ound, is displayed in the standby mode. If the transmitter is on , but not transm itting anything , is displayed and a periodic tone sounds. If the t ransmitter is not transmitting anything for several minutes, it sw itches off automatically. Play a song using FM transmitt er Select Menu > Music > Music player . T o p la y a s o ng s t o r ed in yo ur de vi ce th ro ug h a c om pa ti bl e FM receiver, do the following: 1 Select a song or a p laylist to be play ed. 66 Music
2I n t h e N o w p l a y i n g v i e w , s e l e c t Options > FM transmitter . 3 To activate the FM t ransmitter, select FM transmitter > On , and enter a frequency th at is free from other transmissions. For example, if the frequency 107.8 MHz is free in your area and you tune your FM receiver to it, you must also tune the FM transmitter to 107.8 MHz . 4 Tune the receiving device to the same frequency, and select Options > Exit . To adjust the volume, use the volume fu nction in the receiving device. Warning: Continuous exposure to high volume m ay damage your hearing. Listen to music a t a moderate level, and do not hold the device near your ea r when the loudspeaker is in use. If music is not played for se veral minutes, the transmitter is automatically deactivated. FM transmitter settings Select Menu > Music player > FM transmitter . To activate the FM transmitter, select FM transmitt er > On . To set a frequency manually, select Frequency and enter the desired value. To list the previously used frequencies, select Options > Last frequencies . 67 Music
Positioning (GPS) You can use applications such a s GPS data to determine your location, or measure dista nces and coordinates. These applications require a GPS connection. About GPS The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in the degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The availability of the coordinates may vary by region. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and main tenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United Sta tes government and is subject to change with th e United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan . Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Avai lability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditi ons. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete and metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited ac curacy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. Different positioning methods can be enabled or disabled in positioning settings. Assisted GPS (A- GPS) Your device also supports as sisted GPS (A-GPS). A-GPS is requires network support. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to retrieve assistance data over a packet data connection , which assists in calculating the coordinates of your current location when your device is receiving signals from satellites. When you activate A-GPS, your device receives useful satellite informati on from an assista nce data serv er over the cellular network. With the help of assisted data, your device can obtain the GPS position faster. Your device is preconfigured to use the Nokia A-GPS service, if no service provider-specific A-GPS settings are available. The assist ance data is retrieved from the Nokia A-GPS service server only when needed. To disable the A-GPS service, select Menu > Applications > GPS data and Opti ons > Positioni ng settings > Po sitioning methods > Assisted GPS > Disable . You must have an internet access point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data from the Nokia A-GPS service over a packet data connection. The access point for A-GPS can be defined in posi tioning settings. A wireless LAN (WLAN) access point cannot be used for this service. Only a packet data internet access point can be used. Your device asks you to select the internet access point when GPS is used for the first time. 68 Positioning (GPS)
Hold your device correctly The GPS receiver is located in the bottom of the device. When using the receiver, make sure that you do not cover the antenna w ith your hand. Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Es tablishing a GPS connecti on in a vehicle may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using the GPS receiver may drain the battery faster. Tips on creating a GPS connection If your device ca nnot find the sate llite signal, con sider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. ⢠If the weather conditions ar e bad, the signal strength may be affected. ⢠Some vehicles have tinted ( athermic) windows, whi ch may block the s atellite signals. Check satellite signal status To check how many sate llites your device has found, and whether your device is receiving satellite signals, select Menu > Appli cations > GPS data and Options > Satellite stat us . If your device has found satelli tes, a bar for each satellite is displayed in the satellite information view. The longer the bar, the strong er the satellite signal is. W hen your device has received enough da ta from the satellite signal to calculate the coordinates of your location, the bar colour changes. Initially, your device must rece ive signals from at leas t four satellites to be able to ca lculate the coordinates of your location. When the initial ca lculati on has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating the coordinates of your location with th ree satellites. However, t he accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. 69 Positioning (GPS)
Position req uests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position information. Service providers may offer information about local topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, based on the location of your dev ice. When you receive a position request, the service that is making the request is displayed. Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Reje ct to deny the reques t. Landma rks With Landmarks, you can sa ve the position information of specific locations in your de vice. You can sort the saved locations into different catego ries, such as business , and add other information to them, such as addresses. You ca n use your saved lan dmarks in compatible applications, such as GPS data. Select Menu > A pplications > Landmarks . The coordinates in the GPS are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. Select Optio ns and from the following: New landmark â Crea te a new landmark. To make a positioning request for your current location, select Current positio n . To select the location from th e map, select Select from map . To enter the position information manually, select Enter manually . Edit â Edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address). Add to category â Add a landmark to a category in Landmarks. Select each catego ry to which you want to add the landmark. Send â Send one or several landmarks to a compatible device. Your received landmarks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. T o edit and create new landmark categories, ope n the categories tab, and select Options > Edit categories . GPS data Select Menu > A pplications > GPS data . GPS data is designed to provide route guidance information to a select ed destination, position information about your curre nt location, and travelling information, such as the approximate distance to the destination and the approxim ate duration of travel. The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the intern ational WGS-84 coordinate system. To use GPS data, the GPS rece ive r of your device must initially receive position in formation from at least four satellites to calculate the coordinates of your location. When the initial calculatio n has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating the coordinates of your location with three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. 70 Positioning (GPS)
Route guidance Select Menu > Applications > GP S data and Navigation . Start the route guidance outdoor s. If started indoors, the GPS receiver may not receive the necessary information from the satellites. Route guidance uses a rota ting compass on the device display. A red ball shows the direction to the destination, and the approximate distance t o it is shown inside the compass ring. Route guidance is designed to show the straightest route and the shortest distance to the destination, measured in a straight line. A ny obstacles on the route , such as buildings and natura l obstacles, are ignored. Differences in altitude are not taken into a ccount when calculating the distance. Route guidance is active only when you move. To set your trip destinati on, select Op tions > Se t destinati on and a landmark as the destination, or enter the latitude and longitude coordinates. To clear the destination set for your trip, select Stop navigation . Retrieve posi tion information Select Menu > Applications > GP S data and Position . In the position view, you can view the position information of your current lo cation. An estimate of the accuracy of the location is displayed. To save your current loca tion as a landmark, select Options > Save po sition . La ndmarks are saved locations with more information, and th ey can be used in other compatible applications a nd transferred between compatible devices. Trip meter Select Menu > Applications > GPS data and Trip distance . The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GP S signals. To turn trip distance calculation on or off, select Options > Start or Stop . The calculated values remain on the display. Use this featur e outdoors to receive a better GPS signal. To set the trip distance and time and av erage and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calculation , select Options > Reset . To set the trip me ter and total time to zero, select Restart . 71 Positioning (GPS)
Nokia Maps About Maps With Maps, you can see your current location on the map , browse maps of different cities and countries, search for places, plan routes from on e location to another, save locations, and send the m to compatible devices. You can also purchase licences fo r traffic information and navigation services, if availabl e for your country or region. When you use Maps for the first time, you may need to select an internet access point for downloading maps. If you browse to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded in your device, a map for the area is automatically downloaded through t he internet. Some maps may be available in your device or on a memory card. You can also use the Nokia Map Loader PC software to download maps. To install Nokia Map Loader to a compatible PC, see www.noki a.com/maps. Tip: To avoi d data transfer costs, you can also use Ma ps without an internet connection, and browse the maps tha t are saved in your device or memory card. Note: Do wnloading conten t such as maps, s atellite images, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of la rge amounts of data (network service). Almost all digital cartog raphy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you download for use in this device. Network positio ning You can use the mobile network to find your current location. This is faster but less accurat e than with GPS, and you cannot use the location as a starting point for navigation. Select Menu > Maps . Use the mobi le network for posi tioning Select the network-based positioning method from the device se ttings. When you start the Maps applica tion and your GPS connection is ready, GPS replaces mobile network as the positioning method. Compass Select Menu > Maps . Your device has an internal compass. When the compass is enabled, the circle around the compass is green, and the map view rotates automatically according to the direction to which the top of the device is pointing. The compass has limited accura cy. Electrom agnetic fields, metal objects, or other exte rnal circumstances may also affect the accuracy of the compass. The compass should always be properly calibrated. The compass is ac tive by default. To turn off the compass, in the Maps main view, select Options > Tools > Turn compass off . When the compass is not turned on, the circle around the compass is white, and the map view does not rotate automatically. Turni ng off the compass is only 72 Nokia Maps
valid for the current session. When you open Maps the next time, it will be turned on automa tically. Before you can calibrate the compass yo u should check the following: ⢠GPS connection is active. ⢠The device sensors are on. S elect Menu > Settings > Phone > Sensor se ttings > Sensors > On . ⢠The map is zoomed to your GPS position. Otherwise the compass icon is not shown. To calibrate the compass : Rotate the device around all axes in a continuous movement until the calibrati on indicator changes its colour to green . If the indica tor is yellow , the accuracy of the compass i s low. If the indicat or is red, the compa ss is not calibrated. Move on a map Select Menu > Maps . When the GPS connection is active, shows your current location on the map. View your current or last known locati on Select Options > My position . Move on the map Use the scroll key. By default, the map is oriented nor th. When you have an active data connect ion and browse the map on the display, a new map is automatically downloaded, if you browse to an area not cover ed by the maps that have already been downloaded. The maps are automatic ally saved in the devi ce memory or on a compatible memory card, if available in your device. Zoom in and out on the map Press * and # . Change the map ty pe Select Options > Map mode . Display indicators Select Menu > Maps . The GPS indicator shows the availability of the satellite signals. On e bar is one satellite. When the device tries to find sa tellite signals, the bar is yellow. When the device receives enough data from the satellites for GPS 73 Nokia Maps
to calculate your location, the bar turns green. The more green bars, the more reliable the location calculation. Initially, your device must receive signals from at least four satellites to calculate your location. After the initial calculation, signa ls from three satellit es may be enough . The data transfer indicator shows the internet connection used, and the amount of data transferred since the application starte d. Find locations To search for locations, pr ess the scroll key and select Explore . Start entering th e loca tion name in the search field. The device suggests matching nearby loca tions. Select the location from the li st, or enter the location name in the search field, and select Search . 1 To find a specific address, select Options > Address search . 2 Start entering the requir ed information. The fields marked with an asterisk (* ) are mandatory. 3 Select the address from the list of s uggested matches. 4 Select Options > Search . To find an address saved in the contacts list, select Options > Address search > Optio ns > Select from Contacts . To search for locations by their coordinates, select Options > Address search > Optio ns > Search by coordinates . To select the coordinate format, scroll up or down. To search for locations in specific categories, such as restaurants or shoppi ng, press the scroll key, and select Explore . Select a category, an d enter the search terms in the search field. Plan routes You can create routes an d view them on the map. Select Menu > Maps . Create a route 1 Go to your starting point on the map. 2 Press the scroll key, and select Add to route . 3 Select Add new route point , and add the destination and more locations to the route. Change th e order of th e locations in the route 1 Go to a location. 2 Press the scroll key, and select Move . 3 Go to the place where you want to move the location, and select Select . Edit the route Press the scroll key, and select Edit route . Show the route on the map Select Show route . 74 Nokia Maps
Navigate to the destination Select Show route > Options > Start driving or Star t walking . To be able to navigate, you need to purchase a licence. Save the route Select Show route > Options > Save route . Save and send locations You can save your favourite locations to your device and send them to compatible devices. Select Menu > Maps . Save a location to your device Press the scroll key, and se lect Save . View your saved locati ons In the main view, select Optio ns > Favourites . Send a location to a compatible device Press the scroll key, and se lect Send . View your saved ite ms You can sort t he locations and routes you have saved to your device, and view them on the map. Y ou can also create collections of your favourite places, such as restaurants and museums. Select Menu > Maps . View the saved location s and routes Select Options > Favourites . Sort the save d locations Select Places > Optio ns > Sort . View the lo cation on the map Press the scroll key , and select Show on m ap . Add the location to a route Press the scroll key , and select Add to route . Create a collection Select Options > New co llectio n . Navigate to the destination To navigate to your desti nation, you must purch ase a licence for the navigation service. To purchase a licence for pedestrian and car navigation, select Options > Shop & licences > Drive & Walk . To purchase a lice nce for pedest rian navigation only, select Walk . The licence is region-spe cific and can be used only in the selected area . You can pay for the licence th rough a credit card or in your phone bill, if supported by your service provider. You can tran sfer the licence from your device to another compatible device, but the licence can only be used in one device at a time. When you use car navigation for the first time, you are asked to select the language of the voice guidance and download the related voice g uidance files. To change the language later, in th e main view, select Options > 75 Nokia Maps
Tools > Settings > Navigati on > Voice guidance . Voice guidance is not available for pedestrian navigation. To start navigating, scroll to a location, press the scroll key, and select Drive to or Walk to . To stop navigating, select Stop . Walk to yo ur destinatio n When you purchase a licence for pedestrian navigation, you can create routes that include pedes trian zones and parks, prioritise walkways and smaller roads, and omit motorways. With the licence, you also ge t the enhanced search service to your device, if available for your country or region. The enhanced search service enables you to find local events and travelling-related info rmation when you perform searches. Select Menu > Maps . Purchase a licence for pedestrian navigation Select Options > Shop & licences > Options > Shops for other regions > All regions > City explorer . You can pay for the licence through a credit card or in your phone bill, if supported by your service provider. Start navigating Go to a location, press the scroll key, and select Walk to . The distance between the start and end points of a walking route is limited t o a maximum of 50 ki lometres (31 miles) and the travelling sp eed to a maximum of 30 kph (18 mph). If the speed li mit is exceeded, navigation stops and is resumed once the speed is back within limits. If the destination is on off-road terrain, the route is displayed as a straight lin e to indicate the walking direction. There is no voice guidance available for pedestrian navigation, but the device guides you with a tone or vibration approximately 20 metres (22 yards) before you need to turn or make anot her manoeuvre. The guiding method depends on t he settin gs of the profile currently active in your device. See an overvi ew of the ro ute Select Options > Rout e overview . Stop navigating Select Stop . Drive to yo ur destination You can purch ase a licence for naviga ting on foot or by car. The licen ce is region-speci fic and can be used only in the selected area. To help navig ating and dr iving, you als o have lane assistance and speed limit warning services in your device, if available for your country or region. Select Menu > Maps . Purchase a lic ence Select Options > Shop & licences > Shop > Drive %s . 76 Nokia Maps
Start navigating by car Go to a location, press the scroll key, and select Drive to . When you use car navigation for the first time, you are asked to select the language of the voice guidance and download the related voice guidance files. Note: Downloading c ontent su ch as maps, satellite images, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of larg e amounts of data (network service). Switch vi ews during the navi gation Press the scroll key, and se lect 2D view , 3D view , Arrow view , or Route ove rview . Find an alternative route Select Options > Diff. ro ute . Repeat the voice gu idance Select Options > Repeat . Adjust the volume of the voice guidance Select Options > Volume . View the trip dis tance and duration Select Options > Dash board . Stop na vigati ng Select Stop . Your first consideration whi l e using Maps should be road safety. The service should not be used by the driver of a motor vehicle while driving. Traffic and safety The real-time traffic info rmation service provides information about traffic events tha t may affect your travel. You can purchas e and download the traffic information service to your device, if available in your country or region. When you purchase the lice nce, the location of speed cameras is shown on your route during navigati on and tracking, if this featu re is enabled and available for y our country or region. Some jurisd ictions prohib it or regulate the use of speed camera lo cation data. Nokia is n ot responsible for the accuracy, or the consequences of use of speed camera location data. Select Menu > Maps . Note: Downloading content such as maps, satellite images, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of larg e amounts of data (network service). Content such as satellite images, guides, weather and traffic information and relate d services are generated by third parties independent of Nokia. The content may be inaccurate and incomp lete to some extent and is subject to availability. Never rely solely on the aforementioned content and related services. Purchase a licence for the traffic information service Select Options > Shop & licences > Shop > Traffic & safety %s . 77 Nokia Maps
View informati on about traffic events Select Optio ns > Traffic info . The events are shown on the map as triangles and lines. View the d etails and possible re routing optio ns Select Optio ns > Open . Update the traffic inf ormation Select Update traffic info . Set your device to avoid traf fic events In the main view, select Options > Tools > Settin gs > Naviga tion > Reroute due to traffi c . Maps settings Select Menu > Maps . Select Optio ns > Tools > Settings and from the following: Internet â Define the internet settings. Naviga tion â Define the navig ation settings. Route â Define the routing settings. Map â Define the map settings . Synchronisation â Define the setting s for synchronising saved items with the Ovi Maps web service. Internet sett ings Select Menu > Maps . Select Optio ns > Tools > Settings > Intern et and from the following: Go online at start-up â Set the device to open an internet connection when you open Maps. Default access point or Network de stination â Select the access point to be used when connectin g to the internet. Roaming w arning â Set the device to notify you when registerin g to a netw ork other than yo ur home networ k. Navigat ion sett ings Select Menu > Maps . Select Options > Tool s > Se ttings > Navigation an d from the following: Voice guidance â Select the language of the voice guidance for car navigation. If you select a language with the text "with street names" , also the street names are said aloud. You may need to download the voice files before you can select the language. Backli ght â Define the backlight setting. Automati c zoom â Use automatic zooming. Traffic info update â Update the information about traffic events. Reroute due to traffi c â Plan a new route to avoid traffic events. Time indicator â Disp lay the travel time or estimated time of arrival. Speed limi t warner â Set the device to notify you when you exceed the speed limit, if speed limit information is available for your route. Safety spot w arner â Set the device to notify you when you approach a speed camera , if such information is available for your route. 78 Nokia Maps
Maps improv ement â Let Nokia use information from your device to improve the Maps application. The information is collected periodically while you are travelling with typical car speeds, and it is anonymous and encrypted. The information contains your direction, speed, location, satellite ti me, and accuracy of the positioning. The information is sent only when you use Maps over a fixed or wireless local area network connection. The information is deleted from your device once sent. The available options may vary. Route settings You can select the mode of transportation used when you create routes and what charact eristics you want the route to prefer. Select Menu > Maps . Edit the route settings Select Options > Tools > Sett ings > Route . Select the mode o f transportati on Select Transport mode > Walk or Drive . If you select Walk , one-way streets are regard ed as normal streets and walkways can be used. Use the fas test route Select Route selection > Faster route . This option is available only if you have selected Drive as the mode of transportation. Use the shortest route Select Route selection > Shorter ro ute . To plan routes that combine the advan tages of both the shortest and the fastest route, select Route selection > Optimised . You can also choose to allow o r avoid using motorways, tunnels, ferries, and toll roads. Map settings Select Menu > Maps . Select Options > Tools > Sett ings > Map and from th e following: Categories â Select what type of points of interest you want to see o n the map. Colours â Optimise the colour scheme for day or night usage. Memory to be used â Select where the map files are saved in your device. Maximum memory use â Select how much memory can be used to store maps. When the memory limit is reached, the oldest maps are removed. System of measurement â Select the metric or imperial system. Update maps To update the maps and v oice guidance files in your compatible device, download Nokia Maps Updater to your computer from www.nokia.com/maps. Connect your device to the computer, open Nokia Maps Updater, and do the following: 79 Nokia Maps
1 Select your language from the list. 2 If more than one device is connected to the comput er, select your device from the list. 3 When Nokia Maps Updater h as found updates, download them to your device. 4 Accept the download in yo ur device when prompted on the device display. Nokia Map Load er With the Nokia Ma p Loader applica tion, you can download maps and voice guidance file s from the internet to the device memory or a compat ible memory card. You must use the Maps applicat ion and browse maps at lea st once before using Nokia Map Loader, as Nokia Map Load er uses the Maps information to chec k which version of the maps to download. To install Nokia M ap Loader to a compatible computer, go to www.nokia.com /maps, and follow the i nstructions on the display. 80 Nokia Maps
Home network About home network Your device is compatible with Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) and certified by the Di gital Living Network Alliance (DLNA). You can u se a wireless LAN (WLA N) access point device or router to create a home network. Then you can connect compatible WLAN-ena bled UPnP devices to the network. Compatible devices may be your mobile device, a compatible PC, a sound system, a television, or a compatible wireless multimedia receiver connected to a sound system or televi sion. You can share and synchronise media files in your mobile device with other compatible UPnP and DLNA certified devices using the home ne twork. To activate the home network functionality and ma nage the settings, select Menu > Appli cations > Home media . You ca n also us e the Home media application to view and p lay media files from home network devices on your device or on other compatible devi ces such as a PC, sou nd system, or television. To view your media files on another home n etwork device, in Photos, for example, select a file, Options > Show vi a home network , and the device. To use the WLAN function of your device in a home network, you must have a working WLAN home connection and have other U PnP enabled home devices connected to the same home network. After setting up your home network, you can share you r photos and video clips with your friends and family at home. You are also able to store your medi a to a media server or retrieve media files from a compatible home server. You can play music stored in your device using a DLNA certified home stereo system, controlling the playlists and volume levels di rectly from your device. You can also view images captur ed with the camera of your device o n a compat ible TV sc reen, all controlled with your device over WLAN. The home network uses the security settings of the WLAN connection. Use the home network feature in a WLAN infrastructure network with a WLA N access point device and encryption enabled. Your device is connected to the home network only if you accept a connection reques t from another compatible device, or select the option to view, play, or copy media files on your device or search for other devices. Settings for home network To share media file s saved in Photos with ot her UPnP compatible and DLN A certified devices through a wireless LAN (WLAN), you must create and configure your WLAN home internet access point, then configure the settings for home network in the Home media application. The options related to home network are not available in applications before the s ettings in the Home media application have been configured. Select Menu > Applications > Home media . When you access the Home media application for the first time, the setup wizard opens, help ing you define th e home network settings for your device. To use the setup 81 Home network
wizard later, select Optio ns > Run wizard , and follow the instructions. To connect a compatible PC to th e home network, on the PC, you must install the rela ted software. The software is on the CD-ROM or DVD- ROM supplied with your device, or you can download it from the device support pages on the Nokia website. Configure set tings To configure the settings for home network, select Options > Settings and from the following: Home access point â To set the device to ask for the home access point every time you connect to the home network, select Always ask . To define a new access point that is used automatically when you use the home network, select Create new . If yo ur home network does not have WLAN secu rity settings activated, a s ecurity warning is displayed. You ca n continue and activate WLAN security later; or cancel defi ning the access poi nt and first activate WLAN securi ty. Device n ame â Enter a name for your device that is displayed to other comp atible devices in t he home network. Copy to â Select where to save copied media files. Activate sharing and define content Select Menu > A pplications > Home media . Select from the following: Content sharing â Allow or deny sharing media files with compatible devices. D o not activate cont ent sharing before you have configured all the other settings. If you activate content sharing, othe r UPnP compatible devices in the home network can view a nd copy the files you have selected for sharing in Images & video, and use playlists you have selected in Music. If you do not want other devices to access your files, deactiva te content sharin g. Images & v ideo â Select media files to share with other devices, or view the sharing stat us of images and videos. To update the content of the folder, select Options > Refresh conten t . Music â Select pla ylists to share with ot her devices, or view the sharing status and content of pla ylists. To update the content of the folder, select Options > Refresh content . View and share media files To share your media files wi th other UPnP compatible devices in the home network, activate content sharing. If content sharing is deactivated in your device, you can still view and copy the media files stored in another home network device if it is allowed by the other device. Show media files st ored in your device To show your images, videos , and soun d clips on anoth er home network device, such as a compatible TV, do the following: 1 In Photos, select an image or a video clip; or in Gallery, select a sound clip an d Optio ns > Show via home network . 2 Select a compatible device on which the media file is shown. Images are shown both on the other home network device and your de vice, and video and sound are played only on the other device. 82 Home network
3 To stop sharing a media file, select Option s > Stop showing . Show media files stored on another device To show media files that are stored on another home network device on your device (or on a compatible TV, for example), do the following: 1 Select Menu > Ap plications > Home media and Browse home . Your device searches for compatible devices. Device names are displayed. 2 Select a device. 3 Select the type of media you want to view from the other device. The availa ble file types depend on the features of the other device. To search for files using certain criteria, select Options > Find . To sort the found files, select Options > Sort by . 4 Select the media file or folder you want to view. 5 Select Play or Show , and On device or Vi a home network . 6 Select the device on which you want to show the file. To stop sharing the media file, select Back or Stop (available when playin g videos and music). Tip: You can print images saved in Photos through a home network with a UPnP compatible printer. Content sharing does not have to be activated. Copy media files To copy or transfer m edia files from your dev ice to another compatible device, such as a UP nP compatible PC, select a file in Photos and Options > Move and copy > Copy to home network or Move to home net. . Conten t sharing does not have to be switched on. To copy or transfer files from the other device to your device, select a file in the other device and the desired copying option from the opt ions list. Content sharing does not have to be switched on. Important security information When you configure your WLAN ho me network, enable an encryption method on your access point device, then on the other devices you intend to connect t o your home network. Refer to the documentation of the devices. Keep any passcodes secret a nd in a safe pla ce separate from the devices. You can view or change the settings of th e WLAN internet access point in your device. If you use the ad hoc operating mode to create a home network with a compatible devi ce, enable one of the encryption methods in WLAN s ecurity mode when you configure the internet access point. This step reduces the risk of an unwanted party joining the ad hoc network. Your device notifies you if another device at tempts to connect to it and the home network. Do not accept connection requests fr om an unknown device. 83 Home network
If you use WLAN in a network that does not have encryption, turn off sharing yo ur files with other devices, or do not sh are any private m edia files. 84 Home network
Nokia Video Centr e With Nokia Video Cent re (n etwork service), you can download and stream video clips over the air from compatible internet video services using a packet data or WLAN connection. You can also transfer video clips from a compatible PC to your device and view them in Video centre. Using packet data access poin ts to down load videos may involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data th rough your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transm is sion charges. Your device may have predefined services. Service providers may provide free content or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service provider. View and download video clips Connect to video services 1 Select Menu > Ap plications > Video centre . 2 To connect to a service to install video services, select Add new servi ces and the desired video service from the service catalogue. View a video clip To browse the content of in stalled video services, select Video feeds . The content of some video services is divided into categories. To browse video clips, select a category. To search for a video clip in the service, select Video search . Search may not be available in all services. Some video clips can be streamed over the air, but others must be first downloaded to your device. To download a video clip, select Options > Download . Downloads continue in the background if you exit the application. The downloaded video clips are saved in My videos. To stream a video clip or view a downloaded one, select Options > Play . When the video clip is playin g, use the selection keys and the scroll key, or the media keys to control the player. To adjust the volume, use the volu me key. Warning: Continuous exposure to high v olume may damage your hearing. Listen to music a t a moderate level, and do not hold the device near you r ea r when the loudspeaker is in use. Select Options and from the following: Resume download â Resume a paused or failed download. Cancel download â Cancel a download. Preview â Preview a video clip. This option is available if supported by the service. Feed details â View information about a video clip. Refresh list â Refresh the list of video clips. Open link in br owser â O pe n a l i n k i n t he we b br ow se r. 85 Nokia Video Centre
Schedule downloads To schedule an automatic download for video clips in a service, select Option s > Schedule downloads . Video centre automatically downloads ne w video clips daily at the time you define. To cancel scheduled downloads, select Manual download as the download method. Video feeds Select Menu > A pplications > Video centre . The content of the installed vi deo services is distributed using RSS feeds. To view and manage your feeds, select Video feeds . Select Optio ns and from the following: Feed subscrip tions â Check your current feed subscriptions. Feed details â Vi ew information about a video. Add feed â Subscribe to new feeds. Select Via Video directory to select a feed from the services in the video direct ory. Refresh feeds â Refresh the content of all feeds. Manage account â Manage your account options for a particular feed, if available. Move â Move video clips to a desired location. To view the videos available in a feed, select a feed from the list. My videos My videos is a stor age place for all video clips in the Video centre application. You can list downloaded video clips and video clips recorded wi th the device camera in separate view s. 1 To open a folder and view video clips, use the scroll key. To control the video pl ayer when the video clip is playing, use the media keys. 2 To adjust the volume, press the volum e key. Select Options and from the following: Resume download â Resume a p aused or failed download. Cancel download â Can cel a download. Video details â View information about a video clip. Find â Find a video clip. Ent er a search term tha t matches the file name. Show via home network â Play a downloaded video clip in a compatible home network. The home network must be configured first. Memory status â View the amount of free and used memory. Sort by â Sort video clips. Select the desired category. Move and copy â Mo ve or copy video clips. Select Copy or Move and the desired location. Transfer videos from your PC Transfer your own video clips to Video centre from compatible devices using a compatible USB data cable. Video centre displays only th e video clips which are in a format supported by your device. 86 Nokia Video Centre
1 To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, ma ke the connection with a USB data cable. 2 Select Mass storage as the connection mode. 3 Select the video clips you wan t to copy from your PC. 4 Transfer the video clips to E:\My Videos in the mass memory of your device, or to F:\My Videos in a compatible memory card, if available. The transferred video clips appear in the My videos folder in Video centre. Video files in other folders of your device are not displayed. Video centre settings In the Video centre main view, select Options > Settings and from the following: Video service selection â Select the video services that you want to appear in Vi deo centre. You can also add, remove, edit, and view the details of a video service. You cannot edit preinstalled video services. Connection settings â To define the network destination used for the network connection, select Network connection . To select the co nnection manu ally each time Video centre open s a network connection, select Always ask . To set GPRS connection on or off, select Confirm GPRS usage . To set roaming on or off, select Confirm roami ng . Parental control â Set an age limit to videos. The required password is the sa me as the device lock code. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . In video-on- demand services, videos which have the same or a hig her age limit than you have set , are hidden. Preferred memory â Select whether downloaded videos are saved in the mass memory or on a compatible memory card. If th e selected memory bec omes full, the device saves the content in the other memory. Thumbnails â Select whether to download and view thumbnail images in video feeds. 87 Nokia Video Centre
N-Gage About N-Gage N-Gage is a mobile gaming pl atform available for a range of compatible Nokia mobile devices. You can access N- Gage games, players, an d content through the N-Gage application on your device. You can also download games and access some features on your computer a t www.n- gage.com. With N-Gage, you can downlo ad and buy games, and play them by yourself or with friends. You can down load game trials to try out new games, a nd buy the ones you like. N- Gage also provides a way to keep in touch with other players, and to track and shar e your scores and oth er gaming achievements. To use N-Gage, you need a GPRS or 3G connection. You can also use WLAN if available. You also need the connection to access online features such as downloading ga mes, game licenses, multiplayer gami ng, or chat. You al so need the connection to participat e in onli ne or multiplayer games, or to send messages to other players. All N-Gage services, where conn ection to N-Gage servers is required, such as game file downloading, game purchase, online games, multiplayer gamin g, creating a player name, chat, and messa ging, involve tra nsmission of large amounts of data . Your service provider will charge for data transfer. For more information about data transf er plans, contact your mobile service provider. N-Gage v iews The N-Gage application consis ts of five different parts. Home opens when you start the N-Gage application. You ca n start playing or resume the game you played last, check your current N-Gage points, find more games, read your messages, or connect with an N-Gage friend who is available to play. In My games, you can play and mana ge games you have downloaded to your device. You can i nstall and delete games, rate and review games you have played, and recommend them to your N - Gage friends. In My profile, you can manage your profile information and details, and keep a record of your N-Gage gaming history. In My friends, y ou can invite other N- Gage players to your friends list, and see if they are online and available to play. You can als o send messages to your N-Gage friends. In Showroom, you can find information about N- Gage games, including screenshot s and player reviews. You ca n also tr y out new game s by downloading game tria ls, or enha nce your gaming experience with game extras for games already on your device. Get start ed Create a player name You can download, purchase, and pl ay games without a player name, but c reating on e is r ecommended. A player name enables you to participate in the N-Gage community, connect with other players, and sh are your gaming achievements, recommendations, and reviews. You also 88 N-Gage
need a player name to transf er your profile details and N- Gage points to another device. When you start the N-Gage application an d connect to the N-Gage service for the firs t time, you are prompted to create an N-Gage player name. You can connect to the network, for example, by setting your av ailability by selecting Options > Set Online Status > Available to Play . If you already have an N-Gage play er name, select I have an account, and enter your user name and password to log in. To create a new player name: 1 Select Register New Account. 2 Enter your date of birth, desired player name, and password. If the player name is already in use, N-Gage suggests a list of ava ilable similar names. 3 To register your player name, enter your details, read and accept the terms an d conditions, and select Register . You can also create your player name on the N-Gage website at www.n-gage.com. When you hav e created a play er name, edit your settings and personal information in the p rivate tab in My profile. Data transfer charges may a pply for player name creati on on your device. Start a game To start playing the game you last played, go to Home, and select Start Game . To resume a paused game, select Options > Resume Game . Track your progress To view your current N-Gage points, go to Home, a nd select Track My Progress . Play with friends To connect with N-Gage players on your friends list and to invite them to a game, select Play With Frie nds . N-Gage suggests a friend to play with based on your previous gaming history and t he availabi l i t y o f y o u r N - G a g e f r i e n d s . To find a different friend to play with, select Optio ns > View My Friends . This item is not displayed if your friends list is empty. See "Connect with other players " , p. 90 . Play and manage games To play and manag e the game s do wnloaded and installed on your device, select My Games . The games are sorted by the last-playe d date with the most recent fir st. There are five possible types of games in My games: 89 N-Gage
Full games â These are games you have purchased with a full licence. There may be several licence types available, depending on the game and your region. Trial games â These are full game files to which you have access only for a limited time or which have limited content. When the trial expi res, you must purchase a licence to unlock the full ga me and continue. These games are marked with a trail ba nner. Demo games â These are smaller sections of the game with only a very limited set of featu res and levels. These games are marked with a demo banner. Full expired â These are games that you have purchased with a limited licence, wh ich is now expired. These games are marked with a clock and an arrow. Not available â These are full games which you have removed, or which you have downloaded but the installation was not comple ted. These g ames are shown as unavailable in the games li st. Also, games inst alled on the memory card are shown as unavailable w hen the memory card has been removed. If a game extra has been downloaded but not fully installed, the respe ctive game graphic is also una vailable and the game cannot be play ed until the game extra has been installed. Edit profile details To edit your public profile details, select Optio ns > Edit Profile , open the public tab, and select from the following: Icon â Add an imag e to repr esent you. When you change the icon, N-Gage shows a list of all the images in your device Gallery that can be us ed as the icon. Select the image you want from the list, or use the search to find it. Motto â Add a short person al message. To edit the text, select Change . Favorite Gam e(s) â Enter the nam es of your favo urite games. Device Model â The model number of your device. This is defined automatically and cannot be edited. Show Location â S e l e c t w h e t h e r t o d i s p l a y y o u r c i t y a n d country in your public profile. You can change your location in the private tab. After you update your profile, log in to the service with your player name to ensure that the chan ges you made to your profile are synchronised with the N-Gage server. Connect with other players To connect with other N-Gage players and to man age your Friends list, go to My friends. You ca n search for a particu lar N-Gage player, invite them to your Friends li st, and then see which of yo ur friends are online and available to play. You can also send and receive private messages and game recommendations. Find and add friends To invite an N-Gage player to your friends list, enter the player's player name to the Add a Friend field in the friends list. Add a message to the invi tation, if needed. To send the invitation, select Send . If the player accepts the invitation, the player appears on your friends list. 90 N-Gage
If you do not have any N-Gage friends and wan t to meet other players, go to N-Gage Arena at www.n-gag e.com, and visit the chatrooms and forums. View friend informatio n To view information about a friend, such a s the friend's current N-Gage points or the most recently played ga mes, scroll to the player on your fr iends list . You must be on line and connected to the N-Gage service to see the current online status of your friends. The indicator next to the pl aye r name shows the frien dâÂÂs availability. You can send p rivate mess ages to your N- Gage friends even if you are unavailable or offline. Sort the frie nds list To sort your friends by availability, play er name, or N-Gage points, select Options > Sort F riends By . Rate a player To rate a player, scroll to the pla yer on your friends list, and select Option s > Rate Player . You can give a player a rating from one to five s tars. The ratin g you give affects the playerâÂÂs repu tat ion in the community. Send messages In My friends, you ca n send private mess ages to players in your friends list. If your friend is currently logged in to the N-Gage service, the friend can respond to your message, and you can chat one-on-one. To view new messages receiv ed from an N-Gage friend, scroll to the friend on yo ur friends list, and select Options > View Message . Read messages are deleted automatic ally when you exi t N-Gage. To view game recommendations, select Options > View Recommendat ion . Game recommendations are deleted automatic ally a week after yo u receive them. To send a message to an N-Gage friend, scroll to the friend on your friends list, and se lect Options > Send Message . The maximum size of a p rivate message is 115 characters. To send the message , select Submit . You need a GPRS, 3G, or wireless LAN connection to be able to use the messaging feature. Da ta transfer charges may apply. For more information, contact your mobile se rvice provider. N-Gage settings To change your N-Gage sett ings, select Op tions > Edit Profile , open the private tab, and select Op tions > N- Gage Settings . Select from the following: Player Name â Edit you player name. You can only edit the name if you have not logg ed in to th e N-Gage service yet. Personal Settings â D e f i n e yo ur pe rs on al de t ai ls , w hi ch are not shown in your public profi le, and subscribe to the N-Gage newsletter. Define also whether you wa nt to 91 N-Gage
receive notifications from your N-Gage friends while you are playing games. Connection Setti ngs â Select whether to allow the N- Gage application to connect to the network automatica lly when needed, and define your preferred access point and the data transfer limit that trigg ers an alert. Account Details â Select your purchase preferences. When you purchase a game, you a re asked if you want to save your billing details, includin g your credit card number, for faster purchasing in the future. 92 N-Gage
Messag ing Only devices that have comp atible features can receive and display mult imedia messages . The appearan ce of a message may vary dependin g on the receiving device. Messaging main view Select Menu > Messaging (network service). To create a new message, select New message . Tip: To avoid rewri ting messages that y ou send often, use texts in the Templates folder in My folders. You can also create and save your own temp lates. Messaging contains the following folders: Inbox â Received messages, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. My folders â Organise your mess ages into folders. New mailbox â Connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages, or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. Drafts â Draft messages th at have not been s ent are stored here. Sent â The last messages that have been s ent, excluding me ssages sent using Bluetooth connectivity , are stored here. You can change the number of mess ages to save in this folder. Outb ox â Messages waiting to be sent are t emporarily stored in the outbox, for ex ample, when your device is outside network coverage. Reports â You can request the network to sen d you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you ha ve sent (network se rvice). Write text Your device supports traditional text input and predictive text input. Wit h predictive t ext, you c an enter any letter with a single keypress. Predicti ve text input is based on a built-in dictionary to which you can add new words. When you write text, is displayed when you write text using traditional text input and when using predic tive t ext inp ut. Traditional text inpu t Press a number key ( 1 âÂÂ9 ) repeatedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters av ailable for a number key than are printed on the key . If the next letter is loca ted on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor ap pears (or scroll right to end the time-out period), and enter the letter. To insert a space, press 0 . To move the cursor to the next line, press 0 three ti mes. Predictive te xt input 1 To activate or deactivat e pr edictive text input, press # twice quickly. This activates or deactivates 93 Messaging
predictive text input for all editors in the device. indicates that predictive text input is acti vated. 2 To write the desired word, press the keys 2-9 . Press each key once for each letter. 3 When you have finished writing the word, a nd it is correct, scroll right to confirm it, or press 0 to add a space. If the word is not correct, press * repeatedly to view the matching words in the dictionary. If the ? character is displayed after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary, select Spell , enter the word (up to 32 letters) using trad itional text input, an d select OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary is full, the new word replaces the oldest added word. Write the first part of a compound word; to confirm it, scroll right. Write the second part of the compound word. To complete the compound word, press 0 to add a space. Tips on text input To insert a number in the letter mode, press an d hold the desired number ke y. To switch between the different character mode s, press # . To delete a character, press C . To delete more than one character, press and hold C . The most common punct uation marks are avai lable under 1 . To scroll them through one by one, if you use traditional text input, press 1 repeatedly. If you use predictive text input, press 1 , and then * repeatedly. To open a list of special characters, press and hold * . Tip: To select several special ch aracters from the special characters list, press 5 after each hig hlighted character. Change the writ ing la nguage When you are writing text, you can change the writing language. For example, if you are writing t ext using a non- Latin alphabet and wan t to write Latin characters, such as e-mail or web addresses, yo u may need to change the writing language. To change the writing language, select Options > Writing languag e and a writing languag e that uses Latin characte rs. After changing th e writing la nguage, for example, if you press 6 repeatedly to reach a sp ecific character, changing the writing language gives you access to characters in a different order. Edit text an d lists To copy and paste text, while pressi ng and holding # , scroll left or right to highlight text. To copy the text to the clipboard, while still holding # , select Copy . To insert the text into a document, press a nd hold # , and select Pas te . 94 Messaging
To mark an item in a list, scroll to it, and press # . To mark multiple items in a list, press and hold # while you scroll up or down. To end the selec tion, stop scrolling, and release # . Write and send messages Select Menu > Messaging . Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain ma liciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Before you can create a mult imedia message or write an e-mail, you must have t he correct connection settings defined. The wireless ne twork may limit the size of MMS message s. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. Only devices that have comp atible features can receive and display multimed ia messages. The appearance of a message may vary dependin g on the receiving device. Check the size limit of e-mail messages with your service provider. If you attempt to send an e-mail message that exceeds the size limit of the e-mail server, the message is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempts to res end it periodically. Sending an e-mail requires a data connection, and continuous attempts to resend t he e-mail may incur charges from your service provider. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a message or move it to the Drafts folder. Messaging requires network services. 1 To send a text or a multimedia message, select New message . To send an audio or e-mail message, select Options > Create message , and the relevant option. 2 To select recipients or grou ps from the contacts list, select To . To enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e- mail address manually, select the To field. To add a semicolon (;) that se parates the recip ients, press * . 3 In the Subject field, enter the subject of the e-mail or multimedia message. If the Subject field is not visible, select Optio ns > Message header fields to change the fields that are visible. 4 In the message field, write the message. 5 To add an object to a message or e-mail, select and the relevant type of content. The message type may change to m ultimedia message based on the inserted content. 95 Messaging
6 To send the message or e-mail, select , or press the call key. Your device supports text messages beyond the lim it for a single message . Longer messag es are sent as two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Characters with accents, ot her marks, or some language options take more spa ce, and limit the number of characters that can be se nt in a single message. Messaging inbox Receive mess ages Select Menu > Messaging and In box . In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread multimedia message, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a message, and 1 new message are displayed in the home sc reen. To open the message, select Show . To open a message in the Inbox folder, select the message. To reply to a received message, select Options > Reply . Multimedia messages Importa nt: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain ma liciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification t hat a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message cen tre. To start a packet data connection to retrieve the message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a mu ltimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a mes sage. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Options > Objects . If the message includes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presen tation, select the indicat or. Data, settin gs, and we b service me ssages Your device can receive ma ny kinds of messages that contain data, such as business cards, ringing tones, operator logos, calendar ent ries, and e-mail notifications. You may also recei ve settings from you r service provider in a configuration message. To save the data from t he message, se lect Optio ns and the corresponding option. Web service messages are no tifications (for example, news headlines) and ma y contain a text mess age or a link. For availability and subscrip tion, contact your service provider. Message reader With Message reader you can listen to text, multimedia, and audio messag es and e-mail. To change the message read ing settings in the Speech application, select Op tions > Speech . 96 Messaging
To listen to new messages or e-mail, in the home screen, press and hold the left se lection key unt il the Me ssage reader application opens. To listen to message s from your Inbox folder or e-mail from your Mailbox, select a message and Options > Listen . To stop the reading, press the end key. To pause or resu me, press the scroll key. To skip to the next message or e-mail, scroll ri ght. To replay the current message or e-mail, scroll left . To skip to the previous message, scroll left twice. To adjust the volume, scroll up or down. To view the current message or e-mail in text format without the sound, select Options > View . E-mail Set up your e- mail With the Nokia e-mail wizard, you can set up your corporate e-mail account, such as Microsoft Outlook, Mail for Exchange, or Intellisync, and your in ternet e-mail account. When setting up your corporate e-mail, you may be prompted for the name of the server associated with your e-mail address. Ask your company IT department for details. 1 To start the wizard, go to the home screen, scroll to the e-mail wizard, and press the scroll key. 2 Enter your e-ma il address and passwo rd. If the wizard is not able to configure yo ur e-mail settings automatically, you need to se lect your e-mail account type and enter the related a ccount settings. If your device contains any additional e-mail clients, those are offered to you when you start the e-mail wizard. Send e-mail Select Menu > Messaging . 1 Select your mailbox and Optio ns > Create email . 2 In the To field, enter the re cipient's e-mail address. If the recipient's e-mail address can be found in Contacts, start entering th e recipient's name, and select the recipient from the proposed matches. If you add several recipients, insert ; to separate the e-mail addresses. Use the Cc field to send a copy to other recipients, or the Bcc field to send a blind copy to recipients. If the Bcc field is not visible, s elect Options > More > Show Bcc field . 3 In the Subject field, enter the subject of the e-mail. 4 Enter your message in the text area. 5 Select Options and from the following: Add attachment â Add an attachment to the message. Priority â Set the priority of the message. Flag â Flag the message for follow-up. Insert template â Insert text from a template. Add recipient â Add recipients to the message from Contacts. Editing options â Cut, copy, or paste the selected text. 97 Messaging
Writing language: â Se lect the writing la nguage. 6 Select Options > Send . Add attachments Select Menu > Messaging . To write an e-mail message, select your mailbox and Options > Create email . To add an attachment to the e-mai l message, select Options > Add attachment . To remove the selected attachment, select Options > Remove attachme nt . Read e-mail Select Menu > Messaging . Importa nt: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain ma liciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. To read a received e-mail message, select the mailbox , and select the message from the list. To reply to the message sender, select Options > Reply . To reply to the sender and all other recipients, select Options > Reply to all . To forward the message, select Options > Forward . Download attachments Select Menu > M essaging and a mailbox. To view the attachments in a received e-mail message, scroll to th e attachment field, and select Options > Actions > Ope n . If there are several attachments in the message, a list ope ns showing which atta chments have been downloaded or not. To download the selected attachment or all the attachments from the list to your device, select Options > Download or Download all . The attachments are not saved in your device, and are deleted when yo u delete the mes sage. To save the selected attachment or all the downloaded attachments in your device, select O ptions > Save or Save all . To open the selected, down loaded atta chment, s elect Options > Actions > Open . Reply to a mee ting request Select Menu > M essaging and a mailbox. Select a received meeting request, Options , and from the following: Accept â Accept the meeting request. Decline â Decline the meeting request. Forward â Forward the meeting request to another recip ient . Remove from calendar â Remove a cancelled meeting from your calendar. 98 Messaging
Search for e- mail messages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To search for items within the recipients, subjects, and body texts of the e-mail messages in the mailbox, select Options > Search . To stop the search, select Optio ns > Stop search . To start a new se arch, select Options > New search . Delete e-mails Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To delete the selected e-mail message, select Options > Delete . The message is plac ed in the Deleted items folder, if available. To empty the Deleted items fo lder, select the folder and Options > Empty deleted items . Switch betw een e-mail folders Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To open another e-mail folder or mailbox, select Inbox at the top of the display. Select the e-mail folder or mailbox from the list. Disconnect from the mailbox Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To cancel the synchronisation between the device and the e-mail server, an d to work with e-mail withou t a wireless connection, select Options > Disconnect . If your mailbo x does not have the Disconnect option, sele ct Options > Exit to disconnect from the mailbox. To start the synchronisation again, select O ptions > Connect . General e-mail settings Select Menu > Messaging and Settings > Global settings . Select from the following: Message list layout â Select whether the e-mail messages in In box display on e or two lines of text. Body text preview â Preview me ssages when scrollin g through the list of e-ma il messages in Inbox. Title divi ders â To be able to expand and collapse the list of e-mail messages, select On . Download notifications â Set the device to display a notification when an e- mail attachment has been downloaded. Warn before delete â Set the device to displa y a warning before you delete an e-mail message. Load HTML images â Automatically load HTML images in e-mails. View mess ages on a SIM ca rd Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > SIM messages . 99 Messaging
Before you can view SIM messa ges, you must copy them to a folder in your device. 1 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 2 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 3 To start copying, select a folder. To view the messages, open the folder. Messaging settings The settings may be preconfigured in your device, or you may receive them in a me ssage. To enter settings manually, fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or an asteri sk. Some or all message cent res or access p oints may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or rem ove them. Text message se ttings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settin gs > Text message . Select from the following: Message centres â View a list of all text message centres that have been defined. Message centre in use â Select which message centre to use to deliver text messages. Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding system when available, select Reduced support . Receive report â Select whether the network sends delivery reports on your me ssages (network service). Message validity â Select how long the message centre resends yo ur message if the first at tempt fails (net work service). If the message cannot be sent within the vali dity period, the message is delete d from the me ssage centre. Message sent as â To learn if your message centre is able to convert text messages int o these other formats, contact your service provider. Preferred connection â Select the connection to use. Reply via same centre â Select whether you want the reply messag e to be sent using the same text me ssage centre number (network service). Multimedia message settings Select Menu > M essaging and Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Select from the following: Image s ize â Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. MMS creation mode â If you select Guid ed , the device informs you if you try to send a message that may not be supported by the recipi ent. If yo u select Restricted , the device prevents you from sending me ssages that may not be supported. To include content in your messages without notifications, select Free . Access point in use â Select which access point is used as the preferred connection. Multimedia retrieval â Select h ow you want to receive messages. To receive m essages automat ically in your home network, select Auto in home netw . . Outside your home network, you receive a notification that there is a message to retrieve in the multimedia messa ge centre. If you select Always automatic , your device automatically 100 Messaging
makes an active packet data connection to retrieve the message both in and out side your home network. Allow anonymous msgs. â Select whether you want to reject messages from an anonymous sender . Receive adve rts â Select whether you want to receive multimedia messag e advertisements. Receive reports â Select whether you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Deny rep ort sendin g â Select whether you want to prevent your device from sending delivery reports of received messages. Message validity â Select for how long the message centre resends your message if the first attempt fai ls (network service). If the me ssage cannot be sent within this time period, the message is deleted from the message centre. E-mail sett ings Manage mailboxes Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > E- mail . To select which mailbox you want to u se to send and receive e-mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox. To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, select Mailboxes , scroll to the desired mailbox, and select Options > Delete . To create a new mailbox, select Mailboxes > Options > New mailbox . The nam e you give to t he new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Mess aging ma in view. You can ha ve up to six mailboxe s. Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to change the connection settings, user se ttings, retrieval settings, and automatic retrieval settings. Mailbox settin gs Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settings > E- mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Mailbox settings . To edit the settings for the ma ilbox, select from the following: My e-mail address â Enter your e-mail address. User name â Enter your user name given to you by your service provider. Password â Enter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. Access point in use â Select an internet access point (IAP). Mailbox name â Enter a name for the mailbox. Mailbox typ e â Defines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4. This setting cannot be changed. Security â Select the security op tion used to secure the connection to the remote mailbox . Port â Define a port for the connection. 101 Messaging
APOP secure login (for POP3 only) â Use with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the se nding of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. User settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settin gs > E- mail > Mailboxes , a ma ilbox, and User settings . Select from the following: My name â Enter your own name. Your name replaces your e-mail address in the recipientâÂÂs device if the recipientâÂÂs device supports thi s function. Send message â Define how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immediatel y for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send mes sage . If you select During next conn. , e-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. Send copy to s elf â Select whether you want to send a copy of the e-mail to your own mailbox. Include si gnature â Select wheth er you want to attach a signature to your e-mails. New e-mail a lerts â Select whether you want to receive the new e-mail indications (a tone, a no te, and a mail indicator) when new e-mail is received. E-mail deletion â Select whether you want to delete e- mails from phone only, from phone and server, or to be asked each time separately. Reply-to ad dress â Define an e-mail address to which replies to e-mails sent from the mailbox in question are deli vered . Web service me ssage settings Select Menu > M essaging and Options > Settings > Service mess age . Select whether you want to rece ive service messages. To set the device to automatically activat e the browser and start a network connection to ret rieve content when you receive a service message, select Do wnloa d messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast se ttings Select Menu > Messag ing and Optio ns > Settings > Cell broadcast . Check the available topics and related topic numbers with your service provider. Select from the following: Reception â Select whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. Language â Select the languages in wh ich you want to receive messa ges: All , Selected , or Other . Topic detection â Select whether the device automatically searches for n ew topic numbers, an d saves the new numbers without a name t o the topic list. Other se ttings Select Menu > M essaging and Options > Settings > Other . Select from the following: Save sent mess ages â Select whether you want t o save a copy of the text messages, multimedia messages, or e- mail that you send to the Sent folder. 102 Messaging
Number of saved msgs. â Define how many sent messages are saved to the sent folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. Memory in use â Select the memory where you want to save your mess ages. 103 Messaging
Make calls Voice calls 1 In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. To remove a number, press C . For international calls, press * twice for the character (which replaces the international access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leadi ng zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 To make the call, press the call key. 3 To end the call (or to cancel the call attempt), press the end key. Pressing the end key always ends a call, even if another application is active. To make a call from Contacts, select Menu > Con tacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the search field. To call the contact, press the call key. If you ha ve saved several numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list, and press the call key. Options during a call To adj us t t he vo lum e d ur in g a call, use the volume key on the side of your device. You can also use the scroll key. If you have set the volume to Mute , select Unmute first. To send an image or a video clip in a multimedia message to the other participan t of the call, select Options > Send MMS (in UMTS networks only). You can edit the message and change the recipient before sending. Press the call key to send the file to a compatible device (network service). To put an active voice call on hold while answering another incoming call, select Optio ns > Hold . To switch between the active and the held call, select Options > Swap . To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Options > Send DTMF . Enter the DTMF string or se arch for it in Cont acts. To enter a wait character ( w) or a pause character (p), press * repeat edly. To send the tone, select OK . You can add DTMF tones to the phone number or DTMF fields in a contact card. Tip: When you have only one active voice call, to put the call on hold, press the call key. To activate the call, press the call key ag ain. During an acti ve call, to route the sound from the handset to the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate loudsp eaker . If you have a ttached a compatible headset with Bluetooth connect ivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Act ivate handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select Options > Act ivate handse t . 104 Make calls
To end an active call and replace it by answerin g the waiting call, select Options > Replace . If you have several calls acti ve, to end them all, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that yo u can use during a voice call are network services. Voice mail Select Menu > Tools > Cal l mailbo x . When you open the Voice mail application (network service) for the firs t time, you are asked to enter t he number of your voice mailbox. To call your voice mailbox, scroll to Voice mailbox , and select Options > Call voice mail box . To call your video mailbox, scroll to Video mailbox , and select Options > Call video mailbox . If you have configured net call settings to your device and have an internet call mailbox, to call the mailbox, scroll to the mailbox, and select Options > C all internet call mbx. . To call your mailbox in the standby mode, press and hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. Select the mailbox you want to call. To change the mai lbox number, select the mailbox and Options > Change num ber . Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press the call key, or open the s lide. To mute the ring ing tone o f an incoming call, select Silence . If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key. If you activate the Call divert > Voice calls > If busy function in phone settings to divert calls, declining an incoming call also diverts the call. When you selec t Silence to mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, you can send a text message w ithout rejecting the call, informin g the caller that you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send me ssage . To s et up this option and write a standard text me ssage, sele ct Menu > Tools > Settings an d Phone > Call > Reject call with message . Make a conference call Your device supports conference calls between a maximum of six particip ants, including yourself. 1 Make a call to the first pa rticipant. 2 To make a call to another participan t, select Options > New call . The first call is put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, to join the first participant in the conf erence call, select Option s > Conference . To add a new person to the call, make a call to another participant, and add the new call to the conference call. 105 Make calls
To have a private con versation with one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Scroll to the participant, and select Private . The conference call is put on hold on your device. The other participants can still cont inue the conference call. To return to the conference call, select Options > Conference . To drop a participant, select Options > Conference > Drop part icipant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4 To end the active conference c all, press the end key. Speed dial a phone number To activate t he feature, select Menu > To ols > Settings and Phone > Call > Speed dialling . To assign a phone number to one of the number keys ( 2-9), select Menu > T ools > Speed dial . Scroll to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Opt ions > Assign . 1 is reserved for the voice or video mailbox, and for starting the web browse r. To call in the standby mode, press the assign ed key and the call key. Call wait ing You can answer a call while you h ave another call in progress. To activate call waiting, select Settings > Phone > Call > Call wa iting (network service). To answer the waiting call, pr ess the call key. The first call is put on hold. To switch between th e two calls, select Swap . To connect an incoming c all or a call on hold with an active call and to disconnect yourself from the calls, select Options > Transfer . To end the active call, press the end key. To end both calls, select Options > End all cal ls . Voice dialling Your device automatically creates a voice tag for th e contacts. To listen to th e synthesised voice tag, select a contact and Opt ions > Voice tag details . Scroll to a contact detail, an d select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags m ay be difficult in a noisy environment or during an em ergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialling in all circumstances. When you use voice dialling, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a short distance away when you say the voice tag. 106 Make calls
1 To start voice dialling, in the home screen, press and hold the call key. If a compatible headset with the headset key is attach ed, pr ess and hold the headset key to start voice dialling. 2 A short tone sounds, and Speak now is displayed. Say clearly the name that is saved for the cont act. 3 The device plays a synthe sised voice tag for the recognised contact in the selected device language, and displays the name an d number. To cancel the voice dialling, select Quit . If several numbers are sa ved for a name, you can say a lso the name and the number type, such as mobile or telephone. Make a video call When you make a video call (network service), you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call. The live video im age, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. T o b e a b l e t o m a k e a v i d e o c a l l , y o u m u s t h av e a U S I M c a r d an d b e i n t h e co v e r a g e o f a U M T S n e t w o r k . F o r a v a il a b i l i t y of and subscription to video call services, contact your network service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls ca nnot be made while another voice, video, or data call is active. Icons You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have d enied video s ending from y our device. To send a still image instead, select Menu > Tools > Settings and Phone > Call > Image in video call . Even if you denied video sending during a video call, the call is still char ged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1 To start a video call, ente r the phone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a contact. 2 Select Options > Call > Video call . The secondary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. Starting a video call may take a while. Waiting for v ideo image is shown. If the call is not successful (for examp le, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a text or multime dia message inste ad. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear t he soun d through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending ( ), in which case you only hear the sound and may see a still image or a grey background graphic. 3 To end the video call, press the end key. 107 Make calls
During a vi deo call To change between showing video or hearing the voice of the caller only, select Options > Enable , or Disable and the desired option. To activate the loudspeaker, select Options > Acti vate loudsp eaker . If you have attached a compatible h eadset with Bluetooth connectivity , to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select Options > Activ ate handse t . To use the camera in the back of your device to send video, select Options > Use secon dary camera . To switch back to the camera in the front of your device, select Options > Use main ca mera . To take a snapshot of the video you are s ending, select Options > Send snapshot . Video sending is paused and the snapshot is shown to th e recipient. The snap shot is not saved. To zoom your image in or out, select Options > Z oom . To change the vide o quality, select O ptions > Video preference > Normal quality , Clearer detail or Smoother moti on . Answer or decline a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. To answer the video call, press the cal l key. Allow video image to be sent t o caller? is displayed. To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do not activate the video call, you only hear the sound of the caller. A grey sc reen replaces the video image. To replace the grey screen wi th a still image captured by the camera in your device, select Menu > Tools > Settings and Phone > Call > Image in video call . To end the video call, press the end key. Video sharing Use video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is active wh en you activate vi deo sharing. If you do not want t o use th e loudspeaker for the voice call while you sh are video, you can a lso use a compat ible headset. Warning: Continuous exposure to high volume ma y damage your hearing. L isten to mus ic at a mod erate level, and do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Video sharing requirements Video sharing requir es a UMTS connection. Your ability to use video sharing depends on the availabi lity of the UMTS network. For more information on the service, UMTS 108 Make calls
network availability, an d fees associated with using this service, contact your service provider. To use video sharing, ensure the following: ⢠Your device is set up for person-to-person connections. ⢠You have an active UMT S connection and are within UMTS network coverage. If y ou move outside the UMTS network during a video sharing session, the sharing stops while your voice call continues. ⢠Both the sender and recipient are registered to the UMTS network. If you invi te someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network coverage or does not have video sharing installed or person-to-pers on connections set up, the recipient does not receive invitations. You receiv e an error message that indicates that the recipient cannot accept the in vitation . Video sharing settings To adjust video shar ing settings, select Menu > Tools > Settings and Connection > Video sharing . To set up video sharing, yo u need person-to-person and UMTS connection settin g s. Person-to-pe rson connection s ettings A person-to-person connection is also known as a session initiation protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use video sharing. Contact your serv ice provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them to your device. Your service provider may send you the settings or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a cont act: 1 Select Menu > Con tacts . 2 Select the contact, or create a new contact. 3 Select Options > Edit . 4 Select Options > Add detail > Share video . 5 Enter the SIP address in the format username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know the SIP ad dress for the contact, you can use the phone number of the recipient, including the country code, to s hare video (if supported by the network service provider). UMTS connection settings To set up your UMTS connection: ⢠Contact your service provider to establish an agreement for you to use the UMTS network. ⢠Ensure that the UMTS acce ss point connection settings for your device are configured properly. For more information about the settings, contact your service provider. Share live video or video clips During an active voice call, select Options > Share video . 1 To share live video during the call, select Live video . To share a video clip, select Vi deo clip and the clip you want to sh are. You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able t o share it . If your device not ifies you 109 Make calls
tha t t he vi de o c li p m us t b e co nv er te d, sel ec t OK . Your device must have a video editor for the conversion to work. 2 If the recipient ha s several SIP addres ses or phone numbers including the coun try code saved in the contacts list, select the desired address or n umber. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipient is not available, enter the addres s or number of the recipient including the country code, and select OK to send the invitation. Your device sends th e invitation to the SIP addres s. Sharing begins automatically when the recipient accepts the invitation. Options during video sharing Zoom the video (availab le for sender only). Adjust the brightness (available for sender only). or Mute or unmute the microphone. or Turn the loudspe a ker on and off. or Pause and resume video sharing. Switch to full screen mode (available for receiver only). 3 To end the sharing sessi on, select Stop . To end the voice call, press the end ke y. When you end the call, video sharing also ends. To save the live video you share d, select Yes when prompted. The device notifies you of the location of the saved video. If you access other applicat ions while you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paused. To return to the video sharing view, and to contin ue sharing, in the standby mode , select Options > Continue . Accept an invitat ion When someone sends you a vi deo sharing invitation, the invitation message displays the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to silent, it rings when you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a s hare invitation and you are not within UMTS network coverage, you will not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following: Yes â Accept th e invitation, and ac tivate the sharing session. No â Reject the invi tation. The sender receives a message that you rejected the in vitat ion. You can a lso press the end key to reject the invitation and end the voice call. To mute the video on your device, select Opt ions > Mute . To play the video at th e original volume, select Options > Original vo lume . This does not affect the audio playback of the other party of the phone call. To end the sharing sess ion, select Sto p . To end the voice call, press the end key. When you end the call, also video sharing ends. 110 Make calls
Log The log stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed a nd received calls only if the ne twork supports these functions, the device is switched on, and within the network service area. Recent calls Select Menu > Applications > Log and Recent calls . To view missed, received, and dialled calls, select Miss ed calls , Received calls or Dia lled numbers . Tip: To open the dialled numbers list in the home screen, press the call key. Tip: To open the dialled numbers list in the home screen, press the call key. Select Options and from the following: Save to Contacts â Save the highlighted phone number from a recent calls li st to your contacts. Clear list â Clear the selected recent calls list. Delete â Clear a hi ghlighted ev ent in the s elected list. Log durati on â Select the time how long the communication information is saved in the log. If you select No log , no information is saved in the log. Call duration Select Menu > Applications > Log . To view the approximate duration of your last call, dialled and received calls, select Call duration . Note: The actual invoice for ca lls and services from your service provider may vary , depending on network features, rounding off for bi lling, taxes, and so forth. Packet data Select Menu > Applications > Log . To check the amount of data sent or received during packet data connections, select Packet data > All sent data or All received data . To clear both sent and re ceived information, select Options > Clear counters . You need the lock code to clear the information. Monitor all communication even ts Select Menu > Applications > Log . To open the general log wher e you can monit or all voice calls, text message s, or data and wireless LAN connec tions registered by the device, select the general log tab . Subevents, such as a tex t me ssage sent in more than one part and packet data connections, are logged as one communication even t. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre , or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To view how much data was transferred a nd how long a certain packet data connection lasted, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by Pack. , and select Options > View . 111 Make calls
To copy a phone number from the log to the clipboard, and paste it into a text mess age, for example, select Options > Use number > Copy . To filter the log, select Options > Filter and a filter. 112 Make calls
Internet calls About interne t calls With the internet call servic e (network service), you can make and receive calls over th e internet. Internet calls can be established between computers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional telephone. To be able to use the service, you must subscribe to the service, and have a user account. To make or receive an intern et call, you must be in the service area of a wireless LA N, and connected to an internet call service. Activate internet calls Select Menu > Contacts and an internet call service. To make or receive internet calls, contact your service provider to receive the intern et call connection settings. To connect to an internet call service, your device must be in a network service area. To activate your intern et call service, select Options > Activate s ervice . To search for available wire less LAN (WLA N) connections, select Options > Search for WLAN . Make internet calls When you have activated th e internet call feature, you can make an internet call from all applications where you can make a regular voice call, such as the cont acts list or log. For example, in the contacts list, scroll to the desired contact, and select Options > Call > Internet call . To make an internet call in the active s tandby, enter the phone number or internet address, and s elect Net call . 1 To make an internet call to an internet address that does not start with a digit, press any number key when the device is in the active standby, t hen press # for a few seconds to clear the display and to switch from number mode to letter mode. 2 Enter the internet addres s, and press t he call key. Blocked contacts Select Menu > Contacts . Scroll left, and select the internet calls service from the list. Blocked contacts are prevented from seeing your online status. To see your blocked contacts, select Options > View blocked list . To add a contact to your blocked contacts list, scroll to the contact, and select Options > Bl ock contacts . To unblock a contact, scroll to the contact, and select Options > Unblock . When you unblock a contact, you allow the contact to see your online status. Manage internet call services Select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > Net setti ngs . 113 Internet calls
To add a new internet call service, select Download . Internet call se ttings Select Menu > Contacts . Scroll left, and select the internet calls service from the list. To view or edit internet call settings, select Opt ions > Settings and from the following: Service conne ctivity â Select the desti nation settings for internet call connectivity, and edit destination details. To change a destination, scro ll to the service, and select Change . Availability requests â Se lect whether to automatically accept all incoming pres ence requests without a confirmation query. Service i nformation â View technica l information abo ut the selected service. 114 Internet calls
Contacts (pho nebook) In Contacts, you can save a nd update contact information, such as phone numbers, ho me addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail image to a contact card. You can al so create contact groups, which allow y ou to send text messages or e-mail to many recip ients at the same ti me. Save and edit names and nu mbers 1 To add a new contact to t he contacts list, select Options > Ne w contact . 2 Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . To edit contacts , select a contact and Option s > Edit . Manage names and numbe rs To delete a contact card, select a card, and press C . To delete several contact cards at the same time, select Options > Mark/Unmark to mark the desired contact cards, and pres s C to delete. To send contact inform ati on, select a card, Options > Send business card , and the desired option. To listen to the voice ta g assigned to the contact, s elect a contact card and Opti ons > Voice tag details > Play voice tag . Default numbers and addresses You can assign defau lt numbers or addresses t o a contact. If a contact has se veral numbers or address es, you can easily call or send a messa ge to a certain number or address. The default number is also used in voice dialling. 1 In the contacts list, s elect a contact. 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want t o add a number or an address, and select Ass ign . 4 Select a number or an address you want t o set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the contact view. Ringing tones, images, and call te xt for contacts You can define a ring ing tone for a contac t or group, and an image an d a call text for a con tact. When the contact calls you, the device plays th e selected ringing tone and shows the call text or image (if the callerâÂÂs phone number is sent with the call and y o ur device recognises it). To define a ringing ton e for a contact or a contact group, select the contact or contact group and Optio ns > Ringing tone , and a ringing tone. To define a call text for a co ntact, s elect the contac t and Options > Add text for call . Enter the call text, and se lect OK . To add an imag e for a contact saved in the dev ice memory, select the contact, Options > Add image , and an image from Photos. To remove the ringing to ne, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. 115 Contacts (phonebook)
To view, change or remove the image from a contact, select the contact, Options > Image , and the desired option. Copy contacts When you open the contacts list for the fi rst time, the device asks if you want to copy names and numbers from the SIM card to your device. To start copying, select OK . If you do not want to copy the conta cts from the SIM card to your device, select Cancel . The device asks if you want to view the SIM card contacts in the contacts directory. To view the contacts, select OK . The contacts list opens, and the names stored on your SIM card are indicated with . SIM services For availability and informa tion on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vend or . This may be the service provider or other vendor. SIM contacts To add the names and numbers stored on the SIM card to the contacts list in Contacts, select Options > Sett ings > Contacts to display > SIM memory . You can add and edit SIM contacts, or ca ll them. The numbers you save in Contacts a re not automatically saved to your SIM card. To save numbers to the SIM card, in Contacts, select a contact and Options > Copy > SIM memory . Fixed dialling Select Menu > Contacts and Options > SIM numbers > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling servic e, you can rest rict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM cards support the fixed dialling se rvice. For more information, contact your service provider. When security featur es that restrict ca lls are in use (such as call barring, closed us er gr oup, and fixed dialling), calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Call barring and call diverting cannot be acti ve at the same time. You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. Cont act your service provider for your PIN2 code. Select Options and from the following: Activate fi xed dialling â Activate the fixed dialing. Deactivate fixed dialling â Deactivate the fixed dialing. New SIM contact â Enter the contact name and phone number to which calls are allowed. Add from Contacts â Copy a contact from the list of contacts to the fixed dialling list. To send text messages to the SIM contacts whi le the fixed dialling service is active, you need to add the text message centre number to the fixed dialling list. 116 Contacts (phonebook)
Manage contact groups Create contact groups 1 In Contacts, scroll right to open the groups list . 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name, and select OK . 4 Select the group and Options > Add members . 5 Scroll to a cont act, and press th e scroll key to mark each contact you wa nt to add. 6 Select OK . To rename a group, select Options > Rename , enter th e new name, and select OK . Remove members from a grou p 1 In the groups list, select the grou p you want to modify. 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options > Remove from group . 3 To remove the contact from the group, select Ye s . 117 Contacts (phonebook)
Personalise your device You can personalise your devi ce by changing the standby mode, main menu, ton es, themes, o r font size. Most of the personalisation option s, such as changi ng the font size, can be accessed through the device settings . Change t he look of your device Select Menu > T ools > Settings and Settin gs > General > Personalisation > Themes . Use Themes to change the look of the display, such as the wallpaper and icons. To change the theme that is used for all the applications in your device, select General . To preview a theme before activating it, select Options > Preview . To activate t he theme, select Options > Set . The act ive theme is indicated by . The themes on a compatible me mory card (if inserted) are indicated by . The themes on the memory card are not available if the memory card is not inserted in the device. If you want to use the them es saved in the memory card without the memory card, sav e the themes in the device memory or mass memory fi rst. To change the layout of the main menu, select Menu view . To have a wallpaper im age or a slide show of changing images as the background in the standby mode, select Wallpaper > Image or Slide show . To change the background of the call bubble shown when a call comes in, select Call image . Audio them es Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings > General > Personalisatio n > Themes and Audio th eme . In Audio themes, you can select a sound scheme such as 'Space' to cover all device ev ents, su ch as calling, battery low, and mech anical events. The so unds can be t ones, synthesised voice tags, or a combination of both. Select Active audio th eme and the sound scheme you want to use as th e active audio theme. Acti vating an audio theme changes a ll your previous sound s ettings. To return to using the default sounds, select the 'Nokia ' audio theme. To change the sounds for de vice events, select a device event group, for example, Menu ev ents . To add 3-D effects to th e audio theme, select Options > 3-D ringing tone s . 118 Personalise your device
To change the lang uage that is us ed for the synt hesised voice tag, select Optio ns > Set Speech language . If you have changed the sounds of device events, to save the theme, select Options > Save theme . Set sounds f or events To disable the sound of a devi ce event, select the device event group, the device event, and Silent . To set a synthesise d voice tag as the sound for a device event, select the device event group, the device event, and Speech . Enter the desired text, and select OK . This option is not available if you have selected Say caller's name in Profiles. Set tones Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and General > Personalisation > Profiles . To modify a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Person alise . To set ringing tones, select Ringing tone and a ri nging tone. To select a bookmark and open a connection to a web page to download more tones, select Download sounds (network service). To set other tones, such as key tones and wa rning tones, select the desired sett ing. If you want the callerâÂÂs name t o be spoken when your device rings, select Options > Personalise > Say caller's name > On . The callerâÂÂs name mu st be found in the contacts list. 3-D tones Select Menu > Tools > 3-D ringing tone s . With 3-D tones, you can enable three-dimensional sound effects for ringing tones. No t all ringing tones support 3- D effects. To enable the 3-D effects, select 3-D ring ing tone effects > On . To change the ringing t one, select Ringing tone and the desired ringing tone. To change the 3-D effect tha t is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the effect, select from the following settings: Trajectory speed â Scro ll left or ri ght to adjust the speed at which sound moves from on e direction to another. This setting is not available for a ll ringing tones. Reverberation â Select the type of echo. Doppler effect â Select On to have the ringing tone sound higher when you are closer to your device, and lower when you are farther aw ay. When you get closer to the device, the ringing tone seems to become higher, and lower when you move away from it. This setting is not available for all ringing tones. 119 Personalise your device
To listen to the ringing tone with th e 3-D effect, select Options > Play tone . If you enable t he 3-D to nes but do no t select any 3-D effect, stereo widening is applied to the ringing t one. To adjust the ringing tone volume, select Tools > Profiles > Options > Personalise > Ringing volume . Modify t he standby mode To change th e look of th e standby mod e, select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and General > Personalisation > Standby mode . The active standby display shows application sh ortcuts, and events from applications su ch as calendar, e-mail, and music player. To change the selection ke y shortcuts or the default shortcut icons in the acti ve standby mode, select Tools > Settings > General > Person alisation > Standby mode > Shortcuts . To change the clock shown in the standby mode, select Menu > Applicatio ns > Clock and Options > Settings > Clock type . You can also change th e standby mo de background imag e or what is shown in the power saver in the de vice settings . Tip: To check whether there ar e applications running in the background, press and hold the menu key.To close the applications you do not use, scroll to an application in the list, and press C . Leaving applications runni ng in the background increases the demand on battery power. Modify the main menu To change the ma in menu vi ew, in the main menu, select Menu > Tools > Se ttings an d General > Personalisatio n > Themes > Menu vie w . You can change the main men u to be shown as Grid , List , Horseshoe , or V-shaped . To rearrange the main menu , in the main menu, select Options > Move , Move to folder , or New folder . Y ou can move applications used less frequently into folders and place applications th at you use more often into the main menu. 120 Personalise your device
Time management Clock Alarm clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . To view your active and inacti ve alarms, open the alarms tab. To set a new ala rm, select Options > New alarm . Define the repetition, if need ed. When an alarm is active, is displayed. To turn off the sounding alarm, select Stop . To st op the alarm for a certain tim e period, select Snooze . If your device is switched o ff when an alarm is due, your device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. Tip: To define the time period af ter which the alarm sounds again when you s e t it to snooze, select Options > Sett ings > Alarm snooze time . To cancel an alarm, select Options > Remove alarm . To change the time, dat e, and clock type settings, select Options > Sett ings . World clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . To view the time in different locations, open the world clock tab. To add locations to the list, select Options > Add location . You can add a maximum of 15 locations to the list. To set your curren t location, scroll to a location, and select Options > Set as current locat ion . The location is displayed in the clock main view, and the time in your device is changed according to the selected location. Ensure that the time is correct and matches your time zone. Clock settings Select Options > Settings . To change the time or date , select Time or Date . To change the clock sh own on the home screen, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone network to update the time, date, and time zone informati on to your device (network service), select Autom atic time update > On . To change the alarm tone, select Clock alarm tone . Calendar To open the calendar, select Menu > Calendar . Calendar views To switch between month, week, and to-do note view, select Options > Month view , Week view , or To-do view . 121 Time manag ement
To change the starting day of the week, the view that is shown when you open the calendar, or the calendar alarm settings, select Options > Settings . To go to a certain date, se lect Options > Go to date . To go to today, press # . Create a calendar entry 1 To add a new calendar entry, scroll to the desired date, select Option s > New entry and from the following: Meeting â Add a reminder of your meeting. Meeting request â Create and send a new meeting request. You must h ave a mailbox se t up for send ing requests. Memo â Write a general note for the day. Anniversary â Add a reminder of birthdays or spec ial dates (entries are repeated annually). To-do â Add a reminder of a task that must be done by a specific date. 2 To add a description to an entry, select Op tions > Add descriptio n . 3 To save the entry, select Done . Tip: In the day, week, or month calendar view, press a key (0-9). An appointment entry op ens, and the char acters you enter are added to the subject field. In the to-do view, a to-do note entry opens. When the calendar alarm sounds, select Silence to mute the alarm. To stop the calen dar alarm, select Stop . To set the alarm to snooze, select Snooze . To define the period after which the calendar alarm sounds again when set to snooze, select Options > Settings > Alarm snooze time . Manage calendar entries To delete several events at a time, open the month view, and select Opt ions > Delete entry > Before date or All entries . To mark a task as completed in the to-do view, select the task and Options > Mark as done . To send a calendar note to a compatible device, select Options > Send . If the other device is not compatible with Coordin ated Universal Time (U TC), the ti me information of received calendar entries may not be displayed correctly. 122 Time manag ement
Office File manage r Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . About File m anager Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . With File manager, you can browse, manage, and open files. The available options may vary. To map or delete drives, or to define settings for a compatible remote driv e connected to your device , select Options > Remote drives . Find and organise files Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . To find a file, select Optio ns > Find . Enter a search term that matches the file name. To move and copy files and folders, or to create new folders, select Options > Organise . Shortcut: To apply actions to mult iple items at once, mark the items. To mark or unmark items, press # . Manage a memory card Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . These options are available on ly if a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. Select Options and from the following: Memory card options â Rename or format a memory card. Memory card password â Password protect a memory card. Unlock memory card â Unlock a memory card. Back up files to a memory card Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . To back up files to a memory card, select the file types you want to back up, and Options > Back up phone memory . Ensure that your memo ry card has enough free memory for the files that yo u have chosen to back up. Format mass memory When mass memory is reformatted, all data in the memory i s p er ma n en tl y l os t. Ba c k u p data you want to keep before formatting the mass memory . You can use Nokia Ovi Suite or Nokia Nseries PC Suite to back up data to a compatible PC. Digital rig hts managemen t technolo gies (DRM) may prevent some backup data from being restored. Contact your service provider for more information about DRM used for your cont ent. To format mass memory, select Option s > Format mass memory . Do not format the mass memory u sing PC software because it may ca use degraded performance. 123 Office
Formatting does not guarantee that all confi dential data stored in the device ma ss memory is permanently destroyed. Standard formattin g only marks the formatted area as available spa ce and deletes the address to find the files again. The reco very of formatted or even overwritten data may still be possible wi th special recovery tools and software. About Quickoffice Select Menu > A pplications > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quickword for viewing Microsoft Word documents, Quicksheet for viewing Microsoft Excel worksheets, Quickpoint for Microsoft PowerPoint presentations, and Quickm anager for purchasing software. You can view Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003 documents (D OC, XLS, a nd PPT file formats) with Quickoffice. If you have the ed itor version of Quickoffice, you can also edit files. Not all file formats or features are supported. Currency converter Select Menu > A pplications > Office > Co nverter . Select Type > Currency . Before you can make currency conversions, you must select a base currency and add exchange rates. The default base currency is Home. The rate of the base currency is always 1. 1 Select Options > Currency rates . 2 The default na me for the cu rrency items is Foreign. To rename a currency, select Options > Rename currency . 3 Add the exchange rates for the currencies, and select Done . 4 In the other Unit field, select the currency to which you want to convert . 5 In the first Amount field, enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field shows the converted value automatically. To change the base currency, select Options > Currency rates , a currency and Options > Set as base currency . When you change base curr ency, you must enter new exchange rates because all pr eviously set excha nge rates are cleared. Calculator Make calculations Select Menu > A pplications > Office > Cal culator . This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, en ter the first number of the calculation. To remove a number wit h the keypad, press C . Select a function such as add or subtract. Enter the second number of the calculation, and select = . Save calculations To save the results of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . The saved res ult replaces the previously stored result in the memory. 124 Office
To retrieve the results of a calculation from the memory and use them in a c alculation, select Options > Memory > Recall . To view the last saved result , select Optio ns > Last result . Exiting the Calculator application or switching off the device does not clear th e memory. You can recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application. Zip manager Select Menu > Applications > Office > Zip . With Zip manager, you can create new archive files to s tore compressed ZIP formatted file s; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archive password for protected archives; and change settings, su ch as comp ression level, and file name encoding. You can save the archi ve files in the device memory or on a memory card. Notes Select Menu > Applications > Office > Notes . You can creat e and send notes to other compatible devices, and save received plain text files (TXT file format) to Notes . To write a note, start enteri ng the text. The note editor opens automatically. To open a note, select Open . To send a note to other compatible devices, select Options > Send . To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings for a note, select Options > Synchronis ation . Select Start to initialise synchronisation or Set tings to define the synchronisation settings for the note. Adobe Reader Select Menu > Applications > Office > Adobe PDF . With Adobe Reader, you can re ad PDF documents with your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; an d send PDF files using e-mail. 125 Office
Applications RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can play video clips or stream media files over th e air witho ut saving them to the devi ce first. RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. When playback is active, in the landscape view, use the media keys to control the player. Play video cl ips Select Menu > A pplications > RealPlayer . To play a video clip, select Video clips , and a clip. To list recently played files, in the application main view, select Recently played . In the list of video clips, scroll to a clip, select Options and from the following: Use video clip â As sign a video to a contact or set it as a ringing tone. Mark/Unmark â Mark items in the list to send or delete multiple items at the same time. View details â View details of the selected item, such as format, resolution, and duration. Settings â Edit settings for vid eo playback and streaming. Stream content ov er the air In RealPlayer, you can only open an RTS P link. However, RealPlayer pl ays a RAM file if you open an HTTP link to it in a browser. Select Menu > A pplications > RealPlayer . To stream content over the air (network service), select Streaming links and a link. You can als o receive a streaming link in a text me ssage or multim edia message, or open a link on a web page. Before live content begins streaming, your device connects to the site and starts loading the content. The content is not saved in your device. RealPlayer settings Select Menu > A pplications > RealPlayer . You may receive RealPlayer se ttings in a sp ecial message from your service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. To select the settings for the video, select Options > Settings > Video . To select whether to use a proxy server, to change the default access poin t, and to set the port range used when connecting , select Optio ns > Settings > Streaming . For the correct settings, contact your s ervice provider. 1 To edit the advanced settings, select Options > Settings > Streaming > Networ k > Options > Advanced sett ings . 126 Applications
2 To select the bandwidth used for a network type, select the networ k type and the desired value. To edit the bandwidth yourself, select User defined . Application manager With Application mana ger, you can see the software packages installed in your de vice. You can view details of installed applications, remo ve applications, and define installation settings. Select Menu > Applications > App. mgr. . You can install two types of applications and software to your devi ce: ⢠J2ME applicati ons based on Java⢠t echnology with the .jad or .jar file extensions ⢠Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system wi th the .sis or .sisx fi le extensions Only install software specifica lly designed for your device: Nokia N86 8MPNokia N86 8MPNokia N86 8MP. Software providers will often refer to the official model number of this product: N86-1N86-3N86. Install applicatio ns and software You can transfer installation files to your device from a compatible computer, dow nload them during browsing, or receive them in a multim edia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using other co nnectivity methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity. You can use Nokia Ap plication Installer in Nokia Ovi Su ite to install an applicat ion to your device. Icons in Application manager indicate the following: .sis or .sisx application Java application application not fully installed application installed in the mass memory application installed on the memory card Important: Only install and use applications and other software from tru sted source s, such as applic ations that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified testing. Before installation, note the following: ⢠To view the application ty pe, version number, an d the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View details . To display the security certificate details of the application, select Details: > Certificates: > View details . ⢠If you install a file that con tains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you have the original installation file or a full backup copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install the application again from the original ins tallation file or the backup copy. The JAR file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. When you are 127 Applications
downloading the JAR file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obta in these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. To install an application or software, do the following: 1 To locate an installation file, select Menu > Settings and App. mgr. . Alternativ ely, search installation files using File manager, or select Messaging > Inbox , and open a message that contains a n installation file. 2 In Application ma nager, select Opti ons > Install . In other applications, select the installation file to start the installation . During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the inst allation. If you install an application without a digital signature or certification, the device di splays a warning. Continue installation only if you ar e sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an ins talled application, select the application. If the application does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Installat ions folder in the main menu. To see which software packag es are installed or removed and when, select Optio ns > View log . Importa nt: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the devi ce to stop functioning. After you install application s to a compati ble memory card, installation files (.sis, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory a nd prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia Ovi Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, then use the file mana ger to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment, delet e the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applicat io ns and software Select Menu > A pplications > App. mgr. . Scroll to a software package, and select Options > Uninstall . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you ha ve the original software packag e or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to op en documents created with that software. If another software packag e depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. For more information, see the documentation of the inst alled software package. Application manager settings Select Menu > A pplications > App. mgr. . Select Options > Settings and from the following: Software installa tion â Select whether Symbian software that has no verifi ed digital signature can be installed. 128 Applications
Online certificate check â Check the o nline certificates before installing an application. Default web address â Set the default address used when checking onli ne certificates. Some Java applications ma y require that a message be sent or a network connection be made to a specific access point to download extra data or components. Recorder Select Menu > Applications > Recorder . With the Recorder application, you can record voice memos and telephone conversations. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. To record a sound clip, select . To stop recording a sound clip, select . To listen to the sound clip, select . To select the recording qualit y or where you want to save your sound clips, se lect Optio ns > Settings . Recorded sound clips are saved in the Sound clips folder in Gallery. To record a telephone conver sation, open recorder during a voice call, and select . Both parties hear a tone at regular intervals during recording. Speech Select Menu > Applications > Speech . With Speech, you can set the langua ge, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. To set the language for the message reader, s elect Language . To download additional languages to your device, select Options > Download languages . Tip: When you download a new lang uage, you must download at least one voice for that langua ge. To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice depends on the selected language. To set the speakin g rate, select Spee d . To set the speakin g volume, select Volume . To view details of a voice, open the voice tab, and select the voice and Option s > Voice details . To listen to a voice, select the voice and Options > Play voice . To delete languages or vo ices, select the item and Options > Delete . Message reader settings To change the message rea der settings, open the Settings tab, and define the following: Language detection â Activate automatic reading language detect ion. 129 Applications
Continuous reading â Activate continuous readin g of all selected messages. Speech prompts â Set the message reader to insert prompts in messages. Audio source â Listen to message s through the earpiece or louds peake r. Licences To view digital rights licences, select Menu > Applications > Licen ces . Digital righ ts management Content owners may use differe nt types of digital righ ts management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual property, includ ing copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM- protected content. With this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask that such DRM softwa re's ability to access new DRM-protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prev ent renewal of such DRM- protected content already in your device. Revocati on of such DRM so ftware does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM- protected content. Digital rights mana gement (DRM) protected content comes wi th an associat ed acti vation key that define s your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protected content, to back up both the activation keys a nd the content, use the backup feature of Nokia Ovi Sui te. If your device has WMDRM-protected content, both the activation keys and the con tent will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You ma y also lose the activation keys and the content if the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the activati on keys or the content may limit your ability to use the same con tent on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activation keys may be con nected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. In the main view, select from the following: Valid lic ences â View licences that are connected to media files or whose validity period has not begun. Invalid li cences â View licences that are not valid; the time period for using the media file is exceeded or ther e is a protected media file in the device but no connected activation key. Not in use â View licences that have no media files connected to them in the device. To buy more usage time for a media file, select an invalid licence and Options > Get new licence (web service messages must be enabled). 130 Applications
Settings Some settings may be preset fo r the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. General settings In general settings, you can edit the general se ttings of your device or restore the device to original default settings. You can adjust time and da te settings also in the clock. Personalisation settings Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and General > Personalisation . You can edit settings related to the display, standby mode, and general functions of your device. Themes allows you to change the look of the display. Voice commands opens the settings for the Voice commands application. Tones allows you to change the tones of the calendar, clock, and currently active profile. Display Light sensor â Scro ll left or righ t to adjust the light sensor that observ es the lighting conditi ons and adjusts the brightness of the display. The light sensor ma y cause the display to flicker in low light. Font size â Adjust the size of the text and icons on the display. Power save r time- out â S e l e c t t h e t i m e - o u t p e r i o d a f t e r which the power saver is activated. Welcome note / logo â The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time yo u switch on the device. Select Default to use the default image, Text to write a welcome note, or Image to select an image from Photos. Light time-out â Select a time-out after which the backlight of the di spla y is switched off. Standby mode Shortcuts â Assign shortcuts to the selection keys to be used in the standby mode and select which applications are shown in the active toolbar. If the active standby is set off, you can assign keypad shortcuts for the different presses of the scroll key. Change Menu view â S e l e c t Horizontal icon bar to view a horizontal toolbar and the content from different applications on the screen. Select Vertical icon bar to view a vertical toolbar on the screen. The content from different applications is hidden. To display the content, in the standby mode , select a shortcut and press the scroll key right. Select Ba sic to switch off active toolbar. Operator logo â This setting is only available if you have received and saved an operator l ogo. Select Off if you do not want the lo go to be shown. Language Changing the settings for th e phone language or writing language affects ever y application in your device until you change these settings ag ain. Phone language â Change the language of the display text in your device. This also affects the format used for 131 Settings
date and time and the sep arators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language according to the information on you r SIM card. After you change t he language, the device restarts. Writing l anguage â Change the writing langua ge. This affects the characters available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Predictive text â Set predictive text input on or off for all editors in the device. The predictive text dictionary is not available fo r all languages. Accessories settings Select Menu > T ools > Settings and General > Enhancemen t . Some enhancement connectors indicate which type of enhancement is connected to the device. The available settings depend on th e type of enhancement. Select an enhancement and from the following: Default profil e â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certain compatible enhancement to your device. Automati c answer â Select whet her you wa nt the device to answer an incomi ng call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic ans wer is disabled. Lights â Set whether lights rema in on after the time-out. TV-out settings To change the settings for a TV-out connection, sele ct TV- Out and from the following: Default profil e â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a Noki a Video Connectivity Cable to your device. TV screen size â Select the aspect ratio of the TV: Normal or Widescreen for widescreen TVs. TV system â Select t he analogue video signal sys tem that is compatible with your TV. Flicker filter â To improve image quality on the screen of your TV , sele ct On . The flicker filter may not diminish image flicker on all TV screens. Slide handling sett ings Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings and General > Slid e handli ng . Select from the following: Opening the sli de â Set the device to answer an incoming call when you open the slide. Closing the slide â Set the device to end an active call when you close the slide. Keyguar d activation â Se t the device to lock the keypad when you close the slide. Sensor settin gs and display rotation When you activate the sensors in your device, y ou can control certain funct ions by turning the device. Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings and General > Sensor settings . Select from the following: Sensors â Activat e the sensors. 132 Settings
Turning control â Selec t Silencing calls and Snoozing alarms to mute calls and snooze alarms by turning your device so that the displa y faces down. Security settin gs Phone and SIM Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and General > Security > Phone and SIM card and from the following: PIN code request â When active, the code is requested each time the device is swit ched on. Deactivating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code , PIN2 co de , and Lock code â You can change the PIN code, PIN2 code, and lock code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . If you forget the PIN or the PI N2 code, contact your service provider. If you forget th e lock code, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. Keypad autolock period â Select whether the keypad is locked when your device has been idle for a certain period of time. Phone autol ock period â To avoid un au thorised use, you can set a time-out a fter which the device automatically locks. A locked device cannot be used until the correct lock code is ente red. To turn off the autolock period, select None . Tip: To lock the device manually , press the power key. A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone . Lock if SIM card changed â You can set the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device mai ntains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Closed user group â You can specify a group of people to whom you c an call and who can call you (network service). Confirm SIM servi ces â You can set the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). Certifica te managemen t Select Menu > Tools > Settings an d General > Security > Certificate ma nagement . Digital certificates do not guarantee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. In the certificate management main view, you can see a list of authority certificates th at are stored in your device. Scroll right to see a list of pers onal certificates, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that invo lve transferri ng co nfidential information. The y s ho ul d a ls o b e us ed if yo u w an t t o r edu ce th e r isk of viruses or other mali cious so ftware and be sure of the authenticity of softw are wh en downloading and installing software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connecti ons and software instal lation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased se curity. The existence of a 133 Settings
certificate does not offer an y protection by itself; t he certificate manager must contai n correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased se curity to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check th at the current date and time in your device are correct. View certificate detailsâÂÂcheck auth enticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the va lidity period of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the corre ct security certificate in your devic e. To check certificate details, sc roll to a certificate, and select Options > Certificate details . The validity of th e certificate is checked, and on e of the following notes may be displayed: Certificate not truste d â You have not set any application to use the certificate. Expired certificate â The certificate validity period has ended. Certificate not vali d yet â The certificate validity period has not yet begun. Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Change the trus t settings Before changing any certific ate settings , you mus t make sure that you really trust the owner of t he certificate and that the certificate really belongs to th e listed owner. Scroll to an authority certificate, a nd select Options > Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the se lected certificate is shown. For example: Symbian installatio n : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. Internet : Yes â The certificate is able to certify servers. App. installation : Ye s â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java⢠application. Select Options > Edit trus t setting to change the value. Security module Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings and General > Security > Security module . T o v ie w o r e d i t a s e cu r i t y m o d u le (if available), scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information about a security module, scroll to it, and select Options > Security details . 134 Settings
Restore origina l settings Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and General > Factory settings . You can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. After resetting, th e device may take a longer time to p ower on. Documents and fi les are unaffected. Positioning se ttings Select Menu > Applications > Landma rks and Positioning se ttings . Position ing meth ods Integrated GPS â Use the integrated GPS receiver of your device. Assisted GPS â Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS) to receive assistance data from a n assistance data se rver. Bluetooth GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectivi ty. Network based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). Position ing server To define an access point, an d positioning server for A-GPS, select Positioning se rver . The positioning server may be preset by your service provider, and you may not be able to edit the settings . Notation settings To select wh ich meas urement sys tem you wa nt to use for speeds and distan ces, select Measurement system > Metric or Imperial . To define in which format the coordinate information is shown in your device, select Coordinate format , and the desired format. Phone settin gs In phone settings, you can edit settings related to phone calls and network. Call settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings an d Phone > Call . Send my caller ID â You can set your phone number t o be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the p erson to whom you are calling , or th e value may be set by your service provider when you make a subscription ( Set by network ) (network service). Send my internet call ID â You ca n set your internet caller ID to be displayed to or hidden from the person to whom you are calling. Call waitin g â To be alerted for incoming calls (network service) while you ar e in a call, select Activate . To check whether the function is activat ed, select Check status . Internet call waiting â T o b e n o t i f i e d o f a n e w i n c o m i n g internet call while you have a call in progress, select Activated . 135 Settings
Internet call alert â To be alerted for incoming internet calls, select On . If yo u select Off , you are not alerted, but you receive a notification if you missed a ca ll. Reject call with message â To send a text message to a caller informing why you coul d not answer the call, select Yes . Message text â W r it e a t ex t t o b e s en t in a t e xt me ss ag e when you reject a call. Image in vide o call â If video is not sent during a video call, you can select a still im age to be displayed instead. Automatic redial â Select On , and your device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attemp t. To stop automatic redialling , press the end key. Show call duration â Activate this sett ing if you want the length of a call to be displayed during the call. Summary after call â Activ ate this s etting if yo u want the length of a call to be displayed after the call. Speed dial â S elect On , and the n umbers assigned to the number keys (2 to 9) can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See " Speed dial a phone number " , p. 106. Anykey an swer â Select On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pres sing any keypad key, except the power key, selection keys, zoom/volume key, or capture ke y. Line in us e â This setting (network service) is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irresp ec tive of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you are not able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Line ch ange â To prevent line selection (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this settin g, you need the PIN2 code. Call divert Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings and Phone > Call divert . Call divert allows you to divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone nu mber. For details, contact your service provider. To activate call divert, select Activate . To check whether the option is active, select Check status . Several diverting options can be active at the s ame time. When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings and Phone > Call barring . Call ba rring (network s ervice ) allows you to re strict the calls that you make or re ceive with the device. For example, you can restrict a ll o utgoing internat ional calls or incoming calls when you are abroad. To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. 136 Settings
Voice call barring Select the desired barring option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Deactivate ), or check whether the option is active ( Check status ). Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Internet call barring To select whether anonymous calls are allowed from the internet, set Anonymou s call barrin g on or off. Network settings Your device can automatica lly switch between the GSM and UMTS networks . The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and Phone > Netw ork and from the following: Network mode â Select which network to use. If you select Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or UMTS network automatically , according to the ne twork parameters and the roamin g agreements between the wireless service providers. For details and roaming cost s, contact your network service provider. This option is shown only if supported by th e wireless service provider. A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Operator selectio n â Select Automatic to set the device to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the ne twork from a list. If the connection to the manually se lected netwo rk is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. The selected network mu st have a roaming agreement with your home cellular network. Cell info display â Set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network ba sed on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to acti vate cell info reception. Connection settings In connection settings, you can edit access points and other connectivity settings. Data connections and access points Your device supports packet data connections (network service), such as GPRS in th e GSM network. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the sa me time, and access points can share a data connection. In t he UMTS network, data connections remain ac tive during voice calls. You can also use a WLA N data connecti on. Only one connection in one wireless LAN can be active at a time, but several applic ations can us e the same internet access point. To establish a data connecti o n, an access point is requ ired. You can define different kinds of access points, such as th e following: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages 137 Settings
⢠Internet access point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access poin t you need with your service provider for the service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your service provider. Access points Create a new access point Select Menu > T ools > Settings and Connection > Destinations . You may receive access point settings in a message from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. When you select one of the access point groups ( , , , , ), you can see the access point types: indicates a protected access point indicates a packet data acces s point indicates a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point Tip: You can create internet acce ss points in a WLAN with the WLAN wizard. To create a new access point, select Access point . The device asks to c heck for available connections. After the search, connections th at are already available are displayed and can be shared by a new access p oint. If you skip this step, you are asked to select a connection method and to define the settings needed. To edit the settings of an a ccess point, select one of the access point groups, scroll to a n access point, and se lect Edit . Use the instructions provided by your service provider to edit the following: Connection name â Enter a name for the connection. Data bearer â Select the data connection type. Depending on the data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be d efined or with a red * . Other fields can be left empty, unless your service provider has instructed otherwis e. To use a data connection, your service provider m ust support this feature, and if n ecessary, activate it for your SIM card. Create access point groups Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings and Connection > Destinations . Some applications allow you t o use access point groups to connect to a network. To avoid selecting which acce ss point to use every time the device attempts to connect to a network, you can create a grou p that contain s various access points, and define the order in which the acces s points are used to connect to a network. For exampl e, you can add wireless L AN (WLAN) and pa cket data access points to an in te rnet access point group and use the group for browsing th e web. If you give the WLAN access point the higher priority, the device connects to the 138 Settings
internet throu gh a WLAN if available and throug h a packet data connection if not. To create a new access point group, select Options > Manage > New de stination . To add access points to an access point group, select the group and Options > New access po int . To copy an existing access point from another group, select the group, scroll to an existing access point, and select Options > Organise > Copy to othe r dest. . To change the priority order of access points within a group, scroll to an access point and Optio ns > Organise > Change priority . Packet data access points Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the display. Or, open one of the access point groups, select an access point m arked with , and select Edit . Use the instructions provided by your service provider to edit the following: Access point name â The access poin t name is provided by your service provider. User name â The user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by your service provider. Prompt password â If you want to set the device to ask for a password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes . Password â A password may be needed to make a da ta connection and is usually provided by your service provider. Authentication â Select Secure to always send you r password encrypted or Normal to se nd your password encrypted when possible. Homepage â Depending on the access point type you are setting up, enter the web a ddress or the address of the multimedia message centre. Use access point â Select After conf irmation to set the device to ask for confirmation before the connection using this access point is created, or Automatically to set the device to connec t to the des tin ation using this access point automatic ally. Select Options > Advanced sett ings and from the following: Network typ e â Select the internet protocol type to transfer data to and from y our device. The other se ttings depend on the selected network type. Phone IP address (for IPv4 o nly) â Enter the IP address of your device. DNS addresses â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. To obtain these addres ses, contact your internet service provider. Proxy server addr ess â Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy port number â E n t e r t h e p o r t n u m b e r o f t h e p r o x y server. 139 Settings
WLAN internet ac cess points Select Menu > T ools > Settings and Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the display. Or, open one of the access point groups, select an access point marked with , and select Edit . Use the instructions provided by your service provider to edit the following: WLAN network name â Select Ent er manually or Search for networks . If you select an exist ing network, WLAN network mode and WLAN security mod e are determined by the settings of its access point device. Network s tatus â Define whether the netw ork name is displayed . WLAN network mode â Select Ad-hoc to create an a d hoc network, and to allow devices to send and receiv e data directly; a WLAN ac cess point device is not needed. In an ad hoc network, all devices must use the s ame WLAN network name. WLAN security mo de â Select the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA/WPA2 . If you select Open n etwork , no encryption is used. The WEP, 802.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. Use access point â S e l e c t After confirmati on to s et the device to ask for confirmation before the connection using this access point is created or Automatically to set th e device to connect to the destin ation using this access point automatica lly. To enter th e settings for the se lected security mode, select WLAN security se ttings . Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: IPv4 setti ngs â Enter the IP addres s of your device, the subnet IP address, the de fault gateway, and the IP addresses of the primary and seconda ry DNS servers. Contact your internet service provider for these addresses. IPv6 setti ngs â Define the type of DNS address. Ad-hoc channel (only for ad hoc n etworks) â To enter a channel number (1-11) manually, select User define d . Proxy server addr ess â Enter the address for the proxy server. Proxy port numb er â Enter the proxy port number. Packet data settings Select Menu > T ools > Se ttings and Connection > Packet dat a . The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. Packet data connect ion â If you select When available and you are in a network tha t supports packet data, the device registers to the packet data network. Starting an active packet data connection (for example, to send and receive e-mail) is qu icker. If there is no packet data coverage, the device per iodically tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When needed , the device uses a packet data connection on ly if you start an application or action that needs it. Access point â The access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data modem to a compatible compute r. 140 Settings
High speed packet acces s â Enable or disable the use of HSD PA (netwo rk serv ic e) in UMTS networks. Wireless LAN s ettings Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and Connection > Wireless LAN . Show WLAN availabi lity â Select whether is displayed in the standby mo de when a wireless LAN is available. Scan for networks â If you set Show WLAN availability to Yes , se lect how often the device searches for available wireless LANs and upda tes the indicator. To view advanced settin gs, select Optio ns > Adva nced settings . Changing wireless LAN advanced settings is not recommended. SIP settings Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and Connection > SIP settings . Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) settings are needed for certain network services usin g SIP. You may receive the settings in a sp ecial text message from your service provider. You can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings. Configurations Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings and Connection > Configurations . You may receive tr usted server settings from your service provider in a configuration me ssage. Yo u can save v iew or delete these settings in configurations. Access point name control Select Menu > Tools > Settings an d Connection > APN control . With the access point name control service, you can restrict packet data connect ions and allow your device to use only certain packet data access points. This set ting is only avail able if y our SI M card s uppor ts the access point control serv ice. To set the control service on or off or to change the allowed access points, select Option s and the correspondin g option. To change the options, you need your PIN2 code. Contact your service provider for the code. Application settings To edit the settings of some of the applications in your device, select Menu > Tool s > Settings and Applications . To edit the settings, you ca n also select Op tions > Settings in each application. Remote configuration Select Menu > Tools > Device mgr. . With Device ma nager, you c an manage s ettings, data, and software on your device remotely. 141 Settings
You can connect to a server, and receive configuration settings for your device. You may receive server profiles and different configurat ion settings from your serv ice providers or company information management department. Configurat ion settings may include connection and other settings used by different applications in your device. The available options may vary. The remote configuration connection is usually started by the server when the device se ttings need to be updated. To create a new server profile, select Options > Server profiles > Options > New se rver profile . You may receive these settings from your service provider in a configuration message. If not , define the following: Server name â Enter a name for the configuration server. Server ID â Enter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. Server pass word â Enter a password to identify your device to the server. Access point â Select the access point to use for the connection, or create a ne w access point. You can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start a connection. This setting is available only if you have selected Internet as the bearer type. Host address â Enter the web ad dress of the configuration server. Port â Enter the port number of the server. User nam e and Passwor d â Enter your user ID and password for the co nfiguration server. Allow configuratio n â Se lec t Ye s to allow the server to initiate a configuration sessi on. Auto-accept all requests â S e l e c t Yes if yo u do not want the server to ask for your confirmation when it initiates a configuration session. Network authe ntication â Select whether to use http authentication. Network us er name and Ne twork password â Enter your user ID and password for the http authenticatio n. This setting is available only if you have selected Network authentication to be used. To connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device, select Options > Start configuration . To view the configuration log of the selected profile, select Options > View log . To update the device software over the air, select Options > Check for updates . The update does not erase your settings. When you re ceive th e update package on your device, follow the instru ctions on the display. Your device is restarted once th e installation is complete. Downloading software updates may involve t he transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device battery has enough power, or connect the charger before starting the upda te. 142 Settings
Warning: If you install a software upda te, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls , until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. Be sure to back up data before accepting ins tallation of an update. 143 Settings
Troubleshooting To view frequently asked qu estions about your device, visit th e product s upport pag es at www.ns eries.com/ support . Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for ex ample, a commercial internet service provider (ISP) or network service provider. Q: How do I close an ap plication that is not responding? A: Press and hold the menu key. To close an application, scroll to it, and press C . Pressing C does not close Music player. To close music player, select it from the list, and Options > Exit . Q: Why do images l ook smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, di scoloured, or bri ght dots app ear on the screen ev ery time I tur n on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. S ome displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Q: Why can't my device establish a GPS conne ction? A: Find more information about GPS, GPS receiver, satellite signals, and location inform ation in this user guide. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my frien dâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth connectivity? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have a ctivated Bluetooth connectivity, a nd are not in hidden mode. Check also that the distance between the tw o devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I e nd a Bluetoot h connection? A: If another device is conn ected to your device, you can end the connection from the other device or deactivate Bluetooth connectivit y in your device. Select Menu > Tools > Connectivity > Bluetoot h and Bluetoot h > Off . 144 Troubleshooting
Q: Why canâÂÂt the other device see the files stored on my device in the home network? A: Make sure that you have configu red the home network settings, content sharin g is turned on in your device, a nd the other device is UPnP compat ible. Q: What can I do if m y home network connection sto ps working ? A: Switch off the wireless LAN (WLAN) connection from your compatible PC and your device, and switch it on again. If this does no t help, restart your com patible PC and your device. If the connec tion still does not work, reconfigure the WLAN settings in both your compatible PC and device. Q: Why can't I see my compatible PC in my device in the home network? A: If you are using a firewall application in your compatible PC, check that it allows home media server t o use the external connection (you ca n add Home media server to the firewall application 's exceptions list). Check from the firewall settings that the fire wall application allows traffic to the following ports: 1900, 49152, 49153, and 49154. Some WLAN access point devi ces have a built-in firewall. In such cases, check that th e firewall in the access point device does not block traffic to the following ports: 1900, 49152, 49153, and 49154 . Check that the WLAN settings are the same in your device and compatible PC. Q: Why can't I see a w ireless LAN (WLAN) acce ss point even though I know I'm withi n its range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can only access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know the co rrect SSID, and have created a WLAN internet access poin t for the network on your Nokia device. Q: How do I switch wire less LAN (WLAN) off on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when you are not connected or trying to conn ect to another access point, or not scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can speci fy that your Nokia device does not sca n, or scans less often, for available networks in the ba ckground. WLAN switches off in between background scans. To change the backg round scan settings: 1 Select Menu > Too ls > Se ttings and Connection > Wireless LAN . 2 To increase the background scan time int erval, adjust the time in Scan for networks . To stop background scans, select Show WLAN availability > Never . 3 To save your changes, pres s Back . When Show WLAN availability is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not shown in the standby mode. However, you can still manually scan for available WLAN networks, and connect to WLAN networks as usual. 145 Troubleshooting
Q: How can I save my data before deleti ng it? A: To save da ta, use Nokia Ovi Suite or Nokia Nseries PC Suite to synchronise with or to ma k e a b ac k - up c op y of a ll data to a compatible comp uter.You can also send da ta using Bluetooth connectivity to a compatible device.You can also store data on a compatible memory card. Q: What do I do if the me mory is full? A: Delete item s from the dev ice memory or mass memo ry. If your device displays the note No t enough memo ry to perform ope ration. Delete some data f irst. or Memory l o w . De l e t e s o m e d a t a f r o m ph o n e m e m o ry . when you are deleting several items at the same time, delete items one by one, beginning wi th the smallest items. Q: Why canâÂÂt I sel ect a contact for my message? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, an address, or an e-ma il address. Select Menu > Contacts , the relevant contact, and edit the conta ct card. Q: How can I end the dat a connection w hen the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia me ssage centre . To stop the device from making a data connection , select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Multimedia retrieval and Manual to have the multimedia messaging ce ntre save messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when you have a new message in the multimedi a message centre. If you select Off , the device does not make any network connections related to multimedia messaging. To set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application o r action that needs it, select Menu > Tools > Se ttings an d Connection > Packet data > Packe t data connection > When ne eded . If this does not help, switch the device off, and swi tch it on again. Q: Why do I have problems connecting the device to my PC? A: Ensure that you have the late st version of Nokia Ovi Suite or Nokia Nseries P C Suite an d that it is installed and running on your compatible PC. For further information on how to use Nokia Ovi Suite or Nokia Nseries PC Suite, see the application help or visit the Nokia support pages. Q: Can I use my device as a fax modem with a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your device as a fax modem. However, with call diverting (network se rvice), you can divert incoming fax calls to a fax number. 146 Troubleshooting
Green tips Here are tips on how you can co ntribute to protect ing the environment. Save energy When you have fully charged the battery and disconnected the charger from the device, unplug the charge r from the wall outlet. You do not need t o charge your battery so often if you do the following: ⢠Close and disable applic ations, services, and connections when not in use. ⢠Decrease the brightness of the screen. ⢠Set the device to enter the power saver mode after the minimum period of inactivity, if available in your device. ⢠Disable unnecessary soun ds, such as keypad and ringing tones. Recycle Most of the materials in a Nokia phone are recyclable. Check how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia.com/werecycle, or with a mobile device, www.nokia.mobi/werecy cle. Recycle packaging and user guid es at your local recycling scheme. Save paper This user guide helps you get started with your device. For more detailed instructions, open the in-device help (in most applications, select Options > Help ). For further support, see www.nokia.com/support. Learn more For more information on the environmental attributes of your device, see www.nokia.com/ecodeclaration. 147 Green tips
Accessories Warning : Use only batter ies, chargers, and accessori es approved by Nokia f o r use with this particular model. The use o f any other types may invalidate any approval or wa rranty, and may be dangerous. I n particular, use of unappro ved chargers or batterie s may present a risk of fi re, explosio n, leakage, or ot her hazard. For availability of approved accesso ries, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not t he cord. Battery Battery and charge r information Yo u r d ev i ce is p ow e re d b y a r ec h ar ge a bl e ba tt e ry . Th e b a tt er y in t en de d fo r u se wi t h this device is B L-5K. Nokia may make a dditional batter y models availab le for this device. This device is intended for use wh en supplied with power fro m the following chargers: AC-10. The exact charger m ode l number may vary depending o n the type of plug. The plug variant is identified by one of the following: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, K, or UB. The battery can be charged and d ischarged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When t he talk and stand by times are noticea bly shorter than norma l, replace the battery. U se only Nokia approved batteries, and recha rge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a battery is being used for the fir st time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged perio d, it may be necessary to connect the charger, then di sconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. If th e battery is c ompletely discharge d, it may take several minutes before th e charging indi cator appears on the display or before any calls c an be made. Safe removal. Al ways switch the device off and di sconnect the charg er before removing the battery. Proper chargi ng. Unplug th e charger fro m the electrical plug and the d evice when not in use. Do not leave a ful ly charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifet ime. If le ft unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge o ver time. Avoid extreme tempe ratures. Always tr y to keep the battery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extreme temper atures re duce the c apacity a nd life time of th e battery . A device with a hot or cold batt ery may not work tem porarily . Batter y performance is pa rticularly limite d in temperatures we ll below freezing. Do not short-circuit . Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connectio n of the positive ( ) and negative (-) termin als of the battery. (These lo ok lik e metal st rips on the battery. ) This migh t happen, for example, when you carry a spar e battery in y our pocket or purs e. Short- circuiting the termi nals may damage the battery or the connec ting objec t. Disposal. Do not dispose of batt eries in a fire as they may explode. Dispose of batteri es according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispos e as household waste. Leak. Do not dismantle, cut, open, crush, bend, punctur e, or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a batter y leak, prevent batter y l i qu i d c on t ac t wi th sk i n o r ey e s. If t hi s happens, flush the aff ected areas immediately with water, or seek medical help. Damage. Do not mo dify, remanufacture, at tempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, or i mmerse or expo se it to wat er or other li quids. Batte ries may explode i f damaged. Correct use. Us e the battery only for i ts intended p urpose. Impro per battery u se may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and you b elieve the battery has been damaged, take it to a service cent re for inspection before continuing to use it. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. K eep your batter y out of the reac h of small children. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getti ng an original Noki a battery, purcha se it from a Nokia authorised serv ice centre or dealer, and inspect the hologram label using the following steps: 148 Accessories
Authenticate hologram 1 W hen you look at the hol ogram on the label, you sho uld see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking fro m another angle. 2 When yo u angle the hologram l eft, right, down and up, you should se e 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each si de respectively. Successf ul compl etion of the st eps is not a total ass urance of the auth entici ty of the battery. If you cannot c onfirm authenticity or if you have any reason to believe that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the lab el is not an authentic Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to t he nearest Nokia authorised service centre or dealer fo r assistance. To find out more a bout original Nokia bat teries, see www.nokia.com/battery. Taking care of your device Your device is a product of superior design and crafts manship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you p rotect your warrant y coverage. ⢠Keep the devi ce dry. Prec ipitation, hum idity, and all typ es of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will cor rode el ectronic circu its. If y our devi ce does get wet, rem ove the battery, a nd allow the device to dry c ompletely before replacin g it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dust y, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic compone nts can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hig h or cold temper ature. High temperatures ca n shorten the life of electronic de vices, damage b atteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. When the device warms to its normal temperature from a cold temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boar ds. ⢠Do not attempt to open the devic e other than as instructed in t his guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can bre ak internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or str ong detergents to clean the device. Only use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean t he surface of the device. ⢠Do not paint th e device. Paint can clog the moving parts and pr event proper operation. ⢠Use only th e supplie d or an approv ed replacement antenna. Unauthorised antennas, modificatio ns, or attachments could d amage the device and may violate regulations governing radi o devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Backup all data you want to keep, s uch as contacts and calendar note s. ⢠To reset the d evice from time t o time for optimum performance, power off the device and remove the battery. These suggestions appl y equally to your device, battery, charger, or any accessory. Recycle Always return your used electronic prod ucts, batteries, and packaging materials to dedicate d colle ction p oints. This wa y you help p revent uncon trolled wa ste dis posal and promote the recycling of materials. Chec k product environme ntal informatio n and how to recycle your Nokia products at www.no kia.com/werecycle, or nokia.mobi/werecycle. 149 Taking care of your device
The crossed-out wheeled-b in symbol on your pro duct, battery, literature, or packaging reminds you that all electrical and elec tronic products, batteries, and accumul ators m ust be ta ken to se parate co llection at the end of their workin g life. This requirement applies in the European Union. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For mo re enviro nmental information, s ee the product Eco - Declarations at www.nokia.com/environment . Additional safety information Small children Your device and its access ories are not toys. They may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reac h of small child ren. Operating environment Th is d evi ce me ets RF exp os ure gu ide li nes in the no rma l u se p osi ti on a t th e e ar o r at least 1.5 centimetres (5/8 inch) away from the body. Any carry case, belt clip, or hol der for body-worn operation should not contai n metal and should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. To send data files o r messages requir es a quality connectio n to the network. Data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Foll ow the separation distance inst ructions until the transmissi on is completed. Parts of the d evice are magnetic. Meta llic materials may be attracted to the devi ce. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic sto rage media near the device , because information stored on them may be eras ed. Medical devices Operation of radio tr ansmitting equipment, including wireless phones , may interfere with the function of inadequa tely protecte d medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of t he medical device to determine whether they are ade quately shielded from exte rnal RF energy. Switch off yo ur device when regulat ions posted instruct you to do so. Hospitals or heal th care facilities may use equipment sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices reco mm end a minimum separation of 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) betwee n a wireless device and an implant ed medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverte r defibrillator, to avoid potential interference wi th the medical device . Persons who have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimetres (6 i nches) from the medical d evice. ⢠Not carry the wireless d evice in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wirel ess device to the ear opposite the medical d evice. ⢠Turn th e wireles s device off if there is any rea son to sus pect tha t interf erence is taking place. ⢠Follow the manufacturer dire ctions for the implanted medica l device. If you have any quest ions about using your wireless device with an impla nted medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearing ai ds Some digital wireless dev ices may interfere with some hearing aids. Vehicles RF signals may affect i mproperly insta lle d or inadequately shield ed electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electr onic fuel inject ion, elect ronic antilo ck braking, electronic speed contr ol, and air bag systems. For mo re information, check with the manufacturer of your vehicle or its equipment. Only qualified personnel shou ld service the device or install the d evice in a vehicle. Faulty installatio n or service may b e da ngerous and may invalidate yo ur warranty. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mount ed and operating pr operly. Do not s tore or carry flammable l iquids, gase s, or explosive materi als in the sam e com partme nt as the de vice , its parts , or acc essori es. Reme mber that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place your device o r accessories in the air bag depl oyment area. Switch off your device before boarding an ai rcraft. The use of wireless t eledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of t he aircraft and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your d evice in any area w ith a potential ly explosive atmos p here. Obey all posted instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause a n explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at serv ice stati ons. O bserv e restri ctions i n fuel de pots, storag e, and distribution area s; chemical plants; or whe re blasting operatio ns are in progress. Areas with a po tentially expl osive atmosphere ar e often, but no t always, clearl y marked. They include areas wher e you would be advised to turn off your vehicle 150 Additional safety information
engine , below de ck on boat s, chem ical tran sfer or storage facili ties and wh ere th e air contains chemicals or part icles such as grain, dust, or m etal powders. You should check with the manufacturers o f vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such a s propane or b utane) to deter mine if this devi ce can be safely used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-progra mmed functions. If your device suppo rts voice calls over the internet (i nternet calls), activate both the internet ca lls and the cell ular phon e. The device may at tempt to make emer gency calls over b oth the cellula r networks and through your internet call provider if both are activated. Connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wir eless dev ice for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If t he device is not on, switch it on . Check for adequate signal strength. Depending on your device, y ou may al so need to complete th e following: ⢠Insert a S IM card if you r device use s one. ⢠Remove certain call restrictions yo u have activated in your device. ⢠Change your profile fro m Offline or Flight profile to an active profile. 2 P ress the end key as many times as need ed to clear the d isplay and ready the device for call s. 3 Ente r the official emergency number for your present location. Em ergency number s vary by l ocation. 4 P ress the call key. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as a ccurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communicat ion at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification info rmation (SAR) This mobile device meets guidelines for exposure to radio waves. Your mobi le devic e is a radio tr ansmitte r and rece iver. It i s designed not to exce ed the limit s for exposu re to radio wa ves recom mended by in ternati onal guide lines. These guideli nes were develope d by the independ ent scientific organisatio n ICNIRP and include s afety margins designed to assure the prot ection of all persons , regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines fo r mobile devices employ a unit of measurement k nown as the Speci fic Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR l imit stated in the ICNIRP gu idelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W /kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SA R are conducted using stan dard operating positi ons with the device transmitt ing at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The a ctual SAR level of an operating device can be below the maximum value because the device is d esigned to use only the power required to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a numbe r of factors such as ho w close you are to a net work base station . The highest SAR value unde r the ICNIRP gui delines for use of t he device at the ear is 0.76 W/kg. Use of device accessories may result in different SAR va lues. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting a nd testing requiremen ts and the network band. Additional SAR information may be pr ovided under product information at www.nokia.com. 151 Additional safety information
Index A access codes 19 access points 138 â groups 138 accessories See enhancements accessories settings 132 active standby mode 120, 131 active toolbar 31 â in camera 29 â in Photos 38 address book See contacts alarm â calendar note 121, 122 alarm clock 121 albums â media 39 anniversary notes 122 answering calls 105 antennas 15 application manager 127 applications 127 assisted GPS (A-GPS) 68 attachments 96 audio message s 95 audio themes 118 auto-update for time/date 121 B backing up device memory 123 backlight time-out 131 battery â charging 13 â power saver setting 131 â saving power 19 birthday notes 122 blogs 53 Bluetooth â authorising devices 48 â pairing 48 â passcode 48 â receiving data 47 â security 49 â sending data 47 Bluetooth connectivit y â blocking devices 49 bookmarks 54 brightness, display 131 browser 52 â bookmarks 54 â browsing pages 52, 53 â cache memory 55 â downloads 54 â searching conte nt 54 â security 55 â settings 56 â toolbar 52 â widgets 54 C cable 50 cache memory 55 calculator 124 calendar 121 calendar entry â deleting 122 â sending 122 call log 111 call waiting 106 calls 104 â answering 105 â conference 105 â dialled 111 â duration of 111 â internet calls 113 â missed 111 â options during 104 â received 111 â rejecting 105 â restricting See fixed dialling â settings 135 â voice mail 105 camera â colour 35 â flash 31 â image quality 35 â imaging mode 29 â indicators 28 â lighting 35 â location information 30 152 Index
â options 31 â scenes 32 â self-timer 33 â sequence mode 32 â settings 35 â video mode 34 â video quality 36 certificates 133 character encoding 94 charging the battery 13 chatting 26 clipboard, copying to 94 Clock â settings 121 clock 120, 121 compass 72 computer connections 50 See also data connections conference calls 105 configuration See settings connection manager 46 connection methods â Bluetooth 47 â data cable 50 contacts â copying 116 â default information 115 â deleting 115 â editing 115 â groups 117 â images in 115 â names and numbers 115 â ringing tones 115 â saving 115 â sending 115 â synchronising 50 â voice tags 115 Contacts on Ovi 26 content â synchronising, sending, and retrieving 21 converter 124 copying text to clipboard 94 copyright protection 130 currency â converter 124 D data connections â PC connectivity 50 â synchronisation 50 date and time 121 declining calls 105 device manager 141 dialled numbers 111 dismissing calls 105 display rotation 132 display settings 131 DLNA 81 downloads 54 DRM (digital rights management) 130 duration of calls 111 E e-mail â accounts 99 â adding attachments 98 â deleting 99 â disconnecting 99 â downloading attachments 98 â folders 99 â readin g 98 â searching 99 â sending 97 â set-up 97 â settings 99, 101 end all calls option 106 F factory settings, restoring 135 feeds, news 53 file manager 123 fixed dialling 116 FM transmitter 66 â playing songs 66 â settings 67 font settings 131 G gallery 43 â presentations 43 â sound clips 43 â streaming links 43 games 88 general information 17 153 Index
GPS â position requests 70 GPS (global positioning system) 68 grid view of menus 120 H headset 14 help application 17 home network 6 5 â copying files 8 3 â sharing content 82 HSDPA (high-speed downlink packet access) 25 I images â editing 41 inbox â message 96 inbox, message 96 indicators and icons 2 2 installing applications 127 internet call services â managing 113 internet calls 113 â activating 113 â blocking contacts 113 â making 113 â settings 114 internet connection 52 See also browser internet radio â favourites 59 â listening 58 â searching for stations 59 â settings 60 â station directory 59 J J2ME Java application support 127 Java scripts/applications 127 K keyguard 133 keypad 133 L landmarks 70 language settings 131 licences 130 light settings 131 list view of menus 120 location information 68 lock code 13, 19 locking â keypad 133 loudspeaker 24 M main menu 120 Maps 72 â compass 72 maps â browsing 73 â collections 75 â driving 76 â favourites 75 â finding locations 74 â indicators 73 â internet settings 78 â navigating 75 â network positioning 72 â Nokia Map Loader 80 â routes 74, 79 â saving locations 75 â sending locations 75 â settings 78 , 79 â traffic information 77 â updating 79 â walking 76 media â music player 63 â RealPlayer 126 meeting notes 122 meeting requests â receiving 98 meetings â setting up 122 memo notes See to-do no tes memory â clearing 20 â web cache 55 154 Index
message reader 96 â sele cting voic e 129 messages â folders for 93 â icon for incoming 96 â multimedia 96 â settings 100 Mini Map 53 MMS (multimedia message service) 95, 96 multimedia 43 multimedia messages 95, 96 music player 63 â playlists 64 â transferring music 66 muting soun d 105 my numbers 115 N N-Gage 88 â settings 91 N-Gage views 88 navigation tools 68 network settings 137 news feeds 53 Nokia Ma p Loader 80 Nokia Maps Updater 79 Nokia support information 17 notes 125 O offline profile 24 operator logo 131 options menu for calls 104 outbox, message 93 Ovi 27 Ovi Files 27 Ovi Store 26 P packet data connection â access point settings 139 â counters 111 â settings 140 page overview 53 pairing â device s 48 â passcode 48 PDF reader 125 personal certificates 133 personalisation 118, 131 phone setup 21 phonebook See contacts photographs See camera Photos â active toolbar 34 photos â file de tails 38 â organisi ng files 38 â red-eye 41 â tags 39 â toolbar 38 â viewing 37 PIN code 19 pin code 13 PIN2 code 19 playing â messages 96 podcasting â direct ories 61 â downloads 62 â playing 62 â searching 61 â settings 60 positioning information 68 positioning settings 135 power saver 131 predictive text input 93 presentations 43 presentations, multimedia 96 profiles â offline restrictions 24 proxy settings 139 PUK codes 19 punctuation, te xt entry 94 R radio â listening 57 â settings 57 â stations 57 RealPlayer 126 recording video clips 3 4 red-eye removal 41 155 Index
redial feature 136 reject ing calls 105 remote co nfiguratio n 141 ringing tones 119 roami ng 137 S scenes, image and video 32 screen settings 131 security â Bluetooth 49 â certificates 133 â web browser 55 security code 19 security module 134 self-timer, camera 33 sending â using Bluetooth 47 sensors 132 sent messa ges folder 93 service messages 96 settings â access point name contro l 141 â access points 138 â applications 141 â call barring 1 36 â call divert 136 â calls 135 â camera 35 â certificates 133 â clock 121 â configuration 141 â display 131 â FM radio 57 â FM transmitter 67 â home network 81 â internet calls 114 â internet radio 60 â language 131 â maps 79 â network 137 â packet data 140 â packet data access points 139 â personalisation 131 â podcasting 60 â positioning 135 â SIP 141 â slide 132 â standby 131 â tv-out 132 â video centre 87 â video sharing 109 â web browser 56 â WLAN 140, 141 â WLAN internet access points 140 shared video 108 shooting modes, camera 32 signature, digital 134 SIM card â messages 99 SIM card security 133 SIP 141 slide settings 132 slide show 39 SMS (short mes sage service) 95 software â updating 18 software applications 127 software updates 17 songs 63 sound clips 43 sounds 118 speaker phone 24 special characters, tex t entry 94 speech 129 speed dialling 106 standby mode 120, 131 streaming links 43 support resources 17 Symbian applications 127 synchronisation of data 50 T text â predictive input 93 text entry 93 text messages â receiving and reading 96 â replying to 96 â sending 95 â settings 100 â SIM messages 99 themes 118 time and date 121 156 Index
time zone settings 121 time-out for backlight 131 to-do no tes 1 22 tones 119 â ring settings 119 â settings 131 toolbar 29 transferring cont ent 21 troubleshooting 144 trust settings 134 TV configuration 132 tv-out mode 40 U unlocking keypad 133 updates â device software 17 UPIN code 19 UPUK code 19 USB charging 13 USB data cable 50 useful information 17 V video c alls 10 7, 10 8 â options during 108 Video Centre 85 video centre â downloading 85 â my videos 86 â transferring videos 86 â video feeds 86 â viewing 85 video clips â shared 108 video settings 36 video sharing â accepting invitation 110 â requirements 108 â sharing live video 109 â sharing video clips 109 voice calls See calls voice commands 106 See also voice dialling voice dialling 106 voice mail â calling 105 â changing number 105 volume controls 24 W wallpaper 118 web connection 52 web logs 53 week settings â calendar alarm 121 welcome note 131 widgets 54 wireless LAN settings 141 WLAN â access points 46 â availability 46 â MAC addr ess 45 WLAN wizard 46 world clock 121 wrist strap 15 Z Zip manager 125 zooming 30, 34 157 Index
é 2009 Nokia. All rights reserved. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-484 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other r elevant provisions of D irective 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declarati on of Conformity can be found at ht tp://www.nokia.com / phones/declaration_of_conformity/. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nserie s, N86, N-Gage, Nokia Original Accessories logo, and Ovi are trad emarks or registered t r ademarks of Nokia Corp oration. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Noki a Corporation. Other pro duct and company names mentioned herein ma y be trademarks or tradenames of the ir respective owner s. Reprodu ction, tra nsfer, dis tributio n, or storage of part or al l of the con tents i n this document in any form wi thout the pr ior written permission of Nokia is prohibited . Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. No kia reserves the right t o make changes and improv ements to any of the products describ ed in thi s documen t without prior no tice. This product includes software licensed from Sy mbian Software Ltd é1998-2009. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Sy mbian Ltd. Java and all Java-b ased marks are trad emarks or registered tr ademarks of Sun Micros ystems , Inc. Portions of the Nokia Maps software ar e é1996-2009 The FreeType Project. Al l rights reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in conne ction with information which has been encoded in co mpliance with th e MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer enga ged in a perso nal and nonco mmerci al acti vity an d (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video pr ovider. No lice nse is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information, including that related to promotional, internal, and commercial uses, may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http:// www.mpegla.co m. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL , CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. The third-party applicat ions provided with your device ma y have been created and may be owned by persons or entiti es not affiliat ed with or relat ed to Nokia. Nokia does not own the cop yrights or intell ectual p roperty rights to the third -party applications. As such, Nokia does not take any responsibility for end-user support, functionality of the applications, or t he i nformation in the applicat ions or these materials. Nokia does not provid e any warranty fo r the third-part y applications. BY USING THE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE APPLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPR ESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED B Y APPLICABLE LAW. YOU FURT HER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FI TNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR THAT TH E APPLICATIONS WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGHTS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, B UT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMP LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. Reverse engineering of software in the device i s prohibited to t he extent permitte d by appl icable law. Inso far as thi s user g uide con tains an y limit ations on Nokia 's representations, warr anties, damages and liabilities, such limitati ons shall likewise limit any representa tions, warranties, dama ges and liabiliti es of Nokia's licensors. The availability of particular products and applications and services for these products may vary by r egion. Please check with your No kia dealer for details and availability of language op tions. This device may contain commo dities, technology or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Diversion co ntrary to l aw is pro hibited.
FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTIC E Your device may cause T V or radio inter ference (for ex ample, when us ing a telephone in close pr oximity to re ceiving equipment ). The FCC or Industry Can ada can requ ire you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local se rvice facility. This devi ce complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operatio n is subject to the foll owing two conditions : (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device mus t accept any interference received, includi ng interferenc e that may cause und esired opera tion. Any changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by Nokia could void the user's authority t o operate this equipment. /Issue 2 EN